GIFT  OF 
rkeley  Publi  c  Librar" 


EDUCATION  DEPT. 


76  o  £ 

4^7 


^ 


i 


»* 


fs 


/ 


sT" 


4* 


r-ryyiIL 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  with  funding  from 

Microsoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/elementaryguidetOOallerich 


LATIN  COMPOSITION 
1 £r-Z — !  ?iVi  >*': 


AN    ELEMENTARY    GUIDE 


TO 


Writing   in    Latin 


PART   I.  — CONSTRUCTIONS 
PART   II.  — EXERCISES    IN    TRANSLATION 


BY 

J.   H.   ALLEN  and  J.   B.  GREENOUGH 


BOSTON 

GINN    AND    HEATH 

1878 


• 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1875,  by 

J.    H.   ALLEN  AND  J.    B.    GREENOUGH, 

in  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


PREFACE. 


This  book  completes  the  series  of  preparatory  text-books 
announced  by  the  present  editors.  It  has  been  prepared  with 
a  view  to  furnish  a  sufficient  amount  of  study  and  practice  in 
Latin  composition,  during  the  last  year  of  preparation  for  col- 
lege, and  the  first  of  a  college  course.  It  supposes  in  the 
learner  a  fair  acquaintance  with  the  language,  gained  by  the 
reading  of  the  usual  authors  and  the  careful  study  of  gram- 
mar and  notes,  with  some  elementary  practice  in  writing,  at 
least  as  much  as  that  given  in  the  "  Method,"  to  which  this  is 
intended  as  a  sequel. 

"Latin  Composition,"  so  called,  has  often  been  taught 
solely  by  the  use  of  detached  sentences  illustrating  the  vari- 
ous constructions  of  syntax,  translated  out  of  Roman  authors, 
to  be  re-translated  into  the  original  form.  We  are  persuaded 
that,  however  serviceable  this  may  be  to  give  a  certain  mechani- 
cal familiarity  with  the  formal  rules  of  Grammar,  it  is  not  a 
good  preparation  for  "  composition,"  in  the  sense  that  prop- 
erly belongs  to  that  word.  The  best  way  to  learn  intelligently 
the  usages  of  the  language  is  to  put  real  English  into  real 
Latin.  While  we  seek,  therefore,  to  cover  the  entire  ground 
of  syntactical  constructions,  the  suggestions  given  in  this 
book  are  throughout  from  the  English  point  of  view.  The 
question  we  have  attempted  to  answer  is  not  "How  closely 
may  this  or  that  phrase  in  Cicero  be  imitated  by  the  learner  ? " 

629481 


iv  Preface. 

but,  "  How  may  good  common  English  be  best  represented  in 
Latin  forms?"  We  would  thus  suggest  a  comparison  not 
merely  of  the  words  or  the  constructions,  but  (so  to  speak)  of 
the  genius  and  spirit  of  the  two  tongues,  which,  we  are  con- 
vinced, is  the  true  way  of  appreciating  what  is  most  character- 
istic and  best  worth  knowing  in  the  ancient  authors. 

With  this  view,  the  passages  to  be  rendered  into  Latin  are 
freely  selected  from  the  sources  which  seemed  suitable  to  our 
purpose.*  It  will  be  observed  that  we  have  very  early  intro- 
duced continuous  paragraphs  or  narratives  ;  which,  we  believe, 
are  not  only  more  interesting  in  themselves,  but  will  be  found 
easier  in  practice  than  detached  sentences,  besides  the  advan- 
tage of  exhibiting  the  rarer  constructions  in  situ,  and  not  as 
mere  isolated  puzzles.  The  extracts  have  been  very  carefully 
selected,  with  a  view  not  to  anticipate  constructions  not  already 
given  j  or,  where  this  is  inevitable,  it  is  hoped  they  are  suf- 
ficiently helped  by  notes  and  vocabulary,  while  they  are  accom- 
panied in  every  case  by  full  preliminary  instruction.! 

The  earlier  of  these  extracts  are  chiefly  anecdotes  from 
Roman  history,  or  other  matter  within  a  range  already  familiar 
to  the  pupil.  In  the  later  ones  we  have  been  obliged  to  in- 
troduce, here  and  there,  modern  material  and  ideas.  These, 
it  is  likely,  will  tax  more  severely  the  pupil's  knowledge  and 
capacity;  but  it  seems  evident  that  the  more  intricate  con- 
structions of  Latin  prose  can  be  best  understood  when  we 
meet  them  from  our  own  point  of  view,  and  find  the  need  of 
them  to  express  our  own  forms  of  thought.  It  should  be 
understood  that  the  difficulties  they  include  are  those  of  the 
language  itself;  and  it  is  best  to  meet  them  fairly  at  the  start, 
rather  than  evade  or  disguise  them.     There  is  no  such  thing 

*  Of  these  we  may  specify  Smith's  "Smaller  History  of  Rome,"  and  Sargent's 
"Easy  Passages  for  Translation  into  Latin." 

t  It  may  be  worth  while  to  suggest  that  the  teacher  may  at  his  pleasure  select 
single  passages  or  phrases  for  elementary  practice. 


Preface.  v 

as  making  a  Ciceronian  period  or  an  indirect  discourse  in 
Caesar  or  Livy  an  easy  thing  to  boys  ;  and  the  student  is  not 
fairly  master  of  them  until  he  can  to  some  extent  follow  and 
reproduce  them  in  his  own  work.  The  difficulties  may,  how- 
ever, be  lightened  to  any  extent,  at  the  discretion  of  the 
teacher,  even  to  the  extent  of  going  over  in  detail  the  whole 
ground  of  each  exercise  in  advance. 

It  will  be  observed  that  a  Vocabulary  has  been  prepared 
to  Part  First  only;  and  that  this  aims  only  to  give,  as  a 
simple  mechanical  convenience,  the  Latin  terms  which  may 
be  used  in  the  passages  where  the  English  ones  actually 
occur  in  the  book,  leaving  the  mind  free  to  attend  wholly  to 
the  construction.  The  learner  should  be  impressed  from  the 
start  with  the  need  of  habitually  consulting  his  Lati?i  Lexicon, 
to  obtain  the  true  meaning  and  use  of  the  terms  he  employs. 
Such  explanation  as  could  be  given  in  a  partial  vocabulary 
would  be  at  best  of  very  doubtful  service.  Even  if  on  some 
grounds  desirable,  the  need  of  it  appears  to  be  removed  by 
White's  excellent  "  English  Latin  Dictionary  for  the  use  of 
Junior  Students,"  which  within  reasonable  limits  of  size  and 
price  furnishes  a  guide  such  as  every  learner  should  possess, 
who  aims  at  any  thing  better  than  the  mere  performance  of 
the  required  task  of  the  day ;  while  the  more  advanced 
student  will  not  be  content  without  something  at  least  as 
complete  as  the  larger  work  of  Smith  or  Arnold.  The 
design  of  Part  Second  obviously  excludes  the  use  of  any 
partial  or  special  list  of  words.  For  this,  we  trust  that  the 
suggestions  of  the  Introduction,  and  the  frequent  assistance 
given  in  the  notes,  —  with  the  faithful  consultation  of  the 
Lexicon,  which  must  always  be  supposed,  —  will  prove  a 
sufficient  guide. 


Cambridge,  May  10, 1876. 


The  following  works,  which  have  been  freely  used  in  the  prepa- 
ration of  this  manual,  will  be  of  service  to  those  who  desire  to 
give  the  subject  a  more  thorough  study.  Those  marked  2,  3,  4, 
have  been  used  to  some  extent  as  text-books  in  this  country. 

1.  Theorie  des  lateinischen  Stiles,  von  C.  J.  Grysar.  2d  ed.  Koln  : 
J.  G.  Schmitz.     1843. 

A  very  complete  and  elaborate  treatise,  the  source  from  which  ex- 
cellent material  has  been  largely  drawn  by  others. 

2.  Hints  towards  Latin  Prose  Composition.  By  Alex.  W.  Potts. 
3d  ed.     London  :  Macmillan  &  Co.     1872. 

A  brief  but  admirable  essay  on  the  main  points  of  Latin  style  and 
expression  (without  exercises),  with  a  great  number  of  brief  illustra- 
tions, some  of  which  will  be  found  in  the  introduction  to  Part  II.  of  the 
present  manual  (pp.  126-129). 

3.  Parallel  Extracts,  arranged  for  translation  into  English  and  Latin, 
with  Notes  on  Idioms.  By  J.  E.  Nixon.  Part  I.  Historical  and 
Epistolary.     London  :  Macmillan  &  Co.     1874. 

An  excellent  working  manual,  the  passages  on  opposite  pages  sug- 
gesting points  of  comparison  between  Latin  and  English  style,  and  with 
numerous  figured  references  to  the  introductory  Notes. 

4.  A  Manual  of  Latin  Prose  Composition  for  the  use  of  Schools  and 
Colleges.  By  the  Rev.  Henry  Musgrave  Wilkins.  3d  ed.  London  : 
Parker,  Son,  &  Brown.     1861. 

Numerous  exercises,  very  fully  annotated,  a  portion  being  "  adapted  " 
(in  English)  to  the  Latin  idiom.  With  introductory  remarks  and  a 
table  of  idiomatic  expressions.  A  Key  is  published  for  the  use  of 
teachers. 

5.  Principia  Latina.  Part  VI.  Short  Tales  and  Anecdotes  from 
Ancient  History  for  translation  into  Latin  Prose.  By  William  Smith, 
D.D.    3d  ed.     London :   John  Murray.     1870. 


CONTENTS. 


•  y 
Part.  I.  —  Constructions. 

PAGE 

Lesson  I.  The  Order  of  Words i 

2.  Rules  of  Agreement.  —  i.  Apposition     ....  3 

3-  »                „                 2.  The  Verb       ....  4 

4-  »                »                 3-  Adjectives      ....  6 

5.  Adjectives  :  Special  Uses 8 

6.  Pronouns.  —  1.  Personal  and  Reflexive  ....  10 

7.  „               2.  Demonstrative 12 

8.  „               3.  Relative 14 

9.  „               4.  Interrogative  and  Indefinite     .     .  17 

10.  Cases.  —  1.  As  Objects  of  Verbs 20 

11.  „           2.  As  Modifying  Adjectives      ....  23 

12.  „           3.  Indirect  Relations 25 

13.  „           4.  Cause,  Means,  and  Quality       ...  28 

14.  „           5.  Separation  and  Comparison       ...  32 

15.  „           6.  Special  Uses  of  the  Genitive     ...  34 

16.  „           7.  Use  of  Two  Cases 37 

17.  „           8.  Time  and  Place 39 

18.  „           9.  Prepositions 42 

19.  Verbs. —  1.  Narrative  Tenses 45 

20.  „           2.  The  Passive  Voice 48 

21.  „           3.  Infinitive  Constructions 53 

22.  „           4.  Participial  Constructions      ....  57 

23.  „           5.  Gerundive  Constructions      ....  60 

24.  „           6.  Subjunctive  Constructions    ....  62 

25.  Relations  of  Time 66 

26.  Purpose  and  Result 69 

27.  Conditional  Sentences 72 

28.  Substantive  Clauses 74 

29.  Intermediate  Clauses 77 

30.  Indirect  Discourse 80 

31.  Certain  Special  Constructions 83 


Part  Second. 


PAGB 


Introduction  :  i.  Choice  of  the  Word  or  Phrase      ...  119 

2.  Structure  of  the  Sentence 126 

3.  Idiomatic  Phrases 130 

Exercises  in  Translation. 

I.  Death  of  Epaminondas 135 

II.  The  Ring  of  Gyges 135 

III.  Cyrus  the  Younger 136 

IV.  Xenophon's  Sacrifice 136 

V.  The  Sibylline  Books 137 

VI.  Hannibal  and  Antiochus 138 

VII.  The  Talking  Crow 139 

VIII.  Hannibal  in  the  Alps.  —  Arnold 139 

IX.  The  Embassy  of  Philip.  —  Arnold 140 

X.  Hannibal  near  Rome 141 

XI.  Young  Scipio     . 142 

XII.  Hannibal's  Exile 143 

XIII.  The  Tale  of  Atalanta.  —  Bacon 145 

XIV.  Assassination  of  Caesar.  —  Plutarch  .     .     .     .     .  145 
XV.  Death  of  Marcus  Antonius 147 

XVI.  Destruction  of  Carthage 148 

XVII.  Xenophon  at  the  Sea 149 

XVIII.  Vercingetorix .     .     .  150 

XIX.  A  Story  of  Wolves 151 

XX.  Death  of  Socrates.  —  Plato 152 

XXI.  Hannibal  in  the  Apennines  .     . 155 

XXII.  The  Gauls  at  Rome 156 

XXIII.  Murder  of  Marcellus 157 

XXIV.  Story  of  Cincinnatus.  —  Arnold 159 

XXV.  Princely  Generosity.  —  Feltham    ......  160 

XXVI.  Defeat  of  Varus.  —  Creasy 161 

XXVII.  Siege  of  Syracuse.  —  Arnold 162 

XXVIII.  Battle  of  Metaurus.  —  A  mold 163 

XXIX.,  Inundations  of  the  Tiber.  —  Gibbon 165 

XXX.  First  Acting  at  Rome.  —  Livy 167 

XXXI.  The  Fire  of  London „ 169 

XXXII.  The  Earthquake  at  Lisbon 171 

XXXIII.  Character  of  Trajan.  —  Gibbon 174 

XXXIV.  Character  of  Q2X0.  — Middleton    .......  175 

XXXV.  Of  Studies.  —  Bacon 176 

XXXVI.  Antony  in  Defeat  —  A Torth' s  Plutarch  .     .     .     .  178 

XXXVII.  Speech  of  Antony.  —  Shakespeare 180 


COMPOSITION. 


PART   FIRST.— CONSTRUCTIONS. 


Lesson  i. 

The  Order  of  Words. 

Read  carefully  the  whole  of  Chapter  VI.  (pages 
258-262).     Learn  §§  343,  with  c,  d ;  and  344. 

Note.  —  Though  the  order  of  words  in  a  Latin  sentence  seems 
very  arbitrary,  yet  it  will  be  observed  that  almost  every  arrangement 
produces  some  effect  such  as  must  usually  be  given  in  English  by 
emphasis  or  stress  of  voice.  In  the  Exercises  to  follow,  the  pupil 
should  observe  the  reason  of  any  change  he  may  make  from  the 
normal  order,  and  the  effect  it  has  in  making  prominent  some  par- 
ticular word  or  words.  He  should  also  acquire,  as  early  as  possible, 
the  habit  of  regarding  his  composition  as  a  Latin  sentence,  and  not 
as  an  English  sentence  turned  into  Lati?i  words.  And  he  will  be 
aided  in  this  by  habitually  reading  over  the  sentence  as  Latin  after 
he  has  written  it,  to  be  sure  that  it  has  a  Latin  sound. 

I.  The  normal  or  regular  form  of  words  in  a  Latin 
sentence  is  the  following :  (a)  The  Subject,  followed 
by  its  modifiers ;  (b)  the  modifiers  of  the  Predicate, 
the  direct  object  being  usually  put  last;  (c)  the  Verb, 
preceded  by  any  word  or  phrase  which  directly  quali- 
fies its  action. 

This  is  the  order  usually  to  be  followed,  where  no 
emphasis  is  thrown  on  any  particular  word,  as  in 
simple  narrative  of  fact :    thus, 

Hannibal  imperator  f actus  \  proximo  triennio  omnes 
gentes  Hispaniae  \  hello  subegit.  —  Nepos,  Harm.  3. 


2  '        Latin  O,oyiposition. 

REMA'kk.-^-ln  actual!  practice,- file  normal  order  of  words 
is  rarely  found.  It  is  continually  altered,  either  for  the  sake 
of  emphasis,  —  to  throw  stress  on  the  more  important  words  ; 
or  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  —  to  make  the  sentence  more 
agreeable  to  the  ear. 

2.  Modifiers  of  Nouns  —  as  adjectives  (not  predi- 
cate), appositives,  and  oblique  cases  used  as  attributes 
—  usually  follow  the  noun  ;  modifiers  of  Verbs  —  in- 
cluding adverbs  and  adverbial  phrases — precede  the 
verb.  Genitives  may  come  indifferently  before  or  after 
the  noun  which  they  limit,  according  to  emphasis. 

3.  In  the  arrangement  of  Clauses,  the  relative 
clause  more  often  comes  first  in  Latin,  and  usually 
contains  the  antecedent  noun  ;  while,  in  English,  the 
demonstrative  clause  almost  always  precedes  :  as, 

Quos   amisimus  elves,   eos  Martis  vis  per  culit.—  Cic. 

Marc.  6.    ("Those  citizens  whom,"  &c.    See  examples  in  §  200.  b.) 

4.  In  contrasted  phrases  or  clauses,  either  (1)  the 
same  order  of  words  is  repeated  (anaphora) ,  or  (2)  the 
order  is  reversed  {chiasmus)  :  as, 

1.  Helium  genere  necessarium  magnitudine  periculo- 

sum. — id.  Manil.  10. 

2.  Non  terrore  belli,  sed  consilii  celeritate,  —  (id.  11.) 

5.  Almost  universally  the  main  word  of  the  sen- 
tence is  put  first  (rarely  last).  This  may  be  (1)  simply 
the  emphatic  word,  containing  the  idea  most  prominent 
in  the  writer's  mind  (emphasis)  ;  or  it  may  be  (2)  con- 
trasted with  some  other  word  preceding  or  following 
(antithesis) .    Compare,  for  example,  the  following  :  — 

1.  M.  Brutus  Ciceronis  amicus  Caesar  em  interfecit. 

2.  Amicus  Ciceronis  M.  Brutus  Caesarem  interfecit. 

3.  Caesarem  interfecit  31.  Brutus  Ciceronis  amicus. 

That  is,  "It  was  Caesar,"  &c. 


Af position .  3 

4.  Interfecit  Caesarem  31.  Brutus  Ciceronis  amicus. 

Here  the  emphasis  is  thrown  on  the  fact  of  killing  :  compare  — 

5.  Interfectus  est  propter  quasdam  seditionum  suspi- 

tlones  V.  Gracchus.  —  Cic.  Cat.  1.  2  (see  the  passage). 

6.  Ilomae  summum  otium  est. 

Here  Rome  is  contrasted  with  Syria,   which  Cicero  had  just 
spoken  of. 


Lesson  2. 

Rules  of  Agreement.  —  1.  Apposition. 

Review  §  184,  185  ;  Learn  a,  b,  c. 

Observe  that  in  Latin  simple  apposition  is  often 
used  where  in  English  we  use  as,  of,  when,  or  even 
a  separate  clause  :    thus, 

1.  I  come  to  help  you,  adjutor  tibi  venio. 

2.  To  treat  Cicero  as  a  friend,  Cicerone  amico  uti. 

3.  To  regard  the  gods  as  immortal,  deos  aeternos  habere. 

4.  The  city  of  Rome,  Homa  urbs. 

5.  I  remember  seeing  when  a  boy,  puer  tnemini  videre. 

6.  Publius  and  Lucius  Scipio,  jP.  et  L.  Scipiones. 

7.  Cato  used  to  tell  in  his  old  age,  Cato  seneoc  narrabat. 

8.  Fabius  in  his  second  consulship  (when  he  was  second  time 

consul),  Fabius  consul  iterum. 

N.B.  In  the  following  Exercises,  words  in  brackets  are  to  be 
omitted  in  the  Latin. 

Proper  Names  of  the  first  or  second  declension  are  not  given  in 
the  Vocabulary,  except  where  the  spelling  is  different  in  English. 

Exercise  1. 

I.  The  consul  Caius1Flaminius  defeated  the  Insu- 
brians.2    The  next  consuls,  Scipio  and  Marcellus,  con- 

1  Praenomens  (as  Caius)  are  always  to  be  abbreviated  (see  §  80.  d). 
The  name  must  here  precede  the  title.   *Insubres. 


4  Latin  Composition. 

tinued  the  war.  Marcellus  slew  Viridomarus,  chief  of 
the  Insubrians,  and  Scipio  his  colleague  took  Milan, 
their  chief  town.  2.  Give  this  message1  to  Tar^ 
quinius,  your  king.  3.  O  father  Tiber,  take  me  [into 
thy  charge]  and  bear  me  up.  4.  We  have  sworn  to- 
gether, three  hundred  noble  youths,  against  Porsena. 
5.  Bocchus  was  gained  over  to  the  Roman  cause  by 
Sulla,  the  quaestor  of  Marius.  6.  The  consul  Publius 
Rupilius  brought  the  Servile  War  to  an  end  by  the 
capture  of  Tauromenium  and  Enna,  the  two  strong- 
holds of  the  insurgents.  7.  Sempronia,  the  only  sister 
of  Tiberius  Gracchus,  was  married  to  the  younger 
Scipio  Africanus.  8.  The  next  year,  Lucius  Cor- 
nelius Scipio,  brother  of  the  great  Africanus,  and 
Caius  Laelius,  the  intimate-friend  of  the  latter,2  were 
consuls.  9.  The  Ulyrians  were  a  nation  of  pirates. 
10.  The  she-wolf  acted  [as  a]  mother.  11.  The 
Academy  introduced  a  new  [branch  of]  knowledge 
[viz.]  to  know  nothing.  12.  Demetrius,  an  unprin- 
cipled Greek,  surrendered  to  the  Romans  the  impor- 
tant island  [of]  Corcyra.  13.  Marius  and  Cicero 
were  born  at  Arpinum,  a  free-town  of  Latium. 

1  Literally,  "  Report  these  [things] ."  2  idem. 


Lesson  3. 

Rules  of  Agreement.  —  2.  The  Verb. 

i.  Review  §  204  (the  general  rule  of  agreement). 
Learn  §§  205,  with  a,  b  ;  206.  a,  b. 

Note.  — The  correspondence  of  the  verb  with  its  subject  (called 
agreement)  is  nearly  the  same  in  most  languages,  though  obscured 
in  English  by  the  loss  of  the  inflectional  endings.    The  peculiarities 


The  Verb.  5 

of  Latin  use  are  given  in  the  sub-sections  cited  above.  The  most 
important  of  these  is  the  regular  omission  of  the  personal  pronoun 
of  the  first  or  second  person  as  subject  (the  pronoun  being  contained 
in  the  verb-ending1),  also  of  the  third  person  whenever  it  is  plain 
from  the  context.     Hence  the  rule  — 

2.  The  personal  pronoun  is  never  to  be  expressed 
in  Latin,  except  when  required  for  emphasis  or  pre- 
cision. 

3.  A  single  idea  is  very  often  expressed  in  Latin  by 
two  nouns  connected  by  a  conjunction  (hendiadys). 
In  this  case  the  singular  verb  is  the  usual  form  :  as, 

There  is  a  continued  series  of  events,   est   continuatio   et 
series  rerum, 

4.  The  following  examples  show  the  most  frequent 
Latin  usages  :  — 

1.  Faniiius  and  Mucius  came  to  their  father-in-law,  Fannius 

et  Mucins  ad  socerum  venerunt. 

2.  Neither  .ffilius  nor  Coruncanius  thought  so,  nee  Aelius  nee 

Coruncanius  ita  ptitabat. 

3.  Balbus  and  I  held  up  our  hands,  ego  et  Balbus  sustuli- 

mus  manus. 

4.  If  you  and  Tullia  are  well,  Cicero  and  I  are  well,  si  til  et 

Tullia  valetis,  ego  et  Cicero  valemus. 

5.  Water  and  earth  remained,  aqua  restabat  et  terra  (more 

rarely:  aqua  et  terra  restabat). 

6.  I  say,  aio  ;  they  say  (people  say),  aiunt. 

7.  I  strongly  approve  of  Epicurus,  for  he  says,   &c,  Epicu- 

rum  valde  probo,  (licit  enim,  etc. 

8.  Rational  instruction  prescribes,  ratio  et  doctrina  prae- 

scribit. 

N.B.  The  periphrastic  forms  of  the  verb  come  properly  under 
the  treatment  of  Adjectives,  and  are  included  in  the  next  Lesson. 

1  So  sometimes  in  old  English  or  in  poetry:  as,  Did' }st  ever  see 
the  like?  (Taming  of  the  Shrew,  iv.  1).  So  the  phrases,  thank yo7i, 
pray  come,  &c. 


6  Latin   Com-position. 

Exercise  3. 

I.  Catulus  in  the  Senate,  and  Cato  in  the  forum, 
hailed  Cicero  [as]  the  father  of  his  country.  2.  Cicero 
calls  Athens  the  inventress  of  arts.  3.  The  army 
of  Hannibal  lived  luxuriously  at  Capua,  a  beautiful 
city  of  Campania.1  4.  We  avoid  death  as-if  a  dis- 
solution of  nature.  5.  Many  ancient  peoples  wor- 
shipped the  dog  and  cat  [as]  gods.  6.  The  swallow, 
harbinger  of  Spring,  had  now  appeared.  7.  Marcus 
Manlius,  the  preserver  of  the  capitol,  came  forward 
[as]  the  patron  of  the  poor.  8.  The  censors,  Crassus 
and  Maenius,  created  two  new  tribes,  the  Ufentine  and 
Falerian.  9.  Quintus  and  I  2  shall  set  sail  to-morrow  ; 
you  and  Tiro  will  wait  [for]  us  in  the  harbor. 
10.  Honor  and  shame  from  no  condition  rise.  11.  To 
you,  [my]  son  Marcus,  belongs  the  inheritance  of  my 
glory  and  the  imitation  of  my  deeds.  12.  Never  is 
danger  overcome  without  danger,  as  they  say.  13.  The 
exigency3  of  the  occasion3  demands  severity.  14.  The 
mad-scheme  of  Saturninus  and  the  discredit  of  Marius 
gave-new-strength 4  to  the  Senate. 

1  See  §  184.  b.  *  In  Latin,  "  I  and  Quintus." 

3  Two  words  with  et.  4  Coiiftnno. 

Lesson  4. 

Rules  of  Agreement.— 3.  Adjectives. 

i.  Learn  §  186  (the  general  rule  of  agreement)  ; 
also  sub-section  d,  and  §  187,  with  a,  b. 

Note.  —  As  adjectives  are  not  inflected  at  all  in  English ,  the 
beginner  is  required  to  pay  constant  attention  to  the  rule.  The 
only  special  difficulties  likely  to  arise  are  when  the  same  adjective 
belongs  to  two  nouns,  especially  when  these  are  of  different  genders. 
As  to  these,  the  principles  stated  187,  with  a  and  b,  will  in  general 
be  a  sufficient  guide. 


Adjectives,  7 

2.  The  participial  forms  in  the  compound  tenses,  as 

well  as  other  participles,  are  treated  in  construction  as 

adjectives  :  as, 

i.  Caesar  and  Bibulus  were  elected  consuls,  Caesar  et  Bibu- 
lus  consules  creati  sunt. 

2.  Tullia  is  dead  (or  died),  Tullia  mortua  est. 

3.  Both  consuls  were  slain,  uterque  consul  occisus  est. 

4.  Virginius  and  his  daughter  were  left  alone  before  the  judg- 

ment-seat, Virginias  et  /ilia  ejus  soli  ante  tribunal 
relicti  sunt. 

5.  The  wife  and  little  son  of  Regulus   embraced  him  as  he 

departed,   Megulum    discedentem    uxor    et  parvus 
jilius  amplexi  sunt. 

Exercise  3. 

i.  Brutus,  the  deliverer  of  his  country,  and  Colla- 
tinus  the  husband  of  Lucretia,  were  chosen  first  con- 
suls at  Rome.  2.  Disunion  and  distrust  were  created 
among  the  allies  by  the  Julian  law.  3.  Herculaneum 
and  Pompeii :  have  been  preserved  to  our  times. 
4.  The  entire  Senate  and  Roman  people  went  out  to 
meet2  Cicero  on  his  return  from  exile.  5.  All  sensible 
[people]  had  become  alarmed  at  the  mad-conduct  of 
Saturninus.  6.  Valerius  commanding  the  foot,  and 
Brutus  being  appointed  to  head  the  cavalry,  went  out 
to  meet  Tarquinon3the  Roman  borders.  7.  My  uncle 
and  myself,  having  returned  to  Misenum,  passed  an 
anxious  and  doubtful  night.  8.  Manlius  during-his- 
absence 4   had   been    elected    consul    a    second    time. 

9.  Pompey,  having  marched  into  Syria,  deposed  xAn- 
tiochus,   and  made   the    country  a  [Roman]  province. 

10.  The  conspiracy  against  Caesar's  life  was  set-on- 
foot  by  Caius  Cassius  Longinus,  an  enemy  [of]  his. 

1  Supply  urbes  in  apposition.  3  Lesson  17,  h.  Rem. 

8  Obvia?n  with  dative,  following  egredi.  4  absens. 


8  Latin   Composition. 

ii.  Mantua,  alas!  too  near  unhappy  Cremona.1 
12.  You  have  before  your  eyes  Catiline,  the  most 
audacious  of  men.  13.  Aurora  opens  the  purple 
doors  and  the  courts  full  of  roses.  14.  A  boar  is  often 
held  by  a  small2  dog.  15.  The  wall  was  common 
to3  both  houses,  and  was  cleft  by4  a  narrow  chink. 
16.  Lepidus[was]  defeated  near  the  Mulvian  bridge  by 
Catulus  [and]  sailed  with  the  remainder  of  his  forces 
to  Sardinia. 

1  Dative.  2  non  magnus.         3  Genitive.  4  Ablative. 

Lesson  5. 

Adjectives:   Special  Uses. 

1.  Review  §§  186,  187;  learn  §§  188,  189.  a,  b 
(adjectives  used  as  nouns),  with  190,  191,  193,  203. 

Under  these  heads  occur  many  common  phrases,  in 
which  the  Latin  usage  must  be  carefully  distinguished 
from  the  English  :   as, 

1.  I  saw  Scipio  in  his  lifetime,  Scipionem  vivum  vidi. 

2.  He  came  against  his  will,  invitus  venit. 

3.  Every  thing  was  safe,  omnia  tuta  erant. 

4.  All  of  us  are  here,  omnes  adsumus, 

5.  He  was  the  first  to  see  (he  saw  first),  primus  vidit. 

6.  On  the  top  of  a  tree,  in  sumtna  arbore. 

7.  The  inner  part  of  the  house,  interior  domus. 

8.  The   rest    of    the    crowd    remained,    reliqua   multitudo 

manebat. 
Note.  —  The  use  of  adjectives  as  nouns  is  most  common  in  the 
masculine  plural,  just  as  in  English  the  wise,  the  brave,  &c.  In 
the  singular  this  use  is  rare,  except  with  a  few  words  which  have 
become  practically  nouns,  such  as  familiaris,  an  intimate  friend; 
sapiens,  a  wise  man;  avarus,  a  miser,  and  with  neuters  as  in  4.  a. 
In  other  cases  the  noun  is  generally  expressed ;  and  almost  always 
when  a  feminine  or  neuter  would  be  used.     Hence  — 


Adjectives:    Special  Uses,  9 

2.  When  any  ambiguity  would  arise  from  the  use 
of  the  adjective  alone,  a  noun  must  be  added  :  as, 

1.  Boni,  the  good;  omnia,  every  thing, 

2.  All  [men]  must  die,  omnibus  moriendum  est.    But  — 

3.  A  good  man,  vir  bonus, 

4.  Power  over  every  thing,  potentia  omnium  rerum, 

3.  When  any  other  case  is  used  than  the  nominative 
or  accusative,  the  noun  is  more  commonly  expressed, 
even  when  not  required  for  distinctness. 

4.  An  abstract  notion  is  very  often  expressed  in 
Latin  by  an  adjective  in  the  neuter  plural :  thus, 

1.  All  men  praise  bravery,  omnes  fortia  laudant, 

2.  The  past  at  least  is  secure,  praeterita  saltern  tuta  sunt, 

3.  Choose  the  better  part,  elige  meliora, 

4.  Fleeting  good,  bona  caduca, 

5.  Pleasing  ill,  mala  blanda, 

5.  Adjectives  are  often  used  in  Latin  where  in 
English  we  use  the  possessive,  or  a  noun  and  preposi- 
tion :  as, 

1.  The  fight  at  Cannae,  pugna  Cannensis, 

2.  Caius  Blossius  of  Cumae,  C.  Blossius  Cumanus, 

3.  Another  man's  house,  aliena  domus. 

Note.  —  These  adjectives  most  commonly  represent  the  geni- 
tive, and  will  be  treated  in  Lesson  15,  b. 

Exercise  4. 

i.  Duillius  was-the-first 1  of  the  Romans  to a  conquer 
in  a  naval  battle ;  Curius  Dentatus  first  led  elephants 
in  a  triumph.  2.  Right  and  wrong  are  by  nature 
opposed  to-each-other.2  3.  After  [his]  exile  Scipio 
passed  the-rest-of  his  life  at  Liternum,  a  small  town 
of  Latium.  4.  Demosthenes,  the  Athenian  orator, 
being  banished  from  his  country  on3  a  false  charge 

1  Simple  adjective.  2  Inter  se.  8  Ob. 


jo  Latin   Composition. 

of  having  received  money1  from  Harpalus,  was-in- 
exile  at  Megara.2  He  [was]  afterwards  recalled  [and] 
returned  [to]  Athens  in  a  ship  sent  for  that  [purpose]. 
5.  Octavia  and  Livia,  the  one  the  sister  of  Augustus, 
the  other  [his]  wife,  had  lost  [their]  sons,  the3  [famous] 
young  Marcellus  and  Drusus  Germanicus.  6.  The 
aged  senators  who-had-been-consuls4  or  censors4  sat 
in  the  Forum  on  [their]  curule  chairs,  awaiting  death. 
The  Gauls  found  the  city  deserted ;  but  marching  on 
they  came  to  the  Forum,  where  they  beheld  the  old 
men  sitting  immovable  like  beings  5  of6  another 6  world.6 
For  some  time  they  stood 7  in-awe-at 8  the  strange  sight, 
till  one  of  the  Gauls  ventured  to  go  up  to  Marcus  Papi- 
rius  and  stroke  his  white  beard.  The  old  man  smote 
him  on  the  head  with  9  [his]  ivory  staff;  then  the  bar- 
barian slew  him,  and  all  the  rest  were  massacred. 

1  Lit.  "  of  money  received."        2  Megarae  or  is.        3  tile. 
4  Adjectives.         6  forma  ac  natura.         '   de  caelo  delapsus. 
7  Obstipesco.          8  admirans  followed  by  ace.        9  Ablative. 

Lesson  6. 

Pronouns.  —  1.  Personal  and  Reflexive. 

i.  Review  §§98  (the  Personal  and  Reflexive  Pro- 
nouns) ;  and  99.  a,  d,  c  (Possessive  adjectives),  d,  e. 
Observe  that  the  pronouns  have  almost  precisely  the 
same  syntax  as  nouns. 

2.  The  Latin  never  uses  the  plural  of  the  second 
person  (vos)  for  the  singular  you;  but  often  the 
plural  of  the  first  person  (nos)  for  the  singular  /. 

3.  Of  the  double  forms  in  the  genitive  plural,  the 
form  in  urn  is  partitive,  while  that  in  i  is  objective  :  thus, 
i.  The  elder  of  us,  major  nostrum, 

2.  Mindful  of  us,  memor  nostri. 


Pronouns.  n 

4.  The  Reflexive  pronoun  (se),  with  its  correspond- 
ing Possessive  (suus),  is  used  in  some  part  of  the 
predicate,  always  referring  to  the  subject  of  the  sen- 
tence or  clause  (read  the  whole  of  196). 

Note.  —  In  such  cases  we  generally  (not  always)  use  self,  selves, 
and  own.  These  accordingly  are  not  necessary  in  Latin,  —  except 
when  they  are  emphatic,  —  being  expressed  by  the  reflexive  or  the 
personal  pronoun  (me,  te,  &c.)  :  — 

1.  Virtue  knows  itself,  Virtus  se  novit. 

2.  Brutus  slew  his  friend,  Brutus  amicum  [suum]  occidit 

(his  own  friend,  suum  amicum), 

3.  Philosophy  has  much  pleasure  in  it,  Philosophia  mul- 

tum  habet  in  se  delectationis. 

5.  The  Possessives  (like  other  adjectives)  take  the 
gender,  number,  and  case  of  the  noun  they  are  used 
with,  not  of  the  one  they  refer  to.  They  are  regularly 
omitted  when  they  are  plainly  implied  (see  §  197). 

Exercise  5. 

I.  Bulls  defend  themselves  by  [their]  horns,  boars 
by  their  tusks,1  [and]  lions  by  their  teeth  and  claws. 

2.  Horatius    slew    his    sister   with    his    own    hand. 

3.  "Young  man,"  said  Sulla,  "you  have  strengthened 
your  rival  against  yourself."  4.  "Varus,  Varus," 
cried  Augustus,  "  give  me  2  back  my  legions."  5.  Cras- 
sus,  indeed,  has  defeated  the  enemy ;  but  I  have  ex- 
terminated them  root-and-branch.  6.  "  Who  art  thou," 
said  Brutus,  "and  for  what  purpose  art-thou-come  ?"3 
"I  am  thy  evil  genius,4  Brutus,"  replied  the  spectre; 
"  thou  shalt  see  me  to-morrow  at  Philippi."  7.  Ci- 
cero was  accustomed  to  write  down  his  orations. 
8.  Few  men  know  their  own  faults  and  vices.  9.  How 
long  a  letter  I  have  written  to  you  with  my  own  hand  ! 

1  ictus  dentium.        2  Dative.         3  Perfect  active.        4  Furia. 


12  Latin   Composition. 

10.  Ancus  Martius  instituted  the  college  of  Heralds ; 
he  also  founded  a  colony  at  Ostia,  at  the  mouth  of  the 
Tiber,  and  built  a  fortress  on  the  Janiculum.  n.  Very- 
agreeable  to  me  is  your  remembrance  of  me  (plur.). 


Lesson  7. 

Pronouns.  —  2.  Demonstrative* 

i.  Review  J  ioo,  and  learn  carefully  the  sub-sec- 
tions 102.  a  to  e  (use  of  the  Demonstratives). 

Note.  — These  Demonstratives  are  used  much  like  the  corre- 
sponding words  in  English,  this,  that,  &c.  Observe,  however,  that 
though  they  run  into  one  another  in  meaning,  yet  regularly  hie, 
ille,  iste,  are  true  demonstratives,  and  actually  point  to  something  ; 
while  is  (the  pronoun  of  reference)  only  refers  without  pointing 
out.  Thus  a,  a  man,  the  7?ian,  one  {who),  &c,  are  often  rendered 
by  is  with  qui  following. 

2.  The  Possessives  his,  hers,  its,  theirs,  are  ex- 
pressed by  the  genitive  of  a  demonstrative,  and  have 
no  difference  of  gender  in  the  singular. 

3.  When  the  word  that  is  used  instead  of  repeating 
a  word  before  expressed,  it  is  regularly  omitted  in 
Latin.  But  when  a  distinct  object  is  referred  to,  it 
may  be  expressed  by  ille,  hie,  or  even  is ;  or  the  noun 
itself  may  be  repeated.     Thus,  — 

1.  I  prefer  the  art  of  memory  to  that  of  forgetfulness,  memo- 

riae artem  quam  oblivionis  malo. 

2.  Virtue  seeks  no  other  reward  except  this  [of  which  I  have 

just  spoken]  of  glory,  nullam  virtus  aliam  mercedem 
desiderat  praeter  hanc  laudis.  —  Cic.  Arch.  11. 

Note.—  In  such  cases,  the  Latin  often  prefers  some  possessive 
adjective  or  other  construction  (see  hereafter,  Lesson  15)  :  as, 
The  army  of  Caesar  defeated  that  of  Pompey   at  Pharsalus, 

Caesaris  exercitus  Pompeiatws  ad  PJiarsalum  vicit. 


Pronouns,  13 

4.  Contrary  to  the  English  usage,  hie  is  generally 

used  to  refer  to  a  preceding   statement  or  example  ; 

ille  to  a  following  one  :    as, 

That  [which  I  have  just  mentioned]  is  a  great  argument,  but  this  is 
a  greater :  [namely]  that,  etc.,  hoc  magnum  est  argumen- 
tum,  sed  Mud  majus,  quod,  etc. 

5.  Hie  often  corresponds  with  our  here^  the  present; 
ille  to  our  there;    and  iste,  yonder  (by  you)  :  as, 

1.  Caius  Caesar  here,  hie  C.  Caesar. 

2.  Those  benches  yonder  (by  you),  ista  subsellia. 

3.  The  present   (now  living)   Mucius   Scaevola,  hie  Mucins 

Scaevola. 

6.  The  demonstrative  pronoun  regularly  agrees  in 
gender  and  number  with  a  predicate  appositive  if  there 
is  one  (§  195.  d)  :  as, 

This  is  the  toil,  this  the  task,  hie  labor  hoc  opus  est. 

7.  The  intensive  ipse  is  usually  put  in  the  case  of 
the  subject,  even  where  the  real  emphasis  appears  to 
be  on  the  object  (see  §  195. /"to  /)  :  as, 

1.  You  praise  yourself  over  much,  ipse  te  nimium  laudas. 

2.  This   thing  is  sufficient  in  itself,  haec  res  per  se  ipsa 

satis  est. 

N.B.  —  The  distinction  between  the  intensive  ipse  and  the  reflex- 
ive se  —  both  rendered  in  English  by  "self"  —  requires  to  be  care- 
fully observed  (see  §  102.  <?,  n.).  Ipse  often  expresses  even,  very, 
or  just :  as, 

1.  This  very  thing,  hoc  ipsum. 

2.  It  is  just  three  years,  tres  anni  ipsi  sunt. 

Exercise  6. 

i.  y£neas  carried  with  him  into  Italy  his  son  Asca- 
nius  and  the  sacred  Penates  of-Troy.1  He  was  kindly 
received  by  Latinus,  king  of  the  country,  and  married 

1  Adjective. 


14  Latin   Composition. 

his  daughter  Lavinia.  2.  All  philosophers,  and  among 
them  Epictetus,  were  banished  from  Rome  by  Domi- 
tian.  3.  The  ancients  regard  this  [as]  true  riches, 
this  [as]  a  good  reputation  and  great  renown.  4.  While 1 
all  arrogance  is  hateful,  at-the-same-time1  that  of 
genius  and  eloquence  is  by-far  the  most  offensive. 
5.  Diseases  of  the  mind  are  more  dangerous  than 
those  of  the  body.  6.  The  self-same  Cato,  the  Cen- 
sor, thus  discourses  in  that  very  book  of  Cicero  on  Old 
Age.  7.  When  I  listen-to  Cicero,  I  desire  to  write 
down  his  orations,  so  greatly  they  delight  me. 
8.  Romulus  killed  with  his  own  hand  Acron,  king  of 
Caenina,  and  dedicated  his  arms  to  Jupiter.  9.  Upon2 
the  death  of  Numa  an  interregnum  again  followed ; 
but  soon  after  Tullus  Hostilius  was  elected  king.  His 
reign  was  as  warlike  as  that  of  Numa  had  been  peace- 
ful. *io.  Servius,  the  sixth  king  of  Rome,  gave  his  two 
daughters  in  marriage  to  the  two  sons  of  Tarquinius 
Priscus,  Lucius  and  Aruns.  The  former  was  proud  and 
haughty;  the  latter,  unambitious  and  quiet.  11.  This 
was  the  third  and  last  attempt  [on  the  part]  of  the 
Tarquinii ;  for  by  this  victory5 the  Latins  were  com- 
pletely humbled,  and  Tarquinius  Superbus  could  apply 
to  no  other  state  for  assistance.  He  had  already  sur- 
vived all  his  family,3  and  he  now  fled  to-Cumae,4  where 
he  died  a  wretched  and  childless  old  man. 

1    cum  .  .  .  turn.        2  Ablative.       3  Dative.       *  Accusative. 
6  Use  c lades  .(see  p.  121,  cc). 

Lesson  8. 

Pronouns. —  3.  Relative. 

i.  Review  §  198  (the  rule  of  agreement),  reading 
the  introductory  Note;  together  with  §§  199,  201.  e. 


Relatives,  15 

Note.  —A  relative  word  used  as  in  English,  merely  to  introduce 
a  descriptive  fact,  is  as  simple  in  construction  as  a  demonstrative, 
and  requires  no  special  rule.  Several  classes  of  relative  clauses  in 
which  the  mood  of  the  verb  is  affected  (§§  317-320)  will  be  treated 
hereafter. 

N.B.  —  Relative  words  include  relative  Pronouns,  Adjectives,  and 
Adverbs ;  with  the  indefinites  quisquis  and  quicumque,  whoever. 

2.  The  relative  is  never  to  be  omitted  in  Latin, 
though  it  often  is  in  English.     Thus,  — 

1.  The  book  you  gave  me,  liber  quern  mihi  dedisti, 

2.  I  am  the  man  I  always  was,  is  sum,  qui  semper  fui. 

3.  He   is  in  the   place  I  told  you  of,  eo  in  loco  est  de  quo 

tibi  locutus  sum. 

3.  The  relative  is  often  used  in  Latin  where  other 
constructions  are  used  in  English  ;  particularly  where 
we  should  use  a  participle,  appositive,  or  noun  of 
agency :    as, 

1.  The  book  entitled  Brutus,  liber  qui  dicitur  ^Brutus. 

2.  The  existing  laws,  leges  quae  nunc  sunt. 

3.  The  men  of  our  day,  homines  qui  nunc  sunt. 

4.  Caesar  the  conqueror  of  Gaul,  Caesar  qui  Galliam  vicit. 

5.  True  glory  the  fruit  of  virtue,  just  a  gloria  qui  est  fructus 

virtutis. 

4.  In  formal  or  emphatic  discourse,  it  is  often  better 
to  place  the  relative  clause  first ;  and  in  such  cases  it 
usually  contains  the  antecedent  noun  :  as, 

Those  evils  which  we  suffer  with  many  seem  to  us  lighter, 
quae  mala  cum  multis  patimur  ea  nobis  leviora 
videntur. 

5.  When  the  antecedent  noun  is  in  apposition  with 
the  main  clause  or  some  word  in  it,  it  is  to  be  put  in 
the  relative  clause :    as, 

Steadfast  friends,  a  class  of  which  there  is  great  lack,  firmi 
amid,  cujus  generis  est  magna  penuria. 


1 6  Latin   Composition . 

6.  A    relative    is    constantly  used   in   Latin  when 

English  uses  a  demonstrative  with  and  or  but:   as, 

i.  And  since  these  things  are  so,  quae  cum  ita  sint. 

2.  But  if  they  hesitate  or  are  unwilling,  qui  si  dubitabunt 
aut  gravabuntur. 

7.  When  the  word  as  is  used  in  English  as  a  rela- 
tive, it  must  be  rendered  in  Latin  by  the  relative  pro- 
noun, adjective,  or  adverb  which  corresponds  to  its 
demonstrative  antecedent :    as, 

1.  The  same  thing  as,  eadem,  res  quae, 

2.  Such  (men)  as,  el  qui, 

3.  Such  a  leader  as  we  know  Hannibal  to  have  been,  talis 

dux  qualem  Hannibalem  novimus, 

4.  There  were  as  many  opinions  as  men,  quot  homines  tot 

erant  sententiae. 

Exercise  7. 

i.  Tiberius  Gracchus  was  by  birth  1  and  marriage2 
connected  with  the  noblest  families  in  the  Republic : 
grandson  of  the  conqueror  of  Hannibal,  son-in-law  of 
the  chief  of  the  Senate,  and  brother-in-law  of  the 
destroyer3  of  Carthage.  2.  Quintus  Silo,  a  Marsian, 
and  Caius  Papius  Mutilus,  a  Samnite,  who  cherished 
an  hereditary  hatred  against  the  Romans,  were  chosen 
consuls.  3.  Sulla  with  his  army  was  then  besieging 
Nola,  a  town  which  was  still  held  by  the  Samnites. 
4.  Rome  was  now  exposed  to  great  danger ;  for  those 
who  had  been  her  most  faithful  friends  now  rose  against 
her.  5.  A  day  shall  come  when  *  sacred  Troy  shall 
perish.  j  6.  The  terms  which  the  general  proposed 
seemed  intolerable  to  the  Carthaginians.  7.  Tiberius 
and  Caius  Gracchus  were  the  sons  of  Tiberius  Sem- 
pronius  Gracchus,  whose   measures   gave  tranquillity 

1  Propinquitas  (plur.).  2  Adfinitas  (plur.). 

3  Lit.  "  of  him  who  destroyed."  4  Repeat  the  noun. 


Interrogatives .  1 7 

to  Spain  for  1  so  many  years.  They  lost  their  father 
at2  an  early  3  age.  But  they  were  educated  with  the 
utmost  care  by  their  mother  Cornelia,  the  daughter  of 
Scipio  Africanus  the  elder,  who  had  inherited  from 
[her]  father  a  love4  of  literature,  and  united5 in  her- 
person6the  severe  virtue  of  the  Roman  matron  with 
a  superior  knowledge 7  and  refinement,  which  8  then 
prevailed9  in10  the  higher-classes11  at-Rome.12  She 
engaged  for  [her]  sons  the  most  eminent  Greek 
teachers  ;  and  from  the  pains  she  took  13  with u  their 
education  they  surpassed  all  the  Roman  youths  of 
their  age. 

I  per.  2  Ablative.  3  pri?nus. 
4  studium.                 5  habeo  conjunctam.          6  se. 

7  docirina.  8  Neuter  plural.  9  floreo,  10  apud. 

II  nobiles.         l2  Adjective.         13  "  Take  pains,"  operam  dare. 

14  Dative. 


Lesson  9. 

Pronouns:   Interrogative  and  Indefinite. 

Review  §§  104,  106,  with  a  (forms  of  Interroga- 
tive Pronoun).  These  forms,  including  quisnam  (em- 
phatic), and  titer  (see  §  83,  and  a),  are  used  much  as 
in  English.     Thus,  — 

1.  Who  is  the  man?    Quis  est  homo? 

2.  What  a  man  he  was!   Qui  homo  erat! 

3.  What  do  you  find  fault  with?   Quid  reprehendis? 

4.  What  plan  of  his  do  you  find  fault  with?   Quod  consil- 

ium ejus  reprehendis? 

5.  Which  eye  aches?    Titer  oculus  dolet? 

6.  Which  finger  hurts?   Qui  digitus  dolet? 

7.  Who  is  it?  (emph.)    ") 

8.  Who  in  the  world    I  Quisnam  est  ?  Quis  tandem  est  ? 

(pray  who)  is  it?  j  (The  latter  a  little  stronSer-) 


1 8  Latin   Composition. 

2.  Review  §  105.  c,  d,  e,  h  (forms  and  use  of  the 
Indefinites)  ;  study  the  whole  of  §  202. 

a.  The  pronouns  which  correspond  to  the  English  a  or  some, 
one,  or  any  (indefinite,  not  emphatic)  are  quis,  quispiam,  ali- 
quis,  quidam.  Of  these  quis  is  the  least  definite,  and  quidam 
the  most.  When  some  is  used  of  objects  defined  in  thought  though 
not  named,  it  is  regularly  quidam.  The  expressions  nonnullus, 
nonnemo,  nonnihil  are  somewhat  less  definite  than  quidam.  Quis 
is  the  regular  word  after  si,  nisi,  ne,  num,  to  signify  if  any,  &c. 
With  these  particles  aliquis  is  more  definite,  like  our  if  some  one, 
&c.  A  few  or  several  may  be  expressed  by  aliquot,  nonnulli, 
plures;  pauci  (restrictive)  means  only  a  few.  The  English  any 
one  who  is  often  best  rendered  by  si  quis  (See  Note,  Gr.  p.  227). 

1.  Some  cne  may  cay,  aliquis  dicat  (dixerit  quispiam). 

2.  Some  philosophers  think  so,  aliqui  (or,  if  definite  persons  are 

thought  of,  quidam)  philosophi  ita  putant. 

3.  Some    poor   women   live   here,    habitant  hie   quaedam 

mulieres  panperculae.  [That  is,  some  women  he  knows ; 
some  women  or  other  would  be  aliquae  or  nescio 
quae.] 

4.  Up  runs  a  man,  accurrit  quidam. 

5.  I  will  call  in  a  few  friends,  aliquot  amicos  adhibebo. 

6.  In  the  very  senate-house  there  is  more  than  one  enemy,  in 

ipsa  curia  nonnemo  hostis  est. 

7.  Banished  not  on  some  other  charge  but  this  very  one,  ex- 

pulsus  non  alio  aliquo  sed  eo  ipso  crimine. 

8.  He  neither  denies  nor  asserts  a  thing,  neque  negat  ali- 

quid  neque  ait  (any  thing  whatever  would  be  quidquam). 

b.  The  pronouns  which  correspond  most  nearly  with  the  English 
any  (emphatic)  are  quisquam  (substantive),  ullus  (adjective), 
quivis,  and  quilibet  The  first  two  are  used  chiefly  with  negatives 
(but  see  §  202.  b,  c)  ;  the  other  two  are  universal  {any  you  tike). 
When  only  two  are  spoken  of,  either  is  uter  (corresponding  to 
quisquam),  utervis,  uterlibet  (corresponding  to  quivis  and  qui- 
libet). For  the  negatives  non  quisquam,  non  ullus,  non  quid- 
quam, non  uter,  use  nemo,  nullus,  nihil,  neuter. 

1.  "What  can  happen  to  any  (one)  man  can  happen  to  any 
man  (whatever),  cuivis  potest  accidere  quod  cui- 
quam  potest. 


Indefinites.  19 

2.  I  never  did  any  thing  worse,  numguam  quidquam  feci 

pejus  (better,  nihil  uniquam). 

3.  "Why  did  I  send  to  anybody  before  you?  cur  cuiquam 

mist  prius  ? 

4.  I  have  less  strength  than  either  one  of  you,  minus  habeo 

virium  quam  vestrum  utervis. 

5.  No  one  thinking  of  any  thing  but  flight,  nemo  ullius  rei 

nisi  fugae  memor. 

c.  The  Distributives  each,  every,  are  expressed  by  quisque 
(uterque,  if  there  are  only  two).  Unusquisque  is  more  emphatic 
{every  single  one).  Omnis  is  sometimes  used  in  the  singular  in 
nearly  the  same  sense  as  quisque,  but  more  indefinitely,  and  is 
almost  equivalent  to  a  plural. 

1.  Every  good  book  is  better  the  larger  it  is,    bonus  liber 

melior  est  quisque,  quo  major. 

2.  Both  armies  go  away  every  man  to  his  home,  ambo  ex- 

ercitus  suas  quisque  abeunt  domos. 

3.  Each  army  was  in  sight  of  the  other,  uterque  utrique 

erat  exercitus  in  conspectu. 

4.  Every  system  of  instruction  (=all  systems  of  instruction), 

omnis  ratio  et  doctrina. 

Exercise  8. 

i.  Which  do  you  consider  the  greatest  general, 
Caesar,  Scipio,  or  Hannibal  ?  Which  the  better  orator, 
Cicero  or  Demosthenes  ?  2.  "We  here  bring  you  war 
and  peace,"  said  the  Roman  ambassadors  in  the  Sen- 
ate of  the  Carthaginians  ;  "  which  pleases  you  best  ?  " 
3.  Pompey  obtained  the  highest  dignity  in  the  State  — 
that  of  the  consulship  —  without  any  recommendation 
of  ancestors.  4.  The  vices  of  Alcibiades  were  re- 
deemed by  some  brilliant  qualities.  5.  Most  men's 
vices  are  redeemed  by  some  better  qualities.  6.  No  x 
great  man  was  ever  without  some  divine  inspiration. 
7.  Horace  did  not  read  his  poetry  to  any  one  except 
friends  ;  and  then  2  under  compulsion,  not  everywhere, 

1    nemo.  2  Lit.  "  and  that." 


20  Latin   Composition. 

nor  before1  everybody  [indiscriminately].  8.  Some 
skill2  as  an  orator3  is  necessary  to  a  commander. 
9.  Several  of  the  allies  of  Sparta  were  dissatisfied 
with  the  peace  she  had  concluded ;  and  soon  after 
some  of  them  determined  to4  restore  the  ancient  power 
of  Argos.  10.  Some  slight  battles  occurred,  in  which 
the  side5  of-the-Syracusans6  had  the  advantage.7 
11.  Since  Agamemnon,  no  Grecian  king  had  led  an 
army  into  Asia.  12.  It  is  contrary-to  nature  to  take8 
any  thing  from  any  other9  [person].  Does  anyone 
deny  this  ?  13.  Whoever  had  killed  a  tyrant  was 
praised  by  the  Greeks  and  Romans.  Thus  Harmo- 
dius,  who  expelled  the  sons  of  Pisistratus,  was  honored 
at  Athens;  Timoleon,  who  consented-to  10  the  death 
of  his  brother  Timophanes,  at  Corinth ;  and  Brutus, 
the  slayer  of  Julius  Csesar,  at  Rome. 

1  Coram  with  abl.     2  Lit.  "  Something  of  skill."     3  Adjective. 

4  Infinitive.        5    res.      6  Adjective.        7  Lit.  "  was  superior." 

8    detraho.  9  Dative.  10  probo. 

Lesson  10. 

Cases. —  1.  As  Objects  of  Verbs. 

i.  Review  §§  237,  with  b,  c  (Accusative  as  Direct 
Object)  ;  225,  227,  with  a,  b,  228  (Dative  as  Indirect 
Object)  ;  219,  220,  221  (Genitive  as  the  object  of 
verbs  of  Memory  and  Feeling)  ;  and  249  (Ablative  of 
means,  with  utor,  etc.). 

2.  All  of  the  above  cases  are  used  in  Latin  with 
different  classes  of  verbs  to  represent  the  English 
Objective  case.     Thus  :  — 

1.  I  see  the  man,  hominem  video  (Accusative). 

2.  I  help  the  man,  homini  subvenio  (Dative). 

3.  I  pity  the  man,  Jiominis  miser eor   (Genitive). 

4.  I  treat  the  man  as  a  friend,  homine  amico  utor  (Ablative). 


Object-Cases,  21 

Remark.  —  In  all  the  above  examples  the  verb  is  transi- 
tive in  English,  but  not  really  so  in  Latin.  In  deciding  on 
the  case  to  be  used  as  the  object  of  any  given  verb,  the 
following  points  are  to  be  observed  :  — 

a.  The  Accusative,  as  the  case  of  Direct  Object,  is  far  more 
general  in  its  use  than  either  of  the  others  ;  and  may  be  assumed 
to  represent  the  English  Objective,  except  as  limited  by  the 
special  rules  which  follow. 

b.  The  Dative  is  to  be  used,  along  with  the  Accusative,  wher- 
ever in  English  two  object-cases  follow,  with  one  of  which  we  may 
use  the  preposition  to  or  for  (except  after  verbs  of  Asking  and 
Teaching,  which  take  two  accusatives) :  as, 

1.  He   gave  me  the  book  (  =  he  gave  the  book  to  me),  tnihi 

lib  rum  dedit. 

2.  I  promise  you  a  fig,  tibi  jficum  promitto.    But  — 

3.  He  asked  me  for  money,  pecuniain  me  rogavit. 

4.  Plato    taught   his    scholars    geometry,    Plato    discipulos 

suos  geometriam,  docuit. 

The  Dative  is  also  to  be  used  after  the  verbs  (apparently  tran- 
sitive) given  in  the  lists  in  §§  227,  228,  229.  These  sub-sections, 
with  the  accompanying  examples  and  remarks,  must  be  attentively 
studied  ;  as  an  accurate  knowledge  of  these  classes  of  verbs  is 
absolutely  essential  to  the  correct  use  of  the  language  in  one  of 
the   commonest  constructions  in  Latin. 

c.  Verbs  governing  the  Genitive  in  Latin  are  few,  and  belong  to 
the  strictly  limited  classes  given  in  the  sub-sections  under  §  219,  &c. 
They  are  chiefly  verbs  of  Memory  and  Feeling  (with  egeo, 
indigeo,  7ieed).  The  genitive  of  Charge  and  Penalty  corresponds 
with  the  English  use  of  the  preposition  of. 

d.  The  only  verbs  governing  the  Ablative  in  Latin,  correspond- 
ing to  transitives  in  English,  are  the  few  deponents  given  above, 
§  249 :  either  of  them  may  easily  be  represented  in  English  by  a 
phrase  with  a  preposition :  as, 

1.  I  use  (make  use  of)  a  sword,  gladio  titor, 

2.  He  eats  (feeds  on)  flesh,  came  vescitur. 

3.  They  abuse  (take  advantage  of)  my  friendship,  amicitia 

mea  abutuntur. 


22  Latin   Composition. 


Exercise  9. 


i.  In  our  own  calamity,  we  remember  the  calamities 
of  others.  2.  I  shall  never  forget  that  day:  it  re- 
minds me  at-once  l  of  the  greatest  delight  and  1  greatest 
peril  of2  my  life.  3.  Pity  the  sorrows  of  a  poor  old 
man.  4.  Bocchus,  king  of  Mauretania,  had-pity-on 
the  condition  of  his  son-in-law,  Jugurtha,  king  of  Nu- 
midia,  and  promised  him  aid  ;  but  afterwards,  calling- 
to-mind3  the  greater  power  of  the  Romans,  betrayed 
him  to  Sulla,  the  quaestor  of  Caius  Marius.  5.  The 
Italians  loudly  demanded  the  rights  which  had  been 
promised  them  by  Drusus.  6.  Caesar  forgave  all 
those  who  had  fought  on  the  side  of  Pompey  in  the 
civil  war.  7.  Marius  commanded  a  separate  army 
in  the  neighborhood.  8.  If  a  patrician  man  married 
a  plebeian  wife,  or  a  patrician  woman  a  plebeian 
husband,  the  State  did  not  recognize  the  marriage. 
9.  Dentatus  had  accompanied  the  triumphs  of  nine 
generals.  As  tribune  of  the  people,  he  most  bitterly 
opposed  the  patricians.  10.  The  Knights  abused 
the  judicial  power,  as  the  Senate  had  done  before. 
11.  He  who  commands  the  sea  is  lord  of  affairs.  12. 
After  the  Mithridatic  war,  Pompey,  [though]  only  a 
private-citizen,  performed  the  part  of  a  commander, 
levied  three  legions,  and  having  gained4  a  brilliant 
victory4  was  received  by  Sulla  with  the  greatest  dis- 
tinction. 13.  Marcus  Livius  Drusus,  like  his  father, 
favored  the  side  of  the  nobles.  But  he  had  promised 
the  Latins  and  allies  the  Roman  franchise,  a  measure 
which  had  always  displeased  the  Roman  people,  and 
which  they  violently  resisted.  Drusus,  therefore,  had 
recourse  to  sedition  and  conspiracy.     A  secret-society 

1  cum  . . .  turn.    2  in.    3  memor,  with  gen.    4  Abl.  abs.  Passive. 


Cases  with  Adjectives.  23 

was  formed,  which  was  bound  by  oath  to  obey1  his 
commands.  The  ferment  increased,  and  threatened 
the  safety3ofthe  State;  but  at  last  Drusus  was  assas- 
sinated in  his  own  house.2 

1  Ace.  and  infin.  *  domi  suae. 

3  Lit.  danger  or  destruction,  with  dat. 


Lesson  n. 

Cases.  — 2.  As  Modifying  Adjectives. 

i.  Review  §§  218.  a,  &,  c,  d  (Genitive  with  Adjec- 
tives) ;  234.  a  (Dative  of  Fitness,  &c.)  ;  243.  d,  244. 
a,  245.  a,   248.  c,  253,   254.  b. 

N.  B.  These  rules  include  many  participles,  which  are  used 
like  adjectives. 

2.  Adjectives  in  English  almost  always  require 
phrases  with  prepositions  when  their  meaning  is  to 
be  limited  or  explained.  In  Latin  this  is  generally 
done  by  using  after  the  adjective  the  Genitive,  Dative, 
or  Ablative  case  without  a  preposition. 

Note.  —  Some  particular  adjectives  —  rather  than  classes  — 
take  a  preposition,  as  in  English.  These  will  be  treated  hereafter, 
in  the  Lesson  on  Prepositions  (see  §  234.  b,  c). 

a.  Relative  Adjectives  —  that  is,  adjectives  whose  quality  natu- 
rally relates  to  some  object,  especially  one  which  corresponds  to  the 
object  of  a  transitive  verb  —  regularly  take  the  Genitive.  This 
relation  is  often  expressed  in  English  by  the  preposition  of:  as, 

1.  Mindful  of  others,  forgetful  of  himself,  memor  alioj'um, 

oblitus  sui. 

2.  Disdaining  letters,  fastidiosus  literarum. 

3.  Possessed  of  reason  and  judgment,  compos  rationis  et 

Judicii. 

4.  Sharing  in  the  booty,  particeps  praedae. 
See  also  examples  under  §  218.  a,  b,  c. 


24  Latin   Composition . 

6.  Where  the  relation  between  the  adjective  and  noun  would  be 
expressed  in  English  by  the  preposition  to  or  for,  it  is  commonly 
expressed  in  Latin  by  the  Dative.  The  chief  exceptions  are  given 
in  §  234.  6,  c,  d,  e.  (See  constructions  given  in  the  Dictionary 
under  each  word.) 

1.  A  battle  very  like  a  flight,  pugna  simillima  fugae. 

2.  A  man  hateful  to  many,  homo  odiosus  multis, 

3.  Times  hostile  to  virtue,  tempora  infesta  virtuti. 

4.  Adjoining  the  Belgians,  finitimi  Belgis, 

5.  A  law  advantageous  to  the   state,   lex   utilis  rei  pub- 

licae, 

c.  When  the  modifying  phrase  denotes  that  in  respect  to  which 
the  meaning  of  the  adjective  is  taken  — where  the  English  uses 
in,  IN  regard  to,  or  the  like;  sometimes  OF — the  Ablative  is 
generally  used  in  Latin :  as, 

1.  Lame  of  one  foot,  claudus  altero  pede. 

2.  A  man  distinguished  in  war,  vir  hello  egregius. 

3.  "Worthy  of  praise,  dignus  laude. 

Note.  —  In  this  use  the  Ablative  and  Genitive  approach  each 
other  in  meaning  ;  but  the  Ablative  generally  expresses  a  remoter 
and  the  Genitive  a  closer  relation.  The  same  relation  is  often 
expressed  by  the  Accusative  with  ad. 

Exercise  10. 

I.  Oil  rubbed-upon1  the  body  makes  it  more  capa- 
ble of  enduring  heat,  cold,  or  hardship.  2.  Numa 
instituted  a  college  of  priests,  four  in  number.  3.  The 
fifth  king  of  Rome  was  an  Etruscan  by  birth,  but  a 
Greek  by  descent.  4.  The  reign  of  Servius  Tullius 
is  almost  as  barren  of  military  exploits  as  that  of 
Numa.  5.  Wild  beasts  are  not  only  devoid  of  reason 
and  speech,  but  ungovernable2  in  fury,  and  impatient 
of  control.  6.  A  Roman  patrician  had  a-number-of 3 
clients  attached  to  him,  to  whom  he  acted  as  patron. 

1  inunctus,  with  the  dative.  2  itnfiotens,  with  genitive. 

3  quidajn. 


Cases:  Indirect,  25 

7.  Mucius,  ignorant  of  the  person  1  of  Porsena,  killed 
his  secretary  instead-of  the  king  himself.  8.  Veii 
was  closely  allied  with  Fidenae.  9.  The  Pentri  in- 
habited the  Apennines.  But,  not  content  with  their 
mountain  homes,2  they  overran  the  rich  lands  of  Cam- 
pania. 10.  The  season  of  the  year  was  favorable  to 
Hasdrubal,  and  the  Gauls  were-friendly-to  his  cause. 
11.  The  Roman  ambassadors,  forgetting  their  sacred 
character,3  fought  in  the  ranks4  of  Clusium.  12.  At 
the  beginning  of  the  first  Punic  war,  the  Romans  had 
no  fleet  worthy  of  the  name.5  13.  Porsena,  alarmed 
for  his  life,  offered  terms  of  peace  to  the  Romans. 
14.  Cneius  Pompey  was  extremely  ambitious  of  power 
and  glory,  and  jealous  of  the  superior  merit  and  fame 
of  other  men.  15.  The  Romans  were  like  the  Spar- 
tans in6  [their]  passion  for7  military  glory  and  empire. 
16.  The  poet  Archias,  a  man  endowed  with  genius 
and  virtue,  was  regarded  by  Cicero  [as]  equal  to  the 
most  learned  of  the  Greeks,  and  worthy  of  the  high- 
est praise.8 

1  fades.        2  sedes.        3  officium.        4  acies  Clusina  (sing.). 
6  id  nomen.  8  Ablative.        7  Genitive.        8  Plural. 


Lesson  12. 

Cases.  — 3.  Indirect  Relations. 

Review  §§  224  to  230;  231,  233,  235  (Dative  of 
Indirect  Object,  of  Possession,  of  Service,  of  Refer- 
ence) ;  also  §  222  (refert  and  interest). 

a.  The  most  common  use  of  to  or  for  in  English  is  repre- 
sented in  Latin  by  the  Dative  of  Indirect  Object :  as, 

1.  The  province  fell  by  lot  to  Cicero,  provincia  Ciceroni 
obtigit. 


26  Latin   Composition . 

2.  I   consult   for   the    safety   of  the  state,    civitatis   saluti 

consulo* 

3.  Medicine   is    sometimes    bad   for   the    health,    medicina 

valetudini  nonnumquam  nocet. 

Note. —  1.  These  should  be  distinguished  from  the  cases 
where  the  direct  effect  of  an  action  is  spoken  of :  as, 

The  dust  hurts  my  eye,  pulvis   oculum  meum  laedit. 

2.  The  dative  of  indirect  object  must  also  be  carefully  distin- 
guished from  the  cases  —  apparently  the  same  in  English  —  where 
to  or  for  expresses  the  limit  of  motion.  In  Latin  all  relations 
of  place,  where,  whence,  or  whither,  are  regularly  expressed  by 
means  of  prepositions  (see  hereafter,  Lesson  17). 

b.  This  construction  (dative  of  indirect  object)  is  used  in  many 
cases  to  express  with,  over,  upon,  in,  before,  against,  where 
in  the  Latin  expression  a  verb  compounded  with  a  preposition  is 
used  (see  list  in  §  228:  ad,  ante,  con,  &c.) : 

1.  A  rock  hung  over  his  head,  saxum  capiti  impendebat. 

2.  I  agree  with  Zeno,  Zenoni  adsentior. 

3.  I  set  myself  against  all  his  plans,  omnibus   ejus   consi- 

liis  obstiti, 

N.  B.  —  Particular  attention  must  be  given  to  the  meaning  and 
construction  of  each  of  these  compounds  in  the  vocabulary,  as 
many  of  them  are  transitive  and  take  the  accusative  (See  p.  44) :  as, 

He  besieged  the  city  of  Alesia,  urbem  Alesiam  obsidebat. 

c.  The  English  verb  to  have  is  often,  by  a  Latin  idiom,  ex- 
pressed by  the  Dative  with  esse  (compare   Rem.  under  §  231):  as, 

1.  I  have  a  father  at  home,  est  mihi  pater  domi. 

2.  The  boy's  name  is  Marcus,  puero  nomen  est  Marcus 

(or  Marco). 

d.  The  phrases  it  belongs  to,  it  is  the  part  of,  and  the  like,  are 
most  commonly  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  Genitive  with  esse :  as, 

It  is   the   part  of  wisdom  (of  a  wise  man),  or,  it  is  wise,  est 
sapientis  (compare  d,  with  Remark). 

e.  To  or  for  is  also  expressed  by  the  Dative  when  the  object 
is  still  more  remotely  connected  with  the  action,  so  that  the  sen- 
tence is  complete  without  it  (dative  of  reference)  :  as, 


Cases:  Indirect.  27 

The  good  husbandman  plants  trees  for  his  posterity,  poste- 
ris  sals  serit  arbores  bonus  agricola  (compare  the 
examples  in  §  235.  and  a). 

f.  When  for  or  of  expresses  the  purpose  or  end  of  an  action, 
the  Latin  idiom  has  the  dative,  often  with  the  dative  of  indirect 
object  also  :  as, 

1.  Caesar  sent  three  cohorts   for  a  guard,  Caesar  tres  co- 

hortes  praesidlo  tnisit. 

2.  It  was  of  great  service  to  our  men,  tnagno  usui  nostris 

fuit. 

Note.  —  In  English  the  same  relation  is  often  expressed  by 
simple  apposition  or  by  the  conjunction  as.  In  Latin  this  con- 
struction is  limited  to  a  few  words,  which  must  be  learned  by 
practice  (see  examples  and  Note  1  under  §  233). 

g.  For  the  cases  in  which  to  or  for  is  expressed  by  the  geni- 
tive with  refert  and  interest,  see  §  222.  a,  b.  The  phrase  for  my 
sake  and  the  t'epublic^s  is  expressed  by  mea  et  reipublicae  causa. 

Exercise  11. 

I.  The  troops  of  Sulla  did  no  injury  to  the  towns 
or  fields  of  the  Italians.  2.  Tiberius  Gracchus  relied 
chiefly  on  the  country-people.  3.  Both  Quintus  Ca- 
tulus  and  Hortensius  were-opponents-of 1  the  Gabinian 
Law.  4.  On  2  the  arrival  of  Pompey,  Tigranes  was 
obliged  to  look-to-the-safety-of  3  his  own  power.  5. 
The  great-numbers  4  of  the  enemy  were  a  hindrance 
rather  than  a  help  to  them.  6.  Caesar's  death  was 
undoubtedly  a  loss  not  only  to  the  Roman  people,  but 
to  the  whole  world.  7.  To  the  modern  reader  the 
elegies  of  Propertius  are  not  so  attractive  as  those  of 
Tibullus.  8.  The  greatest  danger  Rome  had  experi- 
enced since  the  time  of  Hannibal  was  now  impending 
over  the  State.  9.  The  consulship  fell  to  Cneius 
Octavius,  who  belonged  to  the  aristocratic-party,5  and 
Lucius  Cinna,   a  professed  champion  of  the  people. 

1  obsisto.    2  Ablative.    3  firospkio.    4  multitude?.    5  optimates. 


28  Latin   Composition. 

To  their1  election2  Sulla  made-no-opposition,3  for 
it  was  his  own  interest  to  quit  Italy  immediately.  10. 
The  Gauls  once  attacked  the  camp  of4  Quintus  Cicero, 
brother  of  the  orator,  [as  he  was]  wintering  in  Gaul ; 
but  Caesar  came  to  his  assistance  with  two  legions, 
and  rescued  him.  n.  A  servant  of  the  consul 
Opimius,  pushing  against  Gracchus,  insolently  cried 
out,  "  Make  way  for  honest  men,  you  rascals  !  "  12. 
"  Stand  aside  young  man,"  said  Caesar  to  the  tribune 
Metellus,  who  vainly  attempted  to  defend  the  treasury  ; 
"  it  is  easier  for  me  to  do  than  say."  13.  Damophilus, 
a  wealthy  man-of-Enna,  had  treated  his  slaves  with- 
excessive-barbarity.5  They  consulted  a  Syrian  slave, 
whose  name  was  Ennus,  who  belonged-to 6  another 
master.  This  Ennus  pretended-to 7  the  gift-of-pro- 
phecy,8  and  appeared  to  breathe  flames-of-fire.  He 
not  only  promised  them  success,  but  joined  in  the 
enterprise  himself.  14.  "  Mother,"  exclaimed  Corio- 
lanus,  "  thine  is  the  victory,  a  happy  victory  for  thee, 
but  shame  and  ruin  to  thy  son." 

1  Relative.  2  petitio.  3  non  obsz'stere.  4  Dative. 

5  Adverb  in  superlative.  6  servio.  7  sibi  adrogare. 

8  vis  divina. 

Lesson  13. 

Cases. — 4.  Cause,  Means,  and  Quality. 

Review  §§  246,  248  (Ablative  of  Agent  and  Means) ; 
251  with  215  (ablative  and  genitive  of  Quality)  ;  252 
with  a  (Price  and  Value:  compare  215.  c)  ;  245 
(ablative  of  Cause),  with  #,  b,  c. 

a.  The  means,  instrument,  or  agent  by  which  any  thing  is  done 
we  commonly  express  in  English  by  the  preposition  by  or  with. 
In  Latin  a  distinction  is  made  between  the  voluntary  agent 
(expressed  by  the  ablative  with  ab)  ;  a  person  considered  as  an 


Cases:   Cause,  &c.  29 

instrument  or  means  (expressed  by  par  with  the  accusative) ;  and 
the  means  or  instriDnent  (expressed  by  the  ablative  alone,  or 
in  special  cases  by  per  with  the  accusative).     Thus  — 

1.  Caesar  was  informed  by  the  ambassadors,  Caesar  certior 

/actus  est  a  legatis, 

2.  Caesar    was    informed    by    ambassadors    (i.  e.  by  means  of 

ambassadors),  Caesar  certior  f actus  est  per  legatos. 

3.  Caesar  was  informed  by   letter,    Caesar  certior  factus 

est    Uteris    (or    per    liter  as    if    the    letters    were    official 
documents  used  expressly  as  means  of  information). 

b.  The  English  on  account  of,  for,  from,  for  the  sake 
of,  through,  denoting  cause,  occasion,  or  motive,  though  oftenest 
expressed  by  the  ablative  alone,  are  frequently  also  rendered  by 
prepositions  :  as, 

1.  It  happened  through  my  fault,  mea  culpa  accidit. 

2.  On   account  of  the    pleasure  from  conversation  I  delight 

in   entertainments,  propter   sermonis   deleetationem 
conviviis  detector* 

3.  "We   love  the    good   for   their  virtues,  bonos    diligimus 

propter  virtutes  (so  pro  tneritis), 

4.  He  could  not  speak  for  grief,   loqui   prae  maerore  nan 

poiuit. 

So  the  phrases: — ex  quo,  on  which  account;  ex  eo  quod, 
for  the  7'eason  that ;  per  aetatem,  by  reason  of  age  j  quam  ob 
rem,  wherefore.     See  also  Lesson  18. 

c.  A  Quality  is  very  often  expressed  in  English  by  a  noun 
with  the  preposition  of  :  as,  a  man  of  worth,  a  tale  of  horror. 
In  Latin  an  adjective  must  be  used  in  such  cases,  except  when  the 
noun  of  quality  has  an  adjective  connected  with  it,  when  it  may  be 
put  either  in  the  genitive  or  ablative  :  generally  the  latter  when  the 
noun  describes  a  physical  trait.     Thus  — 

1.  A  man  of  valor,  vir  fortis  (or  fortissimus). 

2.  A  man  of  eminent  valor,  vir  egregiae  virtutis, 

3.  A  man  of  bodily  strength  and  beauty,  homo  validus  et 

pulcher. 

4.  Achilles  was  a  man   of  very   great   strength  and  remark- 

able  beauty,  Achilles  vir  erat  summis  viribus   et 
eximia  pulchritudine* 


30  Latin   Composition. 

d.  Manner  —  in  English  with  or  in  —  is  in  Latin  usually  ex- 
pressed by  an  Adverb  when  there  is  one ;  otherwise  by  the 
ablative,  otten  with  cum  (see  §  248.  R.)  :  as, 

1.  With  care,  accurate  (or,  cum  cur  a), 

2.  In  silence,  taclte  (or,  silent  to), 

3.  In  the  most  friendly  manner,  amicissime, 

4.  "With  the  greatest  zeal,  summo  studio. 

e.  The  Price  of  a  thing,  —  usually  given  in  English  with  the 
preposition  for  or  at,  —  when  a  definite  sum  is  stated,  is 
expressed  in  Latin  by  the  Ablative  ;  but  indefinite  price  or  value 
is  expressed  by  the  Genitives  of  Quantity  (tanti,  quanti,  &c), 
given  in  §  252.  a.  These  Genitives  often  answer  to  the  use  of 
an  adverb  in  English,  such  as  highly,  slightly,  not-at-all,  used  with 
expressions  of  value  or  esteem.     Thus  — 

1.  How   much  does   this  house   sell  for?    ten  thousand  ses- 

terces.    Quanti   hae    aedes   veneunt?  decies  mille 
nummis. 

2.  I  esteem  Plato  very  highly,  but  the  truth  more,  JPlatonem 

permagni  sed  veritatem  pluris  aestimo. 

Exercise  12. 

i.  The  Veneti  had  much  confidence  in  their  forti- 
fied positions.  Their  coasts  were  fringed  with  pro- 
montories and  peninsulas,  and,  relying  on  their  strong 
ships,  fully  armed  and  supplied  x  with  leathern  sails, 
they  were  not  alarmed  even  by  the  greatest  tempests 
of  the  ocean.  2.  A  liar2  hath  need  of  a  good  memory, 
but  truth  is  always  consistent  with  itself.  3.  I  offer 
myself  to  thee,  O  Hercules !  because  thou  art  de- 
scended from  the  gods,  and  givest  proofs  of  that  descent 
by  thy  love  of  virtue.  4.  Great  things  are  achieved 
by  great  exertions,  and  glory  was  never  the  reward  of 
sloth.  5.  The  Sabines,  like  most  other  mountaineers, 
were  brave,  hardy,  and  frugal ;  and  even  the  Romans 
looked-up 3  to  them  [with  admiration]  on  account  of 
their  honesty  and  temperance.  6.  Remus  leaped  in4 
1  omatus.  2  Dative.  8  ad?niror.  4  per. 


Cases:   Cause,  &c.  31 

scorn  over  his  brother's  wall.  7.  Romulus  appeared 
after  [his]  death  to  Proculus  in  more-than-mortal l 
beauty.  8.  Augustus  lived  with  republican  simplicity  2 
in  a  plain3  house  on  the  Palatine  [hill],  and  educated 
his  family  with  great  strictness  *  and  frugality.4  9.  Vi- 
tellius  was  remarkable  for  his  gluttony  5  and  his  coarse  6 
vices.  10.  Demosthenes  listened  awhile  to  the  bland 
professions  of  Archias,  the  actor,  but  at  length  replied, 
*  Archias,  you  never  won  me  by  your  acting,  nor  will 
you  now  by  your  promises."  II.  Columbus  entered 
the  hall  surrounded  by  a  brilliant  crowd  of  cavaliers, 
among  whom  he  was  conspicuous  for  his  stately  and 
commanding  person.7  12.  To  the  English  it  was  a 
night  of8  hope,  fear,  suspense,  [and]  anxiety.  They 
had  been  wasted  by  disease,  broken  with  fatigue,  and 
weakened  by  the  many  privations  which  are  wont  to 
attend9  an  army  marching  through  a  hostile  country. 
But  they  were  supported  by  the  spirit  and  confidence 
of  their  gallant  leader,  and  by  the  recollection  of 
victories  won  by  their  fathers.  13.  The  forests  have 
given  place  to  cultivated  fields,  the  morass  is  dried 
up,  the  land  has  become  solid,  and  is  covered  with 
habitations.  A  countless  multitude,  living  in  10  peace 
and  abundance  upon  the  fruits  of  their  labors,  has 
succeeded  to  the  tribes  of  hunters  who  were  always 
contending  with  war  and  famine.  What  has  pro- 
duced these  wonders?  What  has  renovated  the  sur- 
face of  the  earth?  The  name  of  this  beneficent 
genius  n  is  Security. 

1  divinus.     2  cultus  moderatus  (abl.).     8  minime  sumptuosus. 
4  Adverbs.  *  inte?nperantia  gulae.  *  turpis. 

7  habitus  corporis.      8  plena.     9  esse     10  w,  ablative.     J1  dea. 


32  Latin   Composition. 

Lesson  14. 

Cases.  —  5.  Separation  and  Comparison. 

Learn  §§  243,  with  a,  b,  c,  d  (ablative  of  Separa- 
tion) ;  229  (dative  with  Compounds)  ;  247,  with  #, 
250  (ablative  of  Comparison  and  of  the  Degree  of 
Difference). 

a.  The  relations  denoted  in  English  by  from  or  of  —  in  such 
phrases  as  to  deprive  of,  to  be  free  from,  in  want  of  and  the  like 
—  are  in  Latin  expressed  by  the  ablative  :  as, 

1.  He  is  free  from  terror,  caret  formidine. 

2.  To  retire  from  office,  abire  magistratu. 

3.  A  city  stripped  of  defence,  urbs  nuda  praesidio, 

4.  A  man  without  a  country,  homo  qui  caret  patria, 

5.  You   will   relieve    me    of  great   fear,   magno   me   metu 

liberabis. 
N.  B.  Motion  from  a  place  is  regularly  expressed  by  means  of 
prepositions  (see  Lesson  17). 

b.  When  a  thing  is  said  to  be  taken  away  from  a  person,  the 
dative  is  almost  always  used  instead  of  the  ablative  :  as, 

1.  He    took    a   ring    from    the    woman,    mulieri    anulum 

detraxit, 

2.  You  have  robbed  me  of  my  property,  bona  mihi  abstu- 

listi. 

c.  The  uses  of  the  ablative  with  the  Comparative  may  be  seen 
in  the  following  :  — 

1.  Nothing  is  dearer  to  a  man  than  life,  nihil  homini  vita 

est  carius. 

2.  Quicker  than  one  would  think,  opinione  celerius. 

3.  Much  more  rich  than  wise,  multo  divitior  quarn  sapi- 

entior, 

4.  The    more    dangerous    the    disease    the    more    praised    the 

physician,   quo  periculosior    morbus   eo    laudatior 
medicus. 

5.  The    more    virtuously    one    lives,   the   less   he  will   injure 

others,   quanto   quis   vivit   honestius   tanto    minus 
nocebit  aliis, 

6.  Not    more    than   two    hundred    horsemen    escaped,    hand 

amplius  ducenti  equites  effugerunt. 


Cases:  Separation  and  Comparison.  33 

Exercise  13. 

I.  The  orator  Hortensius  was  eight  years  older 
than  Cicero.  2.  Licinius  liberated  the  plebeians1 
from  an  oppressive  bondage.  3.  Rome  was  now  de- 
prived of  almost  all  her  allies.  4.  The  constitution2 
of  Lucius  Cornelius  took  from  the  knights  the  judicial- 
power3  which  they  had  exercised  since  the  times  of 
the  Gracchi.  5.  Men  are  much  less  in  bulk  than 
very  many  animals.  6.  Grief  and  indignation  de- 
prived Marius  of  utterance.4  7.  Antisthenes,  the 
Cynic,  was  once  very  sick,5  and  cried  out,  "  Who  will 
deliver  me  from  these  torments?"6  Then  said  Dio- 
genes, who  by  chance  was  by,  "This  knife,  if  you 
will."  "  I  do  not  say  from  my  life,"  he  7  replied,  "  but 
from  my  disease."  8.  The  archbishop  tore  the  diadem 
from  the  head  of  the  statue,  and  the  image,  thus 
despoiled  of  its  honors,  was  thrown  upon  the  ground. 
9.  The  aged  Nestor  boasts  his  virtues,  nor  seems  to 
be  too  loquacious ;  for  his  speech,  says  Homer,  flowed 
from  his  tongue  sweeter  than  honey.  10.  Hesiod  was 
robbed  of  a  fair  share  of  his  heritage  by  the  un- 
righteous decision  of  judges  who  had  been  bribed  by 
his  brother  Perses.  The  latter  was  afterwards  de- 
prived of  his  property,  and  asked  relief  of8  his 
brother.  11.  Alcaeus,  for  instance,  cheered  by  his 
songs  the  nobles  who  had  been  driven  into-exile.9 
12.  After  the  expulsion  of  the  kings,10  a  new  office 
was  created  at  Rome,  called  the  dictatorship,  greater 
than  the  consulship.  This  dignity,  however,  was  dis- 
continued after  the  second  Punic  war.     The  stronger 

1  plebs  (sing.).        2  instituta  (plur.).       3  judicium.       *  vox. 
5  graviter  aegrotare.  6  malum.  7  ille.  8  a. 

9  e  patria  (abl.).  10  post  reges  exactos. 

3 


34  Latin   Composition. 

the  Republic  became,  the  less  it  needed  this  extraor- 
dnary  power.  But  in1  the  civil  war  it  was  revived 
by  order  of  the  people,  and  conferred  upon  Sulla, 
who    afterwards    resigned   it   and   became    a   private 

citizen. 

1  Ablative. 

Lesson  15. 

Cases.  — 6.  Special  Uses  of  the  Genitive. 

Learn  §§  216,  with  c,  d,  e  (Partitive  genitive); 
and  217  (Objective  genitive  with  nouns). 

a.  When  in  English  one  noun  is  closely  connected  with  another 
by  a  preposition,  the  genitive  is  commonly  used  in  Latin,  no  matter 
what  the  preposition  is  in  English  (objective  Genitive :  see  exam- 
ples under  §  217)  :  as, 

1.  Prayer  to  the  gods,  precatio  deorum. 

2.  Escape  from  danger,  fug  a  periculi, 

3.  Power  over  every  thing,  potestas  omnium  rerum. 

4.  Pain  in  the  head,  dolor  capitis, 

5.  Confidence  in  one's  strength,  fiducia  virium. 

6.  Departure  from  life,  excessus  vitae. 

7.  Subject  for  jests,  materia  jocorum. 

8.  Struggle  for  office,  contentio  honorum. 

9.  Relief  from  duty,  vacatio  muneris. 

10.  Difference  in  politics,  rei  publicae  dissensio. 

11.  Reputation  for  valor,  opinio  virtutis. 

12.  Union  with  Caesar,  conjunctio  Caesaris, 

13.  Victory  in  war,  victoria  belli, 

14.  Devotion  to  us,  studium  nostri, 

15.  Grief  for  his  son,  luctus  filii, 

16.  A   means    of    guarding  against  troubles,  cautio  incom- 

modorum. 
Note.  —  Nouns  which  denote  feeling  often  take  the  accusative 
with    in,   erga,   adversus,   ad,   instead  of   an  objective   genitive. 
Prepositions  are  also  used  when  the  relation  is  very  remote.     (See 
examples  under  §  217.  R.). 


Cases:    The  Genitive.  35 

b.  Wherever  the  relation  expressed  by  a  noun  with  a  preposi- 
tion (especially  of)  can  be  viewed  as  a  quality  of  the  modified 
noun,  the  Latin  preters  to  use  an  adjective  :  just  as  in  English  we 
say,  the  Boston  massacre;  the  "Jackson  administration;  the 
Socratic  philosophy;  the  touch  of  the  royal  hand,  &c.  (compare 
examples  in  Lesson  5).     Thus  — 

1.  The  shout  of  the  enemy,  clamor  hostilis. 

2.  Jealousy  of  the  Senate,  invidia  senatoria. 

3.  Confidence  in  you,  fiducia  tua  (more  commonly  tui). 

4.  The  Cyrus  of  Xenophon,  Cyrus  Xenophonteus. 

c.  Where  a  word  denoting  a  whole  is  used  with  another 
denoting  a  part  (English  of,  in,  among),  it  is  regularly  put  in 
the  genitive.  (But  notice  carefully  the  Rertfarks  on  page  116  of 
the  Grammar.)  The  peculiarities  of  the  construction  are  seen 
in  the  following  idiomatic  phrases  :  — 

1.  Enough  money,  satis  pecuniae. 

2.  More  learning  than  wisdom,  plus  doctrinae  quam  pru- 

dentiae. 

3.  One  of  a  thousand,  unus  de  multis. 

4.  Alone  of  all,  solus  ex  omnibus  (or  omnium). 

5.  At  that  age,  id  aetatis. 

6.  Nowhere  in  the  world,  nusquam  gentium. 

7.  Of    the    two    consuls    one    was     killed     and    the     other 

wounded,  duo    consules  alter  est  interfectus  alter 
vulneratus. 

Cxercise  14. 

i.  On  his  way1  to  prison  Phocion  suffered  some 2 
gross  3  insults  from  the  populace  with-meekness  4  and 
dignity.5  2.  Two  wives  of  the  German  king,  Ariovis- 
tus,  perished ;  of  their  daughters,  one  was  slain, 
another  captured.  3.  We  have  not  yet  discussed6 
the  principal  wages  of  virtue  and  the  greatest  of  the 
prizes  that  are  held  out  to  it.  4.  From  his  boyhood  7 
the  Roman  soldier  was  schooled  to8  habitual9  indiffer- 

1  cum  duceretur.        2  quidam.         8  gravis.        4  submisse. 

5  cum  (with  abl).         6  disserere  de.        7  a  puero. 

8  Ablative.  9  perpetuus. 


36  Latin   Composition. 

ence  to  [his  own]  life.  5.  During1  the  holidays  in 
summer2  the  young  men  exercise  themselves  with3 
sports.  6.  To  what  a  degree  of  brutality  will  excess 
of  misery  debase  human  nature!  7.  Cneius  Lentu- 
lus,  a  military  tribune,  said  to  the  wounded  consul, 
"  Lucius  yEmilius,  whom  the  gods  ought  to  favor  as 
the  only  [person]  free-from 4  the  blame  of  this  day's 
disaster,  take  this  horse  while  you  have  any  remains 
of  strength.5  Do-not  6  add  to  the  horror  of  this  day  7 
by  the  death  of  a  consul.  Even  without  that,  there  is 
abundant  [cause  for]  tears  and  mourning."  8.  I  will 
recount  the  delights  and  pleasures  in  this  age  of 
eighty-three,  which  I  now  take,  and  on  account  of 
which  men  generally  account  me  happy.  9.  Many 
inventions  greatly  facilitate  success  in  the  chase.  The 
most  singular  of  these  is  a  poison  in  which  they  dip 
their  arrows.  The  slightest  wound  with  these  en- 
venomed shafts  is  mortal.  10.  Hannibal,  after  his  defeat 
at  Zama,  served  his  country  in  peace.  11.  Many  men 
expose  themselves  to  death  for  the  sake  of  power ; 
but  this  king  resigned  his  crown  because  his  love  for 
his  dominion,  his  affection  for  his  subjects,  and  his  re- 
gard for  their  interests  were  greater  than  his  desire  for 
power.  12.  The  conspirators  divided  into  three  parties. 
One  wras  posted  near  the  governor's  house,  a  second 
secured  the  approaches  to  the  market-place,  a  third 
hastened  to  the  quarter  of  the  tombs,  and  awaited 
the  signal  for  the  fight.  13.  Not  only  was  Brutus's 
life  saved  at  the  battle  of  Pharsalus,  but,  restored  to 
the  state  after  the  death  of  Pompey,  along  with  many 
of  his  friends,  he  had  also  great  influence  with8  Caesar. 

1  Ablative.  5  Adjective.  8  m.  4  insons. 

5  dum  aliquid  super  est  virium.  6  ne  (perf.  subj.). 

7  Lit.  "make  this  day  one-of-horror"  (funesius).        8  apud. 


Use  of  Two  Cases.  37 

Lesson  16. 

Cases.  —  7.  Use  of  Two  Cases. 

i.  Review  §§  225,  with  sub-sections  (Accusative 
and  Dative)  ;  239,  with  a,  b,  c>  d  (two  Accusatives). 

Learn  §§  219,  220,  221,  222  (Verbs  of  Reminding, 
Accusing,  &c,  with  the  Impersonate  miseret,  etc.). 

2.  A  verb  in  English,  besides  its  object,  has  often 
another  modifying  noun  with  a  preposition.  Such 
nouns  are  in  Latin  usually  put  in  the  case  correspond- 
ing to  the  English  preposition,  though  sometimes  a 
preposition  is  expressed. 

a.  The  Accusative  and  Dative  (compare  Lesson  10,  b),  in  such 
phrases  as  — 

1.  He   laid   the    burden    on   my   shoulders,   humeris    meis 

onus  imposuit. 

2.  I   do   not   envy   Crassus   for  his  wealth  (I  do  not  grudge 

wealth  to  Crassus),  Crasso  divitias  non  invideo. 

3.  Caesar  required   ten  hostages   of   the  Helvetians,    Caesar 

Helvetiis  decent  obsides  imperavit  (225.  c). 

Note. —  In  these  cases  notice  the  Latin  idiom,  as  it  often 
differs  from  the  English  ;  and  observe  carefully  the  construction 
of  each  verb  as  given  in  the  Vocabulary. 

b.  Accusative  and  Genitive,  in  such  phrases  as  — 

1.  You  remind  me  of  my  duty,  me  mones  officii, 

2.  He  accuses  me  of  theft,  arguit  me  furti, 

3.  I  repent  of  my  folly,  meae  me  stultitiae  paenitet. 

4.  I  am  weary   of  life,  me  vitae   taedet   (weary  with  toil, 

fessns  labor e). 

c.  Two  Accusatives  :  I.  One  in  Apposition  (see  Lesson  2)  ; 
2.  With  verbs  of  Asking  and  Teaching  : 

Panaetius  taught  Scipio  the   Greek   philosophy,  Panaefpus 
Scipionem  Graecam  docuit  philosophiam. 


38  Latin   Composition. 

Exercise  15* 

i.  The  men-of-Minturnae 1  repented  of  their  un- 
grateful conduct  towards 2  a  man  who  had  been  the 
safety  of  Italy.  2.  The  younger  Marius  put  an  end 
to  his  own  life.3  3.  In  the  proscriptions  of  Sulla,  to 
many  a  man  who  belonged  to  no  party  an  estate  or  a 
house  was  his  destruction.  For  although  the  property 
of  the  proscribed  belonged  to  the  state,  yet  the  friends 
of  Sulla  purchased  it  at-a-nominal-price.4  4.  Marius 
upbraided  the  nobles 5  [with]  their  effeminacy  and 
idleness,  and  proudly  compared  his  own  words  and 
exploits  with  their  indolence  and  ignorance.  His 
election  was  a  great  victory  for  the  common-people, 
and  a  great  humiliation  to  the  aristocracy.  5.  The 
great  numbers  of  the  enemy  were  a  hindrance  rather 
than  a  help  to  them.  6.  Polybius  taught  the  noble- 
men of  Rome  their  own  municipal  law.  7.  O 
Jupiter !  give  us  those  things  that  are-good-for 6  us ! 
8.  Praise  is  to  an  old  man  an  empty  sound.  I  have 
outlived  my  friends  and  my  rivals.  Nothing  is  now 
of  much  account  to  me.  9.  An  exile  and  a  menial 
muttered  the  last  farewell  to  Pompey,  the  mighty 
victor  of  the  East,  the  powerful  lord  of  the  Roman 
Senate.  10.  The  Senate  distributed  provinces  and 
suitable  honors  among  the  partisans  of  Brutus.  11. 
The  noblest  of  the  Romans  were  ashamed  of  the 
victory  by  which  they  had  avenged  the  disgrace  of 
the  Caudine  Forks.  12.  Old  age  is7  most  irksome7 
to  the  poor.8  13.  Publius  Autronius  and  Servius  Cor- 
nelius Sulla  had  been  elected  consuls,  but  were  con- 
victed  of    bribery.      Catiline    also,    who    wished    to 

"^Minturnensis.  s  erga.  3  mortem  sibi  consciscere. 

4  minimo.     5  Dative.     6  convenire.     7  piget.     8  Accusative. 


Cases:   Time  and  Place,  39 

become  a  candidate,  had  been  impeached1  for  oppres- 
sion in  his  province  by  Publius  Clodius.  14.  Caius 
Mucius  was  seized  by  the  guards  and  brought  before 
the  king,  who  threatened  him  with  cruel  tortures. 
But  he  said,  "  See  now  how  little  your  torments  terrify  2 
me."  Then  he  plunged  his  right  hand  into  the 
fire  of  an  altar  that  burned  near  by,  and  held  it  in 
the  flames,  by  which  it  was  wholly  consumed.  From 
this  act  the  name  Sccevola  was  given  him,  which 
signifies  He  that  uses  the  left  hand.  15.  The  second 
secession  extorted  from  the  patricians  again  a  second :{ 
great  charter 4  of  liberty.  The  people  had  become 
tired  of  the  decemvirs,  and  were  dissatisfied 5  with 
their  measures ;  for  which  reason  they  retired  from 
[their]  office,  and  the  people  elected  ten  tribunes. 
The  decemvirs  were  then  accused  of  treason,  and 
some  were  condemned  to  death,  others  Committed 
suicide.  Two  consuls  were  elected,  and  the  Valerian 
and  Horatian  laws  were  passed.  The  plebeians  were 
still,  however,  debarred  from  marriage  with  the  patri- 
cians. 

1  reus  fieri.    *  Subjunctive.     3  alter.    4  fiignus.    b  paenitet. 

Lesson  1 7. 

Cases. —  8.  Time  and  Place. 

Learn  §§   256,  with  a;  257,  258  (reading  Notes), 

with  a,  b,  c,  d,f,  g;  and  Remarks. 

Learn  also  §§  259.  a  to  h,  and  260.  a. 

a.   Many  expressions  have  in  Latin  the  construction  of  time 
when,  where  in  English  time  is  not  the  main  idea  :  as, 

1.  In    the    fight    at    Cannae,    pugna    Cannensi    (or    apud 

C  annas). 

2.  At  the  Roman  games,  ludis  Momanis. 

3.  In  all  the  wars  of  Gaul,  omnibus  Gallicis  bellis. 


40  Latin    Composition. 

b.  In  many  expressions  of  time  the  accusative  with  ad,  in,  or 
sub,  is  used.     Such  are  the  following  :  — 

i.  A  thanksgiving  was  voted  for  the  1st  of  January,  suppli- 
catio  deer  eta  est  in  Kalendas  Januarias. 

2.  They  assembled  at  the  [appointed]  day,  convenerunt  ad 
diem. 

3'  ~      evening,  m       \  ad  vesperum. 

Towards  (about)  evening,  ^ 

4.  About  the  same  time,  sub  idem  tempus. 

c.  Time  either  during  or  within  which  may  be  expressed  by 
a  noun  in  the  singular,  with  an  ordinal  numeral :  as, 

1.  Within  (just)  four  days,  quinto  die. 

2.  He  has  reigned  going  on  six  years,  regnat  jam,  sextum 

annum.    But  also  — 

3.  He  has  already  reigned  for  six  years,  regnavit  jam  sex 

annos. 

d.  Distance  of  time  before  or  after  any  thing  is  variously  ex- 
pressed :  as, 

1.  Three   years   after,   post    (or   before,    ante)    tres    annos, 

post    tertium   annum,   tres    post    annos,   tertium 
post  annum,  tribus  post  annis,  tertio  post  anno. 

2.  Three   years   after  his  banishment,   tribus   annis   {tertio 

anno)  jjost  exsilium  [post  quam  ejectus  est). 

3.  Within  the  last  three  years,  his  tribus  proximis  annis. 

4.  A  few  years  hence,  paucis  annis. 

5.  Three  years  ago,  abhinc    annos    tres  {tribus   annis) ; 

ante  hos  tres  annos. 

6.  It  is  three  years  since,  triennium  est  cum  {tres  anni 

sunt  cum). 

e.  The  time  of  day  is  only  counted  by  hours,  beginning  at 
sunrise  (prima,  secunda  hora)  ;  the  time  of  night  by  watches, 
(vigiliae),  of  which  there  were  four  from  sunset  to  sunrise. 

/.  The  names  of  the  Months  are  adjectives,  and  agree  either 
with  mensis  or  with  the  parts  into  which  the  month  was  divided 
in  the  complicated  Roman  system,  for  which  see  Grammar,  §  376. 

g.  The  year  is  expressed  by  the  names  of  the  consuls  in  the 
Ablative  Absolute.  Modern  dates  may  be  expressed  by  the  year 
after  the  birth  of  Christ  {post  Christum  natum) . 


Cases:    Time  and  Place.  41 

h.  With  names  of  places  (except  Towns,  &c,  see  §  258),  to 
is  expressed  by  in  or  ad  with  the  accusative  ;  IN  by  in  or  ab,  with 
the  ablative  ;  from  by  ab,  de,  ex,  with  the  ablative.  But  at, 
meaning  near  (not  in) ,  is  expressed  with  all  names  of  place  by  ad 
or  apud,  with  the  accusative. 

Remark.  —  Notice  that,  when  several  names  of  place  follow  a 
verb  of  motion,  each  must  be  under  its  own  construction.     Thus  — 

Within  four  days  after  this  was  done  the  matter  was 
reported  to  Chrysogonus  in  Sulla's  camp  at  Volaterrae, 
qaadriduo  quo  haec  gesta  sunt  res  ad  Chruso- 
gonum  in  castra  L.  Sullae  Volaterras  defertur. 

Notice  also  that  the  meaning  of  the  Latin  verb  must  be  con- 
sidered in  relations  of  place  :  as, 

1.  He  arrived  in  Spain,  pervenit  in  Hispaniam. 

2.  He  arrived  at  Rome,  pervenit  Romam. 

3.  They    assembled   in   the    Senate-house,    convenerunt   in 

curiam. 

4.  He  brought  his  army  together  in  one  place,  coegit  exer- 

citum  in  unum  locum. 

Exercise  16. 

i.  After  the  death  of  Lucretia,  Brutus  threw  off  his 
assumed  stupidity,  and  placed  himself  at  the  head  1  of 
her  friends.  They  carried  the  body  into  the  market- 
place [of  JCollatia.2  There3  the  people  took  up  arms 
and  renounced  the  Tarquins.  A  number-of4  young 
men  attended  the  funeral-procession  5  to  Rome.  Bru- 
tus summoned  the  people0  [and]  related  7  the  deed-of- 
shame.8  All  classes  were  influenced  with  the  same 
indignation.9  By  order  of  the  people  Tarquin  was 
deposed,10  and,  along  with  his  family,  was  banished 
from  the  city.  Brutus  now  set  out  for  the  army  at 
Ardea.11     Tarquin  in  the  meantime  had  hastened  to 

1  Lit.  "added  himself  as  leader."    2  Accusative.    3  Relative. 
4  plures.  b  exsequiae  funeris.  6  convocato  populo. 

7  narrare  de.      s  f acinus  flagitiosum.      9  dolor  et  indignatio. 
10  regnum  abrogari  (with  dat.) .  n  Accusative. 


42  Latin   Composition. 

Rome,  but  found  the  gates  closed  against  him. 
Brutus  was  received  with  joy  at  Ardea,  and  the  army 
renounced  [their]  allegiance :  to  the  tyrant.  Tar- 
quin,  with  his  two  sons,  Titus  and  Aruns,  took  refuge 
at  Caere,  in  Etruria.  Sextus  fled  to  Gabii,  where  he 
was  shortly  after  murdered  by  the  friends  of  those 
whom  he  had  put  to  death.  Tarquin  had  reigned 
twenty-two  years  when  he  was  driven  from  Rome.  In 
memory  of  this  event  an  annual  festival  was  celebrated 
on  the  24th  of  February,  called  the  Regifngium. 

2.  Jugurtha  was  taken  prisoner.  The2  great  traitor 
fell  by  the  treachery  of  his  nearest  relatives.  Lucius 
Sulla  brought  the  crafty  and  restless  Numidian  in 
chains,8  along  with  his  children,  to  the  Roman  head- 
quarters ;  and  the  war,  which  had  lasted  for  seven 
years,  was  at  an  end.  The  glory  of  this  victory  was 
given  to  Marius.  King  Jugurtha,  in4  royal  robes  and 
in  chains,  along  with  his  two  sons,  preceded  the  tri- 
umphal chariot  of  the  victor,  when-he-entered 5  Rome 
two  years  afterwards,  on  January  1st,  b.  c.  104.  By 
order  of  Marius,  the  son  6  of  the  desert  perished  a  few 
days  afterwards  in  the  subterranean  city  prison. 

1  obedientiam  abicio.  *  tile.  3  vinctus  catenis. 

4  regie  vestitus.  *  Participle.  *  alu?nnus. 


Lesson  18. 

Cases.  —  9.  Prepositions. 

i.  Learn  §§  152,  with  a,  b9  c>  comparing  260  (Use 
of  Prepositions)  ;  also  §§  237.  d,  239.  b  (compounds  of 
circum  and  trans). 

2.  In  general,  the  use  of  prepositions  in  Latin  is 
the  same  as  in  English.     They  are  always  followed 


Cases:  Prepositions.  43 

either  by  the  Accusative  or  Ablative :  those  implying 
motion  towards  an  object  for  the  most  part  taking  the 
accusative,  and  those  implying  rest  in,  or  motion 
from  an  object,  the  ablative. 

Note.  —  There  are  very  many  idiomatic  uses  of  prepositions, 
for  which  see  the  Examples  in  §  153,    and  consult  the  Lexicon. 

a.  Position  is  frequently  expressed  in  Latin  with  ab  (rarely 
ex),  properly  meaning /h?,?/  .•  as, 

1.  In  the  rear,  a  tergo. 

2.  On  the  side  of  Pompey,  a  parte  JPompeiana. 

3.  On  the  left  hand,  a  sinistra  (compare  nine,  on  this  side). 

4.  On  the  other  side,  ex,  altera  parte. 

5.  In  a  great  degree,  magna  ex  parte. 

b.  In  the  choice  of  prepositions  the  Latin  point  of  view  must 
be  carefully  observed,  as  in  many  cases  it  differs  from  our  own 
(see  §  260.  a).     Thus  — 

1.  To  put  clothes  into  a  chest,  ponere  vestes  in  area. 

2.  To  choose  in  one's  place,  in  alicujus  locum  deligere. 

3.  To  fight  on  horseback,  ex  equo  pugnare. 

4.  It  was  reported  in  camp,  in  castra  ntintiatum  est. 

5.  To  go  on  board  ship,  conscendere  in  navem  (more  com- 

monly without  the  preposition). 

6.  To    send    a   man    a   letter,   mittere    {dare)    literas    ad 

allquem.    But  — 

7.  To  give  one  a  letter  (to  carry),  dare  literas  alicui. 

c.  In  many  cases  where  a  preposition  is  used  in  English,  Latin 
has  the  preposition  compounded  with  a  verb  or  implied  in  it.  In 
such  cases  the  construction  of  the  Latin  verb  must  be  observed 
(see    Dictionary)  :  as, 

1.  To  go  over  a  river,  /lumen  transire. 

2.  To    take    one's    forces    across    a   river,    copias    /lumen 

transdncere. 

3.  To   go    beyond    the    boundaries,  egredi  fines   (or   out  of 

the  city,  ex  urbe). 

4.  To  fly  from  the  enemy,  fugere  hostes. 

5.  To  get  into  one's  favor,  inire  alicujus  gratiam. 


44  Latin    Corn-position . 

Note.  —  When  a  verb  with  a  Preposition  in  English  is  repre- 
sented in  Latin  by  one  of  the  compounds  given  in  228  (ad,  ante, 
con,  &c.),  it  is  commonly  followed  by  the  dative.  If,  however, 
the  compound  represents  a  verb  qualified  by  an  Adverb,  it  retains 
its  original  construction  :  as,  insidet  equo,  he  sits  upon  a  horse; 
but,   convocat  suos,  he  calls  his  men  together. 

Exercise  11. 

1.  Without  intelligence  and  goodness  bodily  gifts 
are  l  of  little2  worth.1 

2.  Besides  life  and  sense  (which  he  has  in  common 
with3  the  brutes),  there  is  in  man4  something  more 
exalted,  more  pure,  and  that  more  nearly  approaches5 
to  divinity. 

3.  It  was  an  arduous  [undertaking]  to  conduct  such  6 
a  body  of  men  through  hostile  nations,  across  swamps 
and  rivers  which  had  never  been  passed  by  any  one 
except  roving  barbarians.  Bat  they  penetrated  a  good 
way  into  the  mountains.  Then,  however,  a  chief 
appeared,  with  a  numerous  body,  in  a  narrow-pass. 
But  men  who  had  surmounted  so  many  obstacles 
despised  the  opposition  of  such  feeble  enemies.12 

4.  As  I  was  hurrying  through  the  town  a  group  of 
boys  ran  before  me,  crying  out,  Agamemnon  !  Agamem- 
non! I  went  on  behind  them,  and  they  led  me  to  the 
tomb  of  the  king  of  kings,  a  gigantic  structure,7  for 
the  most  part  in-good-preservation,8  of  a  conical  form, 
and  covered  with  turf.  The  stone  over  the  door  is 
twenty-seven  feet  long 9  and  seventeen  wide ;  larger 
than  any  hewn  10  stone  in  the  world,  except  Pompey's 
pillar.  The  royal  sepulchre  was  forsaken  and  empty  ; 
the  shepherd  shelters  his  flock  within  it ;  the  traveller 
sits  under  its  shade,  and  at-that-moment u  a  goat  was 

1  valere.  2  Superlative.  8  commune  esse  \alicui\  cum.  4  Plural. 

5  ftrope  abesse.       6  tantum  agmen.       7  moles.      H  incolumis. 

9  in  longitudinem.  10  quadratus.  n  turn  maxitne. 

12  tarn  exiguam  vim  hostium. 


Verbs:  Narrative  Tenses.  45 

dozing1  quietly  in  [one]  corner.  I  turned-away 2 
[and]  left  him3  in  quiet  possession.  The  boys  were 
waiting  outside  the  door,  and  crying,  Mycelial  My- 
cence!  led  me  away  from  the  place. 

5.  I  have  at  length  arrived  at  Cadiz.  I  came 
across  the  bay  yesterday  morning,  and  have  estab- 
lished myself  in  very  pleasant  rooms  which  look  out 
upon  the  public  square  of  the  city.  The  morning  sun 
awakes  me,  and  the  sea-breeze  comes  in  at  my 
window.  At  night  the  square  is  lighted  by  lamps 
suspended  from  the  trees,  and  thronged  with  a  brilliant 
crowd  of  the  young  and  gay.  Cadiz  is  beautiful 
almost  beyond-imagination.4 

1  dormito  (imperfect).  2  Participle.  3  Relative. 

4  supra  quam  quis  animo  concipere  possit. 


Lesson  19. 

Verbs.  —  1.  Narrative  Tenses. 

i.  Learn  §§  264.  a;  276,  with  a,  d;  277,  with  a-c; 
278,  279,  with  a-c;  280  (Present  and  Past  Tenses  of 
the  Indicative)  ;  and  275  (Historical  Infinitive). 

Review  §  115.  b  (use  of  Perfect  and  Imperfect). 

2.  The  narrative  tenses  in  Latin  are  used  nearly  as 
in  English.     But  — 

a.  The  Present  is  used  much  oftener  than  in  English  to  express 
a  past  action  more  vividly. 

b.  The  ordinary  English  past  tense  is  represented  in  Latin 
sometimes  by  the  Perfect  (historical),  and  sometimes  by  the  Im- 
perfect. (For  the  distinction  see  §  11$.  b).  But  the  use  of 
the  Imperfect  depends  not  so  much  on  the  actual  duration 
of  the  action  as  upon  the  way  in  which  the  writer  wishes  to 
represent  it.     Thus  — 


46  Latin   Composition. 

1.  Cicero    lived    sixty-three    years,     Cicero    vixit   LXIII 

annos,  [Here  the  action,  though  of  long  duration,  is  stated 
as  a  simple  fact.] 

2.  Bibulus  -watched  the  heavens,  -while  Caesar  held  the  elec- 

tion, Dibulus  de  caelo  servabat,  cum  Caesar 
comitia  habebat,  or  habuit.  [Here  the  action,  though 
brief,  is  represented  as  continuing.] 

3.  Homer  flourished  before  the  founding  of  Rome,  Homerus 

fait  ante  Romam  conditam, 

4.  Homer  was  more  skilled  than  Hesiod,  Homerus  doctior 

erat  Hesiodo. 

c.  In  rapid  narrative,  the  English  past  tense  is  often  rendered 
by  the  simple  (historical)  Infinitive,  with  its  subject  in  the  nomina- 
tive. This  construction  also  often  corresponds  with  the  English 
"began  to."     (For  examples,  see  Grammar,  p.  194.) 

d.  Customary  action  is  represented  in  general  by  the  Present, 
and  in  past  tense  by  the  Imperfect;  though  soleo,  and  similar 
words,  are  often  used  (but  much  less  commonly  than  in  English) 
to  give  emphasis  to  the  fact  of  custom.     Thus  — 

1.  He  was  always  praising  Milo,  laudabat  semper  JSlilo- 

nem. 

2.  He    -would    often    play   with    his    children,    saepe    cum 

pueris  ludebat. 

3.  It   was    a    habit   of   Quintus   Mucius   to   tell,    Q.  JMucius 

narrare  solebat, 

e.  The  beginning  of  an  action  is  often  expressed  by  the  Present 
or  Imperfect,  especially  with  jam:  as, 

1.  I  begin  to  feel  like  dancing,  Jam  lubet  saltare, 

2.  They  stood  up  and  began  to   applaud,  stantes  plaude- 

bant. 

f.  The  English  compound  perfect  is  often  expressed  in  Latin 
(when  the  action  still  continues)  by  the  present,  with  some  word 
denoting  duration  of  time.  The  same  usage  with  the  imperfect  is 
more  rare. 

1.  "We  have  suffered  many  years,  multos  annos  patimur. 

2.  We  have   long  been  involved  in  dangers,  Jam   diu   in 

periculis  versamur, 

3.  The    forces    which    they    had    long    been    getting   ready, 

copiae  quas  diu  comparabant. 


Verbs:  Narrative   Tenses,  47 


Exercise  18. 

i.  The  Tiber  had  overflowed  its  banks  far  and 
wide.1  The  cradle  in  which  the  babes  were  placed 
was  stranded  at  the  foot  of  the  Palatine,  and  over- 
turned on  the  root  of  a  wild  fig-tree.  A  she-wolf, 
which  had  come  to  drink2  of3  the  stream,  came  to 
them  from  time  to  time,  and  suckled  them.  When4 
they  wanted  other  food,  the  woodpecker,  a  bird  sacred 
to  Mars,  brought  it  to  them.  At  length  this  marvellous 
spectacle  was  seen5  by  Faustulus  the  king's  shepherd, 
who  took  the  children  home  to  his  wife  Acca  La- 
rentia.  They  were  called  Romulus  and  Remus,  and 
grew  up  with  the  sons  of  their  foster-parents  6  on  the 
Palatine  Hill. 

2.  Then  Nasica  rushed  out  of  the  Senate-house, 
followed 7  by  many  of  the  Senators.  The  people  made  8 
way  for  them,  broke  up8  the  benches,  and  armed8  them- 
selves with  sticks,  and  rushed8  upon  Tiberius  and  his 
friends.  The  tribune  9  fled  to  the  temple  of  Jupiter  ; 
but  the  door  had  been  barred  by  the  priests,  and  in 
his  flight  he  fell  over  a  prostrate  body.  As10  he  was 
rising,  he  received  the  first  blow  from  one  of  his 
colleagues,  and  was  quickly  despatched. 

3.  Pyrrhus  was  at  first  victorious ;  for  his  own 
talents  were  superior  to  those  of  the  captains  who 
were  opposed  to  him,  and  the  Romans  were  not  pre- 
pared for  the  onset  of  the  elephants  of  the  East,  which 
were  then  for  the  first  time  seen  in  Italy  —  as  it  were 
moving  mountains,  with  long  snakes  for  hands.  But 
the  victories  of  the  Epirots  were   fiercely  disputed, 

1  late.    2  potum  (supine).    3  ad  (ace).    4  cum  (with  indie). 

5  conspicere.  6  altores.  7  comitates.  8  Hist.  Inf. 

9  We.  10  cum  (with  imperf.  subj.). 


48  Latin   Composition. 

dearly  purchased,  and  altogether  unprofitable.  At 
length  Manius  Curius  Dentatus,  who  had  in  his  first 
consulship  won  two  triumphs,  was  again  placed  at 
the  head  of  the  Roman  commonwealth,  and  sent  to 
encounter  the  invaders.  A  great  battle  was  fought 
near  Beneventum,  in  which  Pyrrhus  was  completely 
defeated. 

4.  Cato  was  an  unfeeling  and  cruel  master.  His 
conduct  towards  his  slaves  was  detestable.  After 
dinner  he  would  often  severely  chastise  them,  thong 
in  hand,  for  some  trifling  act  of  negligence,  and  some- 
times condemned  them  to  death.  When  they  were 
worn  out  or  useless,  he  sold  them  or  turned  them  out 
of  doors.  He  treated  the  lower  animals  no  better. 
His  war-horse,  which  had  borne  him  through  his 
campaign  in  Spain,  he  sold  in-that-country.1  In  his 
old  age  he  sought  gain  with  increasing  eagerness,  but 
never  attempted  to  profit  by  the  misuse  of  his  public 
functions.  He  accepted  no  bribes,  he  reserved  no 
booty  to  his  own  use ;  but  he  became  a  speculator,  not 
only  in  slaves,  but  in  buildings,  artificial  waters,  and 
pleasure-grounds.  In  this,  as  in  other  points,2  he 
was  a  representative  of  the  old  Romans,  who  were  a 
money-getting3  and  money-loving4  people. 

1  ibi.  2  res.  3  quaestuosus.  *  avarus. 

Lesson  20. 

Verbs.  —  2.  The  Passive  Voice. 

i.  Learn  §§  in  (use  of  the  Passive)  ;  also  135.  d 
(gerundive  of  Deponents)  ;  and  129  (the  second  Peri- 
phrastic Conjugation). 

Review  §§  232,  with  a,  c  (dative  of  Agent);  246 
(ablative  of  Agent). 


Verbs:    The  Passive    Voice,  49 

2.  The  Passive  in  Latin  is  often  employed  where  in 
English  we  prefer  the  Active.  The  principal  cases 
are  the  following  :  — 

a.  The  Impersonal  use  of  neuter  verbs  in  the  passive  (compare 
§  146.  c;  and  Method,  Lesson  20,  Obs.  3)  :  as, 

1.  They  live  on  plunder,  eoc  rapto  vivitur. 

2.  They  fought   fiercely   on    both    sides,  acriter   utrimque 

pugnatum  est. 

b.  This  impersonal  use  is  the  regular  way  of  representing  the 
English  passive,  where  the  corresponding  Latin  verb  does  not 
govern  the  accusative  (see  §  230)  :  as, 

1.  The  commander  is  relieved  (by  the  appointment  of  a  successor), 

imperatori  succeditur. 

2.  I  am  persuaded  that  this  is  true,  mihi  persuasum  est 

hoc  esse  vevum. 

3.  These  things  are  done  more  easily  than  they  are  resisted, 

facilius  haec  fiunt  quam  his  resistitur. 

4.  This  subject  was  much  discussed,  de  hac  re  multum 

disputatum  est. 

5.  Let  the  influence  of  friends  be  employed,  and  when  em- 

ployed   obeyed,   amicorum    auctoritas    adhibeatur 
et  adhibitae  pareatur. 

c.  The  most  common  way  of  expressing  the  English  ou«ht, 
must,  and  the  like,  is  by  some  form  of  esse  with  the  Gerundive, 
which  in  this  construction  is  always  passive,  no  matter  which 
voice  is  used  in  English  (compare  §  296.  'Note) :  as, 

1.  Nobody  i3  to  be  blamed,  nemo  culpandus  est. 

2.  We  must  do  every  thing,  omnia  nobis  sunt  facienda. 

3.  All  must  die,  omnibus  moriendum  est. 

4.  We   must  resist   old   age   (or   old    age    must   be    resisted), 

senectuti  resistendum  est. 

d.  When  the  Subject  of  the  action  is  indefinite,  the  Latin 
generally  prefers  the  passive,  construction  (compare  a,  above) :  as, 

1.  Men  do  not  gather  grapes  from  thorns,  ex  sentibus  uvae 

non  percijnuntur. 
2. •We   do  ill   whatever   we   do   from   confidence  in  fortune, 

male  geritur  quicquid  geritur  fortunae  fide. 

4 


50  Latin   Composition . 

e.  Many  neuter  verbs  in  English  are  rendered  in  Latin  by 
reflexives  or  by  the  passive :  as, 

i.  Hens  roll  in  the  dirt,  gallinae  in  pulvere  volutantur* 

2.  He  rides  on  the  Appian  Way,  in  via  Appia  vehitur. 

3.  Codrus  is  bursting  with  envy,  invidia  rumpitur  Codrus, 

4.  He   turns   to   his  lieutenant,  ad  legatum  se  vertit  (or, 

vertitur). 

3.  On  the  other  hand,  an  active  construction  is 
often  preferred  in  Latin,  where  the  passive  is  used  in 
English.     This  happens  — 

a.  In  cases  where  the  emphasis  is  on  the  Object  of  an  action, 
or  the  action  itself,  rather  than  on  the  Agent ;  because  the  empha- 
sis can  be  given  in  Latin  (though  not  in  English)  by  position. 
Thus  — 

1.  Socrates  -was  put  to  death  by  his  fellow-citizens,  Socra- 

tem  elves  sui  interfecerunt, 

2.  Egypt  is  watered    by   the   Nile,  and    Mesopotamia   made 

fertile  by   the    Euphrates,  Aegyptum   Nilus   irrigat, 
Mesopotamiam  fertilem  efticit  Euphrates. 

b.  As  most  deponent  verbs  have  no  passive,  the  active  con- 
struction must  frequently  be  used  for  the  English  passive  :  as, 

1.  He  is  most   admired   who   is  not   influenced   by  money, 

quern  pecunia  non  tnovet  eum  homines  maxime 
admirantur. 

2.  "We   should  not   mourn   a   death   which   is  succeeded  by 

immortality,  non  lugenda  est  mors  quam  immorta- 
litas  consequatur. 

c.  In  a  few  cases,  instead  of  the  regular  passive  in  Latin,  a 
neuter  verb  of  kindred  meaning  is  employed  :  as, 

1.  To  add,  adder e ;  to  be  added,  accedere. 

2.  To  destroy,  perdere  ;  to  be  destroyed,  perire. 

3.  To  sell,  vendere;  to  be  sold,  venire  {veneo). 

4.  To  flog,  verberare;  to  be  flogged,  vapulare, 

4.  When  the  present  passive  in  English  denotes 
a  completed  action,  it  is  generally  represented  by  trje 
perfect  in  Latin;  but  when  it  denotes  an  action  in 


Verbs:   The  Passive    Voice.  51 

-progress,  or  a  general  fact,  we  must  use  the  present. 
Thus  — 

1.  The  enemy  are  beaten,  hostes  victi  sunt, 

2.  He  is  loved  by  his  friends,  diligitur  ah  amicis. 

3.  Among  the  Parthians  the  signal  is  given  by  a  drum,  apud 

Parthos  signum  datur  tympano. 

Remark.  —  Care  must  be  taken  in  rendering  the  confused  or 
disguised  forms  of  the  passive  in  English  :  as, 

1.  The  house  is  building,   domus    aedificatur   (but,   he   is 

building  a  house,  domum  aedificat). 

2.  While  these  tilings  are  being  done,  dam  liaec  aeruntur. 

5.  When  a  verb  in  the  active  voice  is  followed  by 
two  cases  (with  or  without  a  preposition),  the  accusa- 
tive of  the  direct  object  becomes  the  subject  of  the 
passive,  the  other  case  being  retained  as  in  the  active 
construction.     Thus  (compare  examples  on  p.  37)  — 

1.  Crassus    is   not  envied  for  his   "wealth,    Crasso    dlvitiae 

non  invidentur. 

2.  Verres  is  charged  with  extortion,  Verves  repetundarum 

reus  fit. 

3.  Cato  is  asked  his  opinion,  Cato  rogatur  sententiam. 

Remark.  —  The  use  of  a  second  accusative  in  this  construc- 
tion is  found  chiefly  with  rogo,  posco,  and  celo. 

Exercise  19. 

I.  We  must  resist  old  age,  my  friends,  —  says 
Cicero  in  the  book  entitled  x  Cato  Major,  —  and  its 
failings  must  be  made  good  by  pains-taking.  We 
must  fight  against  old  age  as  against  disease.  Re- 
gard must  be  paid  to  health.  Moderate  exercise 
should  be  employed,  a  sufficiency  of  food  and  drink 
must  be  taken.2  Not  only  the  body  needs  to  be 
bolstered-up,  but  the  mind  and  soul  much  more ;  for 
these  too  die  out  through  old  age. 

1  See  Lesson  8.  3.  8  adhibere. 


52  Latin   Composition. 

2.  "Even  now,"  said  Caesar,  "we  may1  return;  if 
we  cross  the  bridge,  arms  must  decide  the  contest." 
At  that  moment  of  suspense  2  [there]  appeared  sud- 
denly the  figure  of  a  youth,  remarkable  for  comeliness 
and  stature,  playing  on  a  pipe,  the  emblem  of  peace 
and  security.  The  shepherds  who  were  about  the 
spot  began  to  mingle  with  the  soldiers  and  straggle 
towards  him,  captivated  by  his  simple  airs;  when  with 
a  violent  movement  he  snatched  a  trumpet  from  one 
of  the  military  band,3  rushed  with  it  to  the  bank  of  the 
river,  and  blowing  a  furious  blast  of  martial  music, 
leaped  into  the  water,  and  disappeared  on  the  opposite 
side.  "Let  us  advance,"4  exclaimed  Caesar,  "  where5 
the  gods  direct,  and  our  enemies  invite  us.  Be  the 
die  cast!" 

3.  A  conspiracy 7  against  the  life  of  Caesar  had-been- 
formed7  in-the-beginning-of-the-year.8  Many  of  the 
conspirators  had  fought  in  the  war  against  Caesar ; 
and  had  not  only  been  pardoned6  by  him,  but  raised 
to  offices  of  rank  and  honor.  Among  others  was 
Marcus  Junius  Brutus,  whom  Caesar  had  pardoned 
after  the  battle  of  Pharsalia,  and  had  since  treated 
almost  as  a  son.  He  was  now  persuaded  by  Cassius 
to-join9  the  conspiracy,  and  imitate  his  ancestor  Lucius 
Junius  Brutus,  the  liberator10  of  Rome  from  the 
tyranny  of  the  Tarquins.  They  now  resolved11  to 
assassinate9  the  Dictator  in  the  Senate-house  on  the 
Ides  of  March.  Rumors  of  the  plot  got  abroad,  and 
Caesar  was  strongly  urged  not  to  attend  the  session  of 

1  posse>  impersonal.  2  in  ea  sollicitudine. 

3  uni  ex  cornicinibus.  4  Present  Subjunctive.  5  qua. 

6  Change  the  voice.    7  Impersonal.  8  ineunte  anno. 

9  «/,  with  imper.  subj.    10  Lit.  "who,"  &c.     "  I mpers.  passive. 


Verbs:  Infinitive  Constructions,  53 

the  Senate.     But  he  disregarded  the  warnings  which 
had  been  given  him. 

4.  The  ten  ambassadors,  of  whom  Cato  was  chief, 
offered  their  arbitration,  which  was  accepted  by  Masi- 
nissa,  but  rejected  by  the  Carthaginians,  who  had  no 
confidence  in  Roman  justice.  This  refusal  Cato  never 
forgave  them.  In  traversing  their  country,  he  had 
remarked  the  increasing  wealth  and  population. 
After  his  return  to  Rome,  he  let  fall  from  the  fold  of 
his  robe  some  early-ripe  Libyan  figs;  and  as1  their2 
beauty  was  admired,1  "Those  figs,"  quoth  he,  "  were 
gathered  three  days  ago  at  Carthage.  So  close  is  our 
enemy  to  our  walls."  From  that  time  forth,  whenever 
he  was  called  upon  for  his  vote  in  the  Senate,  though3 
the  subject  of  debate  bore  no  relation  to  Carthage,  he 
added  these  words,  "  Carthage  must  be  destroyed." 

1  Active  (cum,  with  imperf.  subj.).  8  Relative. 

8  quamquam,  with  imperf. 


Lesson  21. 

Verbs. —  3.  Infinitive  Constructions. 

i.  Learn  §§  270,  271  (uses  of  the  Infinitive)  ;  also 
288,  with  a,  b  (use  of  the  Present  and  Perfect  infini- 
tive). Learn  also  §§  272,  330,  336  (Accusative  and 
Infinitive). 

2.  The  English  infinitive  is  rendered  by  the  Latin 
infinitive  in  many  constructions  :  — 

a.   When  it  is  equivalent  to  an  abstract  noun  :  as, 
To  err  is  human,  humanum,  est  errare. 

Note.  —  An  abstract  noun  is  also  sometimes  equivalent  to  an 
infinitive,  and  is  to  be  rendered  in  the  same  way  in  Latin  :  as, 

1.  What  is  creation?     Quid  est  creare? 

2.  Writing  with  a  stile  is  easy,  est  facile  stilo  scribere. 


54  Latin   Composition. 

b.  When  a  second  action  of  the  same  subject  is  indicated  :  as, 

I  begin  to  grow  old,  senescere  incipio. 

Note.  —  This  principle  includes  many  classes  of  words  where 
the  connection  is  very  close  between  the  infinitive  and  the  verb  on 
which  it  depends  ;  and  also  many  where  it  is  more  remote,  so 
that  a  subjunctive  clause  might  also  be  used. 

3.  The  English  that  with  a  verb,  when  it  denotes 
a  statement  or  thought,  is  always  to  be  rendered  by 
an  Infinitive  with  an  Accusative  for  its  subject.  This 
construction  (called  the  Indirect  Discourse)  is  a  very 
common  one  in  Latin,  and  is  used  after  all  words 
of  knowing,  -perceiving,  thinking,  and  telling.  In 
English  we  often  use  the  infinitive  in  such  sentences 
as  the  preceding  :  as,  "  I  think  it  to  be  right;  "  "  He  is 
said  to  be  rich  ;  "  and  so  on. 

a,  The  English  simple  infinitive,  with  expressions  of  hoping, 
promising,  threatening,  and  the  like,  is  rendered  by  the  same 
construction,  of  the  infinitive  with  subject-accusative  :  as, 

I  hope  to  come,  spero  me  venturum  [esse], 

b,  The  English  infinitive  may  be  used  after  any  verb  of  com- 
manding or  forbidding.  In  Latin  it  is  regularly  used  only  after 
jubeo  and  veto  (see  hereafter,  Lesson  28). 

c,  In  using  the  Indirect  Discourse  in  Latin,  observe  what  tense 
would  be  used  in  the  direct  discourse,  and  make  the  tense  of  the 
infinitive  correspond  to  that.     Thus  — 

1.  He  says  that  his  father  is  here,  dicit  patrem  adesse. 

2.  He  said  that  his  father  was  here,  dixit  patrem  adesse, 

3.  He  will  say  that  his  father  is  here,  dicet  patrem  adesse. 

In  all  these  three  cases  the  same  tense  is  used  in  Latin,  because 
the  same  tense  would  be  used  in  the  direct :  viz.  "  My  father  is 
here." 

4.  He  says  his  father  was  here,  dicit  patrem  adfuisse, 

5.  He  said  his  father  had  been  (or  -was  formerly)  here,  dixit 

patrem  adfuisse, 

6.  He    will    say   that    his    father   was   here,    dicet    patrem 

adfuisse. 


Verbs:   Infinitive  Constructions,  55 

These  three  cases  take  the  perfect  infinitive,  because  the  words 
jn  direct  discourse  would  be,  "  My  father  was  here." 

7.  He  says  that  his  father  will  be  here,  die  it  patrem  ad- 

futiirum  [esse]. 

8.  He  said  that   his    father  would   be   here,   dixit  patrem 

adfiituriim, 

9.  He  "will  say  that  his  father  will  be  here,  dicet  patrem 

adfuturum. 

In  these  cases,  the  words  in  direct  discourse  would  be,  "  My 
father  will  be  here."  (In  this  tense,  the  esse  is  usually  omitted.) 
In  like  manner,  with  verbs  of  promising,  expecting,  and  the  like  — 

10.  He    hopes    to    come    (direct,    "I    shall    come"),    sperat    se 

venturum, 

11.  He  hopes  that  you  are  well,  sperat  te  valere. 

12.  He  hopes  that  you  were  there,  sperat  te  adfuisse. 

13.  He    threatened   to    destroy    the    city,    minatus    est    se 

urban  deltturum. 

d.  When  the  verb  of  knowing,  &c,  is  in  the  Passive,  the 
impersonal  construction  is  more  common  in  English  ;  but  in  Latin 
the  personal  is  regular  with  the  simple  tenses,  the  impersonal  with 
the  compound  (see   §  330.  a)  :  as, 

1.  It  seems  to  me  that  you  are  wrong,  videris  mihi  errare, 

2.  It   was   reported   that   Caesar's   house  had   been  attacked, 

oppugnata  domus  Caesaris  nuntiabatur. 

3.  There  is  a  tradition  that  Homer  was  blind,  traditum  est 

Homerum  caecum  fuisse. 

4.  The  subject  of  the  Infinitive  is  regularly  in  the 
Accusative.  But  if  the  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  not 
expressed,  then  any  predicate  word  will  agree  with 
the  subject  of  the  main  clause  if  there  be  a  personal 
subject  (see  sec.    272,  with  Remarks)  :  as, 

1.  It  is  advantageous  to  be  honest,  utile  est  probum  esse* 

2.  I  am  anxious  to  be  merciful,  cupio  me  esse  clementem 

(or  cupio  esse  clemens), 

N.  B.  Never  translate  the  infinitive  of  Purpose  by  the  infinitive 
in  Latin  (see  hereafter,  Lesson  25). 


56  Latin  Composition. 

The  English  Infinitive  and  the  clause  with  that  are  also  often 
to  be  rendered  by  other  constructions  than  the  above  (for  which 
see  hereafter,  Lesson  28). 

Exercise  20. 

i.  "You,"  said  Scipio  yEmilianus,  "to  whom  Italy 
is  not  mother,  but  step-mother,  ought  to  keep  silence. 
Surely  you  do  not  think  that  I  shall  fear  those  let8loose 
whom  I  sent  in  chains  to  the  slave-market." 

2.  The  king  of  Syria,  Antiochus,  had  nearly  con- 
quered Egypt.  Popilius  Laena  ordered  him,  in  the 
name  of  the  Senate,  to  abandon  the  country.  Antio- 
chus wished  to  deliberate  ;  but  Popilius,  having  traced  l 
a  circle  l  about  the  king  with  a  staff  which  he  held 
in  his  hand,  "Before  2  leaving  this  circle,"  said  he, 
"  answer  the  Senate."  Antiochus  promised  to  obey, 
and  went  out  of  Egypt.  Popilius  then  divided  the 
kingdom  between  the  two  brothers  Philometor  and 
Physcon. 

3.  I  purpose3  to  write  the  history  of  a  memorable 
revolution  which  has  agitated  men  deeply,  and  which 
divides  them  even  to-day.  I  do  not  conceal  from  my- 
self the-difficulties-of-the-undertaking  ;4  for  passions 
which  it  was  thought  were  stifled  under  [the  influence 
of]  a  military  despotism  have  just  been  reawakened. 
Suddenly  men  overwhelmed  with  years  and  toil  have 
felt  revive5  in  them  resentments  which  seemed  to  be 
appeased,  and  have  communicated  them  to  us  their 
children  and  heirs.  But  if  we  have-to-maintain6  the 
same  cause,  we-have-not7   to  defend  their  conduct; 

1  Participle  passive,  ablative  absolute  (see  next  Lesson). 

2  ante  quam,  with  pres.  indie.       J  in  animo  habere. 

4  Lit.  "  how  difficult  are  (subj.)  those  things  which  I  undertake." 

6  Infinitive.  6  Part  in  dus,  agreeing  with  causa. 

7  nihil  opus  est.        8  Lit.  "  those  will  alarm  me." 


Verbs:  Participial  Constructions,  57 

and  we  can  separate  liberty  itself  from  those  who 
have  well  or  ill  served  it,  while  *  we  still  have  the 
advantage  of-having-heard2  and  watched  these  old 
men,  who,  filled  as-they-are 3  with  their  memories 
still  excited  by  their  impressions,  teach  us  to  under- 
stand them. 

4.  The  king  entered  the  ship  in  a  violent  storm, 
which  the  mariners  beholding-with-astonishment,4  at 
length  with  great  humility  gave  him  warning  of  the 
danger.  But  he  commanded  them  instantly  to  put 
off,  and  not  be  afraid,  for  he  had  never  in  his  life 
heard  that  any  king  was  drowned. 

1  cum,  with  subj.  *  quod,  with  indie.  3  quidem. 

4  admirari. 


Lesson  22. 

Verbs. —  4.  Participial  Constructions. 

i.  Learn  §§  289  to  292,  with  Remark  on  the  uses 
of  Participles.  Also,  §§293  and  a;  with  129  (Peri- 
phrastic Conjugations)  ;  294,  with  a,  b,  c;  and  255, 
with  a,  b  (Ablative  Absolute). 

2.  The  English  participle  is  often  expressed  not  by 
a  participle  in  Latin,  but  by  a  relative  clause,  or 
one  with  cum  or  dum  (see   §  290.  c)  :  as, 

1.  In  the  following  winter,  ea  quae  secuta  est  hieme. 

2.  Caesar,  seeing  this,  gave  the  signal  for  battle,  Caesar  cum 

hoc  vidisset  signum  iledit  proelii. 

3.  "While  humoring  the  young,  I  have  forgotten  that  I  am 

old,  dum  obsequor  adulescentibus,  me  senem  esse 
oblitus  sum, 

3.  On  the  other  hand,  almost  any  simple  modifying 
clause  can  be  rendered  in  Latin  in  a  participial  form. 
This  principle  includes,  among  others,  relative  clauses, 


58  Latin   Composition, 

and  those  introduced  by  when,  if,  because,  although, 
together  with  many  adverbial  phrases. 

a.  If  there  is  any  word  in  the  main  clause  to  which  the 
participle  can  be  attached  as  a  modifier,  it  usually  agrees  with  it. 
This  corresponds  to  the  English  use  of  participles,  except  that 
it  is  much  more  common. 

1.  Any  evil  is  easily   crushed  at  its  birth,   omne   malum 

nascens  facile  opprimitur. 

2.  The  enemy  slay  Valerius  while  fighting  bravely,  Valerium 

hostes  acerrime  pugnantem  occidunt. 

b.  If  there  is  no  word  to  which  the  paniciple  can  be  attached, 
the  participle  is  put  in  the  ablative,  with  some  word  in  agreement, 
which  serves  as  a  kind  of  Subject  (Ablative  Absolute  :  see  exam- 
ples in  "  Method,"  p.  121). 

c.  Even  what  in  English  seems  a  separate  clause  is  in  Latin 
often  crowded  into  the  main  clause  in  a  participial  form  :  as, 

1.  Our    men    followed     them     close  —  encumbered    as    they 

were  —  and  cut  them,  down,  quos  impeditos  nostri 
consecuti  occiderunt. 

2.  It  is  a  wretched  thing  to  fret  yourself  when  it  does  no 

good,  miserum  est  nihil  proficientem  angi. 

d.  The  perfect  active  participle,  which  is  missing  in  Latin,  is 
supplied  either  (1)  by  a  change  of  voice  with  the  Ablative  Abso- 
lute ;  or  (2)  by  a  clause  with  cum  or  dum.  The  difficulty  is, 
however,  often  avoided  by  the  use  of  Deponents,  whose  perfect 
participle  usually  has  an  active  signification.     Thus  — 

1.  Having  delayed   a  little,  and  set  fire  to   all   the  villages, 

they  pushed  forward,  paulisper  morati,  omnibus 
vicis  incensis,  contenderunt. 

2.  Having  observed   this,  he  sent  the  third  line   as   a  relief 

to  our  men  who  were  in  difficulty,  id  cum  anim- 
advertisset,  tertiam  aciem  laborantibus  nostris 
subsidio  misit, 

,  Exercise  21. 

i.  Veii  was  not  succored  by  the  other  Etruscan 
cities  then  threatened  with  an  invasion  of  the  Gauls. 
Besides,   the  Veians   had   given   themselves   a   king 


Verbs:  Participial  Constructions.  59 

instead  of  the  annual  magistrate,  and  a  king  odious 
to  the  other  cities.  This  lucumo,  irritated  at1  not 
having  been  named  chief  of  the  confederation,  had 
stirred  up  the  artisans,  and  violently  interrupted  the 
sacred  games  of  Volsinii.  On  leaving  for  the  siege 
of  Veii,  the  Roman  knights  swore  never  to  return, 
unless  [they  were]  conquerors.  This  was  also  the  vow 
of  the  Spartans  on  leaving  for  Ithome.  On 2  the 
approach  of  the  Roman  army,  the  Veians  left  their 
city,  clothed  in  funeral  apparel,  and  bearing  lighted 
torches.  The  city  was  taken  by  a  mine.  The 
besiegers,  [who  were]  concealed  in  it3  near  the  temple 
of  Juno,  overheard  the  reply  of  an  oracle,  which  the 
Etruscans  had  consulted.  "  Victory,"  said  the  priest, 
"shall  be  with4  him  who  shall  sacrifice  this  heifer  on 
the  altar."  Then  the  Roman  soldiers  burst  into  the 
temple,  seized  the  axe  from  the  priest's  hand,  and 
struck  down  the  heifer ;  and  the  town,  thus  betrayed 
by  its  own  gods,  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  Romans. 

2.  The  deputation  arrived  at  Epidaurus  the  pecu- 
liar seat  of  ^Esculapius,  and  invited  the  god  to  make 
his  abode  at  Rome.  Nor  did  he  refuse ;  for  one  of 
the  snakes  sacred  to  ^Esculapius  crawled  from  his 
temple  to  the  city  of  Epidaurus,  and  thence  proceeded 
to  the  sea-shore,  and  climbed  up  into  the  ship  of  the 
Roman  ambassadors  [which  was]  drawn  up  on  the 
beach.  They  now,  instructed  by  the  Epidaurians 
that  the  god  willingly  accompanied  them,  sailed  away 
with  the  sacred  snake  to  Italy.  But  when  5  the  ship 
stopped5  at  Antium  —  so  goes  the  story  —  the  snake 
left6   [it  and]   crawled  to  the  temple  of  -^Esculapius 

1  Accusative  with  Infinitive.  2  Ablative.  3  Relative. 

4  Dative.      5  Lit.  "  the  ship  (ace.)  stopping."      *  Participle. 


60  Latin  Composition. 

in  that  city  ;  where  he  coiled  himself  round  a  tall  palm- 
tree,  and  remained  for  three  days.  The  Romans 
meanwhile  anxiously  awaited  his  return  to  the  ship. 
At  last  he  went }  back  [and]  did  not  move  again  till  the 
ship  entered  the  Tiber.  Then,  when  she  came2  to 
Rome,  he  again  crawled  forth,  swam  to  the  island  in 
the  middle  of  the  Tiber,  and  there  went  on  shore  and 
remained  quiet.  A  temple  was  built,  therefore,  to  the 
god  on  the  spot  which  he  had  himself  chosen. 

1  Participle.  2  Pluperf.  subj.  (impers.). 

Lesson  23. 

Verbs.  —  5.  Gerundive  Constructions. 

i.  Learn  §  114.  a,  with  §§  295-301  (uses  of  the 
Gerund  and  Gerundive). 

2.  The  English  participial  noun,  or  verbal  in  -ing, 
is  represented  in  Latin  in  several  different  ways. 

a.  When  it  is  subject  or  object,  by  the  Infinitive  (see  Lesson 
21),  or  quod  with  the  Indicative  ;  rarely  by  a  verbal  noun  :  as, 

1.  Your  being  here  is  agreeable,  quod  acles  (or  te  adesse) 

gratum,  est. 

2.  I    prefer    writing    to    speaking,    malo    scribere    qiiam 

loqui, 

b.  In  the  other  cases,  most  commonly  by  the  Gerund  or 
Gerundive ;  less  commonly  by  an  Adverbial  or  Substantive 
Clause   (see  Lessons  25,  27)  :  as, 

1.  The  labor  of  writing  is  irksome,  labor  scribendi  moles- 

turn  est. 

2.  A  plan  was   formed   for  firing  the  city,  consilium  in- 

flammandae  urbis    initum   est. 

3.  I  dissuaded  him  from  going,  ne  iret  dissuasi. 

Note.  —  The  Gerund  and  Gerundive  are  precisely  equivalent  in 
meaning.  But  the  Gerundive,  being  in  its  origin  a  passive  con- 
struction, can  be  used  only  of  verbs  which  govern  the  accusative 
(except  utor,  &c).  When  it  can  be  used,  it  is  generally  to  be 
preferred. 


Verbs:   Gerundive   Constructions,  61 

c.  The  phrase  "  without  doing  any  thing,"  or  the  like,  has  no 
corresponding  expression  in  Latin  ;  but  must  be  analyzed  and 
rendered  by  some  other  form  of  words,  chiefly  a  participle  or  the 
ablative  absolute  :  as, 

i.   Without  accomplishing  his  purpose,  re  infecta. 

2.  Without  being  compelled,  non  coactus, 

3.  He  -went  away  -without  doing  this,  abiit  neque  hoc  fecit. 

4.  You  shall  not  go  without  doing  this,   non   abibis  nisi 

hoc  feceris. 

5.  I  trod  on  a  snake  without  knowing  it,  anguem  calcavi 

insciens  (or  inscienter). 

d.  Purpose  is  often  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  accusative  of 
the  Gerund  or  Gerundive  with  ad,  or  by  the  Genitive  followed  by 
causa  or  gratia  (see  hereafter,  Lesson  26,  and  examples,  Gram- 
mar, §  318). 

Exercise  32. 

i.  When  polished  nations  have  obtained  the  glory 
of  victory,  or  have  enriched  themselves  by  the  addi- 
tion-of l  territory,  they  may2  end  the  war  with  honor. 
But  savages  are  not  satisfied  until  they  extirpate  3  the 
community  which  is  the  object  of  their  rage.  They 
fight  not  to  4  conquer,  but  to  4  destroy.  If  they  engage 
in  hostilities,  it  is  with  a  resolution  never  to-see 5  the 
face  of  the  enemy  in  peace,  but  to  prosecute  the  war 
with  immortal  enmity.  The  desire  of  vengeance  [is] 
the  first  and  almost  the  only  [principle  which]  a 
savage  instils  into  the  minds  of  [his]   children. 

2.  Cato's  opinion  prevailed,  and  the  Senate  only 
waited  for  a  favorable  opportunity  to-destroy  5  the  city. 
The  Romans  had  resolved  on  war;6 and  when  the 
Carthaginian  ambassadors  arrived  at  Rome,  to4  offer 
to  the  Senate  the  submission  of  Carthage,  the  two 
consuls  were  already  levying  troops.     The  ambassa- 

1  Gerundive.  *  licet.        3  Perfect.        4  ad,  with  gerund. 

5  Gen.  of  gerund.  6  bello  decertare  statuerant. 


62  Latin   Composition. 

dors,  knowing  that  resistance  was  hopeless,  sought l  to 
appease  the  anger  of  the  Senate  by  unconditional  obe- 
dience. They  were  ordered  to  send  three  hundred  of 
the  noblest  families  to  [meet]  the  consuls  at  Lilybseum, 
and  were  told  that  the  consuls  would  inform  them  of 
the  further  orders  of  the  Senate. 

3.  Sulla,  [when]  quaestor  in  the  war  against-Jugur- 
tha,2  by  his  zeal  and  energy  soon  gained  the  full 
approval  of  [his]  commander.  He  was  equally  suc- 
cessful in  gaining  the  affections  of  the  soldiers.  He 
always  addressed  them  with  the  greatest  kindness, 
seized  every  opportunity  of  conferring  favors  upon 
them,  was  ever  ready  to3  take-part-in  all  the  jests  of 
the  camp,  and  [at  the  same  time]  never  shrank  from 
sharing  in  all  their  labors  and  dangers.  It  is  a 
curious  circumstance  that  Marius  gave  to  his  future 
enemy  and  the  destroyer  of  his  family  and  party  the 
first  opportunity  of  distinguishing  himself.  The  ene- 
mies of  Marius  claimed  for  Sulla  the  glory  of  the 
betrayal-of4  Jugurtha ;  and  Sulla  himself  took  the 
credit  of  it  by  always  wearing  a  signet  ring  represent- 
ing 5  the  [scene  of  the]  surrender. 

1  conor.  *  Adjective.  3  ad,  with  gerundive. 

4  Perf.  part.  *  Lit.  "  on  which  was  represented." 


Lesson  24. 

Verbs. —6.  Subjunctive  Constructions. 

i.  Learn  §§  265,  with  a,  b;  266-268  (uses  of  the 
Subjunctive)  ;  and  269,  with  a  (Imperative  Construc- 
tions). 

2.  The  Subjunctive  mood  in  Latin  is  used  to  repre- 
sent a  great  variety  of  constructions  in  English,  most 


Verbs:   Subjunctive  Constructions,  63 

of  which  are  included  in  the  dependent  clauses,  to  be 
given  in  future  Lessons.  The  others  are  the  follow- 
ing : — 

a,  The  rare  Subjunctive  in  English  is  for  the  most  part 
rendered  by  the  subjunctive  in  Latin  (but  compare  special  con- 
structions in  future  Lessons).     Thus  — 

1.  Let  him  that  standeth  take  heed  lest  he  fall,  caveat  qui 

stat  tie  cadat. 

2.  I  care  not,  so  it  serve  the  state,  nil  mea  refert  dum- 

modo  ret  publicae  prosit. 

3.  "What  would  Cicero  say  if  he  were  alive?     Quid  diceret 

Cicero  si  viveret? 

b.  The  auxiliaries  which  form  the  English  Potential  —  may, 
might,  could,  would,  should — are  very  loose  in  their  use  and 
meaning,  being  sometimes  pure  auxiliaries,  and  sometimes  retain- 
ing their  proper  force.  In  the  former  case  they  are  generally 
rendered  by  the  subjunctive  in  Latin  ;  in  the  latter,  they  require 
some  verb  of  similar  meaning.     Thus  — 

1.  You  may  say  (it  is  possible  you  should  say),  dicas. 

2.  You  may  say  (you  are  permitted  to  say),  licet  dicer e. 

3.  He  would  go  if  I  should  wish  it,  eat  si  velim. 

4.  He  would  go  (now)  if  I  wished  it.  iret  si  vellem. 

5.  You  would  have  it  so,  sic  voluistu 
.  6.   I  should  like  to  go,  ire  velim. 

7.  I  could  wish  he  were  here,  vellem  adesset. 

8.  A  soldier  should  obey  his  commander,  miles  imperatori 

parere  debet. 

9.  Whoever  could  go  went,  qnicumqiie  ire  poterat  ivit. 

10.  What  could  I  do  (what  was  I  to  do)  ?     Quid  facer  em  ? 

11.  I  wish  he  would  come,  utinam  veniat. 

12.  Would  he  were  now  here!  O  si  nunc  adesset  I 

c»  The  English  Imperative  —  except  commands  in  the  second 
person  —  is  regularly  rendered  by  the  Latin  subjunctive.  Com- 
mands addressed  to  a  definite  person  take  the  imperative  in  Latin  ; 
prohibitions  to  a  definite  person,  1.  noli,  with  the  infinitive  ;  2. 
cave,  with  the  present  subjunctive  ;  3.  ne,  with  the  perfect  sub- 
junctive.    Thus  — 


64  Latin   Composition* 


1.  Let  us  go,  eamus. 

2.  Well,  be  it  so,  fiat  sane. 

3.  Let  justice  be  done  though  the  heavens  fall,  fiat  justitia 

ruat  caelum. 

4.  Leap  down,  fellow-soldiers,  desilite,  commilitones. 

5.  Do  not  suppose,  nolite  putare. 

6.  Pardon  nothing,   do   nothing   by  favor,  be  not  moved  by- 

compassion,   nihil    irjnoveris,    nihil    gratiae    causa 
feceris,  misericordia  commotus  ne  sis. 

d.  General  precepts,  both  affirmative  and  negative,  are  regularly 
expressed  by  the  second  person  of  the  present  subjunctive,  less 
commonly  the  perfect. 

e.  There  are  many  idiomatic  constructions  —  more  especially 
clauses  of  Result  and  clauses  in  Indirect  Discourse  —  which  in 
Latin  require  the  subjunctive,  though  they  have  no  modal  form 
in  English.  (For  these  constructions,  see  hereafter,  especially 
Lessons  26  and  28.) 

Exercise  23. 

i.  "  Let  him  go  then,"  they  said,  "where  he  pleases 
as  an  exile,  and  suffer  in  some  other  place  whatever 
fate  has  reserved  for  him  ;  and  let  us  pray  that  the 
gods  visit  us  not  with  their  anger,  for  rejecting  Marius 
from  our  city  in  poverty  and  rags."  Moved  by  such 
considerations,  all  in  a  body  entered  the  room  where 
Marius  was,  and  getting  round  him,  began  to  conduct 
him  to  the  sea. 

2.  "Why,"  said  Rasselas,  "  should  you  envy  others 
so  great  an  advantage?  All  skill  ought  to  be  exerted 
for  universal  good.  Every  man  has  owed  much  to 
others,  and  ought  to  repay  the  kindness  that  he  has 
received." 

3.  Sweet  language  will  multiply  friends,  and  a  fair- 
speaking  tongue  will  increase  kind  greetings.  Be  in 
peace  with  many  ;  nevertheless  have  but  one  counsellor 
of  a  thousand.     If  thou  wouldest l  get  a  friend,  prove 

1  volo. 


Verbs:  Subjunctive   Constructions.  65 

him  first,  and1  be  not 1  hasty  2  to  credit  him.  For  some  3 
man  is  a  friend  for4  his  own  occasion,4  and5  will  not5 
abide  in  the  day  of  thy  trouble. 

4.  My  lords,6  if  you  must  fall  may  you  so  fall.  But 
if  you  stand  —  and  stand  I  trust  you  will  —  together 
with  the  fortunes  of  this  ancient  monarchy,  —  together 
with  the  ancient  laws  and  liberties  of  this  great  and 
illustrious  kingdom,  —  may  you  stand  as  unimpeached 
in  honor  as  in  power.  May  you  stand  the  refuge 
of  afflicted  nations  !  May  you  stand  a  sacred  temple 
for  the  perpetual  residence  of  an  inviolable  justice  ! 

5.  Believe  me,  Athenians!  if,  recovering  from  this 
lethargy,  you  would7  assume  the  ancient  spirit  and 
freedom  of  your  fathers,  the  world  might7  once  more 
behold  you  playing  a  part  worthy  of  Athenians  !  May 
the  gods  inspire  you  to  determine  upon  such  measures  ! 

6.  Lay  hold  on  this  chance  of  safety,  Conscript 
Fathers  !  by  the  immortal  gods  I  conjure  you.  Give 
one  sign  to  the  Roman  people,  that  even  as  now  they 
pledge  their  valor,  so  you  pledge  your  wisdom  to  the 
crisis  of  the  state.  Do  you  not  know  this  Antony? 
Do  you  not  know  his  companions?  To  be  slaves  to 
such  as  he,  to  such  as  they,  would  it  not  be  the  fullest 
measure  of  misery,  joined  with  the  fullest  measure  of 
disgrace?  If  it  be  so  —  which  heaven  forfend  !  — 
that8  the  supreme  hour  of  the  republic  has  come,  let 
us,  the  rulers  of  the  world,  rather  fall  with  honor  than 
serve  with  infamy  !  Born  to  glory  and  to  liberty,  let 
us  hold  these  bright  distinctions  fast,  or  let  us  greatly 
die!     • 


neve.  2  Adverb.         8  quispiam.  4  tcmporis  causa, 

nee.     6  P aires  ConscriptL     7  Pres.  subj.     *  ut,  with  subj. 

5 


66  Latin   Composition, 


Lesson  25. 

Relations   of    Time. 

i.  Learn  §§  322-324;  325,  with  b;  326-328  (use 
of  Temporal  Particles)  ;  283-286,  with  Remark  (Se- 
quence of  Tenses). 

Remark.  —  Whenever  it  becomes  necessary  to  use  the 
Subjunctive  mood  in  a  subordinate  clause  —  as  in  this  and 
the  following  Lessons  —  careful  attention  must  be  paid  to 
the  rule  for  the  Sequence  of  Tenses.  The  learner  must 
notice  carefully  which  is  the  maifi  clause,  i.  e.,  what  is  the  main 
fact  to  be  stated.  This  is  often  disguised  in  English  by  one 
or  more  modifying  clauses ;  especially  Relative  (who, 
which),  Temporal  (when),  and  Conditional  (if).  Upon 
the  time  of  the  main  clause  will  depend  the  time  of  the 
whole.  Sometimes,  however,  an  intervening  dependent  verb 
may  throw  the  time  back  so  as  to  require  secondary  tenses 
in  those  which  follow,  though  the  leading  verb  is  primary. 
Thus — 

1.  Cicero  is  said  to  have  gone    into   exile  to    prevent   civil 

war,  Cicero  ex  patria  excessisse  dicitur  ut  helium 
civile  averteret. 

2.  We  seem  to  have  advanced  so  far  that  even  in  fulness  of 

words  we  are  not  surpassed  by  the  Greeks,  tantum 
profecisse  videmur  ut  a  Graecis  tie  verborum 
quidem,   copia  vinceremur. 

2.  The  English  particle  when  and  similar  expres- 
sions of  time  are  rendered  in  Latin  by  two  different 
constructions  :  —  a.  ubi,  postquam,  and  similar  parti- 
cles (see  324)  with  the  Indicative,  usually  the  perfect ; 
b.  cum,  generally  with  the  Indicative  of  the  present 
or  perfect,  and  with  the  Subjunctive  of  the  imperfect 
or  pluperfect  (325  :  see  examples  in  Grammar). 


Relations  of  Time.  67 

Remark.  —  The  distinction  between  these  two  constructions 
is  not  at  first  obvious  ;  but  will  become  clearer  by  considering  the 
distinction  of  Absolute  and  Relative  time  (see  Note  on  page  234 
of  the  Grammar),  and  by  careful  observation  of  the  practice  of 
Latin  writers. 

a.  If  when  is  equivalent  to  whenever,  the  Indicative  is 
always  to  be  used  :  as, 

When  midsummer  had  begun,  he  used  to  make  his  quarters 
at  Syracuse,  cum  aestas  summa  esse  jam  coeperat, 
Syracusis  stativa  faciebat, 

b.  The  common  English  form  of  narrative,  "  Such  and  such 
things  had  happened  (were  happening),  when,"  &c,  is  always  to 
be  rendered  with  the  Indicative  in  Latin  —  usually  with  cum:  as, 

1.  This  he  had  said  when  news  was  brought,  dixerat  hoc 

cum  nuntiatum  est, 

2.  I   was  just  reading   your   letters,  when   one  was   brought 

me,   legebam   tuas    epistolas,   cum    mihi    epistola 
adfertur, 

c.  If  when  or  while  approaches  in  meaning  to  since  (as  it 
often  does  in  fact),  it  is  expressed  by  cum  with  the  subjunctive  ; 
sometimes  by  other  constructions  (see  Lesson  22)  :  as, 

But  if  you  do  not  yet  quite  see  —  when  the  thing  itself 
is  plain  by  so  many  clear  proofs  and  tokens,  quod 
si  nondum  satis  cernitis  —  cum  res  ipsa  tot  tarn 
Claris  argumentis  signisque  luceat. 

Exercise  584. 

i.  Hamilcar  had  poured  the  libation  on  the  victim, 
which  was  duly  offered  on  the  altar ;  when  on-a-sud- 
den  he  desired1  all  the  others  to3 step  aside  to  a  little 
distance,  [and  then]  called  his  son  Hannibal.  Hanni- 
bal, a  boy  of  nine  years  old,  went  up  to  his  father, 
and  Hamilcar  asked  him  kindly  whether2  he  would 
like2  to  go  with  him  to  the  war.  When  the  boy 
eagerly  caught  at  the  offer  and  with  a  child's  earnest- 
ness implored  his  father  to3  take  him,  Hamilcar  took 

1  Participle.  2  velletne.  3  tit,  with  subj. 


68  Latin   Composition. 

him  by  the  hand  and  led  him  up  to  the  altar;  and 
bade  him,  if  he  wished1  to  follow  his  father,  to  lay 
his  hand  on  the  altar,  and  swear  that  he  would  never 
be  the  friend  of  the  Romans.  Hannibal  swore,  and 
never  to  his  latest  hour  forgot  his  vow. 

2.  When2  Archias  came  to  the  door  of  the  temple 
with  his  satellites,  he  found  Demosthenes  seated.  He 
first  addressed  him  in  [language  of  ]  friendly  persuasion, 
and  offered  to  intercede  with  Antipater  in  his  behalf. 
Demosthenes,  having  listened  for-a-time  in  silence  to 
his  bland  professions,  at  length  replied,  K  Archias,  you 
never  won  me  by  your  acting,  nor  will  you  now  by 
your  promises."  When  the  player  found  that  he  was 
detected,  he  threw  away  the  mask  and  threatened 
in  earnest.  "Now,"3  said  Demosthenes,  "you  speak 
from  the  Macedonian  tripod :  before  you  were  only 
acting.  Wait  a  little  till  I  have  written  4  a  letter  to  my 
friends  at  home."  And  he  took  a  roll  as  if  to  write  ; 
and,  as  was  his  wont  when  he  was  engaged  in  com- 
position, put  the  end  of  the  reed  to  his  mouth,  and  bit 
it ;  he  then  covered  his  head  with  his  robe  and  bowed 
his  head. 

3.  When  he  had  remained  some  time  in  this  atti- 
tude, the  barbarians,  thinking  that  he  was  lingering 
through  fear,  began  to  taunt  him  with  cowardice ;  and 
Archias,  going  up,  urged5  him  to  rise,  and  repeated 
his  offers  of  mediation.  Demosthenes  now6  felt  the 
poison  in  his  veins :  he  uncovered  his  face,  and  fixing 
his  eyes  on  the  dissembler  said,  "  It  is  time  for  you, 
Archias,  to  finish  the  part  of  Creon,  and  cast  my  body 
to   the    dogs.     I    quit  thy  sanctuary,   Poseidon,   still 

1  si  vellet.  2  ubi.  3  nunc.  4  Future  perfect. 

5  peter e  ab  eo  ut.  6  jam. 


Purpose  and  Result,  69 

breathing ;  though  2  Antipater  and  the  Macedonians 
have  not  spared  even  this  from  pollution. "  So  say- 
ing, he  moved  with-faltering-step  towards  the  door; 
but  had  scarcely  passed  the  altar,  when  he  fell  with 
a  groan,  and  breathed  his  last. 

1  cum,  with  subj. 


Lesson  26. 

Purpose   and   Result. 

i.  Read  carefully  the  Introductory  Note  on  p.  227. 

Remark.  —  a.  In  general,  Relative  or  other  subordinate 
clauses  are  used  in  Latin  nearly  as  in  English.  But  in  Latin 
the  Subjunctive  mood  is  used  in  many  such  clauses,  where 
English  uses  the  Indicative.  It  will  be  seen,  therefore,  that  not 
every  relative  or  other  subordinate  clause  is  to  be  translated 
by  the  Latin  subjunctive ;  nor,  on  the  other  hand,  is  every 
English  indicative  in  such  clauses  to  be  rendered  by  the 
indicative.  The  learner  must,  accordingly,  accustom  himself 
to  notice  the  true  (logical)  relation  between  the  subordinate 
and  the  main  clause ;  and  express  the  former  according  to  the 
Latin  idiom,  which  will  appear  in  the  subsequent  Lessons. 

b.  When  a  relative  clause  (including  those  introduced  by 
relative  adverbs  and  conjunctions)  simply  states  a  fact  or 
circumstance  which  might  be  put  as  an  independent  statemefit, 
there  is  no  occasion  for  the  subjunctive  in  Latin.  But  in 
most  cases,  where  there  is  a  logical  relation  between  the  two 
clauses,  so  that  the  force  of  the  relative  clause  would  be  lost  by 
taking  it  out  of  its  connection  with  the  former,  the  subjunc- 
tive is  required  in  Latin. 

N.  B.  Clauses  expressing  cause  —  introduced  in  English  by 
because,  since,  inasmuch  as  —  take  the  subjunctive  only  in  special 
idiomatic  uses  (see  §  321). 


70  Latin   Composition. 

c.  The  most  common  uses  of  the  subjunctive  in  clauses  of 
the  kind  above  referred  to  are  to  express  purpose  —  in  order 
that,  that,  to,  in  order  to,  and  the  like  ;  or  result  —  so  that, 
that,  so  as  to. 

2.  Learn  §  317  with  318  (clauses  of  Purpose)  ; 
§  319  with  a'>  b  (clauses  of  Result)  ;  320  and  a,  e,f 
(clauses  of  Characteristic). 

3.  In  English,  relations  of  purpose  and  result  are 
often  expressed  by  the  Infinitive,  which  must  never  be 
used  in  this  way  in  Latin. 

a.  The  most  general  way  of  expressing  Purpose  is  by  ut 
(negatively  ne),  unless  the  purpose  is  closely  connected  with  some 
o?ie  word,  in  which  case  the  relative  is  more  common.     Thus  — 

1.  Arria  gave   her   husband  a  sword  in  order  that  he  might 

kill    himself,   Arria    gladium    dedit    tnarito  ut    se 
interficeret. 

2.  Arria    gave    her   husband    a   sword    to   kill   himself  with, 

Arria  gladium  dedit  marito  quo  se  interficeret, 

b.  The  Gerundive  constructions  of  Purpose  are  usually  limited 
to  short  concise  expressions,  where  the  literal  translation  of  the 
phrase,  though  not  the  English  idiom,  is  nevertheless  not  harsh 
or  strange. 

c.  The  Supine  in  this  construction  is  used  only  with  verbs  of 
motion  and  a  few  idiomatic  expressions  (see  §  302).  The  Future 
Participle  of  Purpose  should  be  avoided. 

d.  A  kind  of  purpose  is  expressed  idiomatically  by  the  Gerun- 
dive used  passively  after  particular  verbs  (see  §  294.  d). 

e.  In  the  greater  number  of  cases  Result  is  expressed  by  ut 
(negatively  ut  non),  the  relative  being  less  common  (compare 
examples  in  §  319). 

/.  The  use  of  the  Subjunctive  in  clauses  of  Characteristic 
(see  §  320)  can  only  be  learned  by  practice  and  comparison  of 
examples.  But  compare  what  is  said  above  of  Relative  clauses  in 
general. 

g.  Expressions  such  as  "  He  is  too  honest  to  deceive,"  "  It  is 
too  distant  to  be  seen,"  and  the  like,  which  are  very  common  in 


Purpose  and  Result,  71 

English,  are  in  Latin  to  be  rendered  by  a  clause  of  Result  with 
quam  ut  following  a  Comparative:  as, 

Caesar  was  too  merciful  to  punish  his  adversaries,  clemen- 
tior  erat  Caesar  quam,  ut  inimicos  puniret, 

Exercise  25. 

i.  On  the  reedy  margin  of  the  lake  stood  here  and 
there  some  monuments  ;  tombs,  it  was  said,1  of  ancient 
Assyrian  kings.  As  the  royal  galley,  which  Alex- 
ander steered  himself,  passed  near  one  of  them,2  a 
sudden  gust  of  wind  carried  away  his  cap  into  the 
water,  and  lodged7  the  light  diadem  which  circled  it 
on  one  of  the  reeds  which  grew  out  of  the  tomb.  One 
of  the  soldiers  immediately  swam  out  to  recover  it;2 
and,  to  keep  it  dry,  placed  it  on  his  own  head.  Alex- 
ander rewarded  him  with  a  talent ;  but  at  the  same  time 
ordered  him  to  be  flogged  for  the  thoughtlessness  with 
which  he  had  assumed3  the  ensign  of  royalty.  The 
diviners,  it  is  said,  took  the  matter  more  seriously,  and 
advised  the  king  to4  inflict  death  on  the  offender,5 in 
order  to  avert  the  omen. 

2.  Socrates  recommends  to  Alcibiades,  in  order 
that  he  might  have  a  model  for  his  devotions,  a  short 
prayer  which  a  Greek  poet  composed  for  the  use  of 
his  friend  in-the-following-words  :  6  "  O  Jupiter  !  give 
us  those  things  which  are  good  for  us,  whether  they 
are  such  things  as  we  pray  for  or  such  things  as  we 
do  not  pray  for ;  and  remove  from  us  those  things 
which  are  hurtful,  though  they  are  such  things  as  we 
pray  for." 

3.  Polybius  also  learned  the  Roman  tongue,  and 
attained  to  that  knowledge  of  their  laws,  their  rights, 
their  customs  and  antiquities,  that  few  of  their  own 

1  dicebatit.  2  Relative.  3  Subjunctive. 

4  ut,  with  subj.      6  homo.  6  ita,     7  demitto* 


72  Latin   Composition, 

citizens  understood  them  better.  So  that  he  taught 
the  noblemen  of  Rome  their  own  municipal  laws  ;  and 
was  accounted  more  skilful  in  them  than  Fabius 
Pictor,  a  man  of  the  senatorial  order,  who  wrote  the 
transactions  of  the  Punic  wars.  He  who  neglected 
none  of  the  laws  of  history  was  so  careful  of  truth 
that  he  made  it  his  whole  business  to  deliver  nothing 
to  posterity  which  might  deceive  them  ;  and  by  that 
diligence  and  exactness  may  be  known  to  be  studious 
of  truth  and  a  lover  of  it. 

4.  The  Pompeians  were  too  much  dispirited  to 
make  any  resistance.  Shivered  once  more  at  the 
first  onset,  they  poured  in  broken  masses  over  hill  and 
plain.  But  Caesar  was  not  yet  satisfied.  Allowing 
a  part  of  his  troops  only  to  return  to  the  camp,  he  led 
four  legions  in  hot  pursuit  by  a  shorter  and  better 
road,  and  drew  them  up  at  a  distance  of  six  miles 
from  the  field  of  battle. 

1  qua  diligentia  ac  cura. 

Lesson  27. 

Conditional   Sentences. 

Read  carefully  pages  214-226,   including   all   the 

sub-sections,  and  committing  to  memory  the  types  of 

conditional  expressions  on  pages  216,  217. 

a.  The  learner  should  notice  carefully  the  precise  nature  of  the 
condition  which  he  wishes  to  render  into  Latin,  because  the  use  of 
the  tenses  in  English  is  not  uniform.  Thus,  — "  If  he  is  alive 
now"  is  a  present  condition,  to  be  expressed  in  Latin  by  the 
Present  Indicative  ;  "  If  he  is  alive  next  year  "  is  a  future  condi- 
tion, and  would  be  expressed  by  the  Future  Indicative.  "If  he 
were  here  now  "  is  a  present  condition  contrary  to  fact,  and  would 
be  expressed  by  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  ;  "  If  he  were  to  see 
me  thus  "  is  a  future  condition,  to  be  expressed  by  the  Present 
Subjunctive. 


Conditional  Sentences.  73 

b.  In  cases  where  the  Condition  is  omitted,  it  must  be  mentally 
supplied  in  order  to  determine  the  form  of  the  condition. 

c.  The  conditional  phrases  of  Comparison,  as  if,  as  though, 
require  in  Latin  the  present  and  perfect  subjunctive,  not  the  im- 
perfect and  pluperfect,  as  in  English  (see  Remark  under  §  312). 

d.  For  the  Concessive  expressions,  although,  granting  that, 
even  if,  which  require  idiomatic  constructions  in  Latin,  see  §  313. 
For  Provisos — provided  that,  only  let,  &c.  —  see  §  314- 

Exercise  26. 

1.  Among  the  savages,  to  display  undaunted  forti- 
tude in  torments  is  the  noblest  triumph  of  a  warrior. 
To  avoid  the  trial  by  a  voluntary  death  is  deemed 
infamous  and  cowardly.  If  any  one  betrays  symptoms 
of  timidity,  they  often  despatch  him  at  once  with  con- 
tempt, as  unworthy  of-being-treated  1  like  a  man. 

2.  If  we  see  a  friend  in  distress,  and  give  him  all 
the  consolation  we  are  able,  we  perform  the  duties  of 
friendship,  which  pays  more  attention  to  the  disposi- 
tion of  the  heart  than  to  the  value  of  the  gift.  A 
small  present  may  be  the  testimony  of  a  great  love. 
There  is  no  good  I  do  not  wish  you,  and  this  is  all  I 
can  offer  toward  it.  I  wish  this  little  treatise  may  be 
of  use  to  you.  If  it  should  not  answer  my  hopes, 
I  shall,  however,  be  secure  of  pardon  from  your 
friendship. 

3.  I  am  come  to  inform2  you  of  a  secret  you  must 
impart  to  Pausanias  alone.  From  remote  antiquity,  I 
am  of  Grecian  lineage.  I  am  solicitous  for  the  safety 
of  Greece.  Long  since,  but  for  the  auguries,  would 
Mardonius  have  given  battle.  Regarding  these  no 
longer,  he  will  attack  you  early  in  the  morning.  Be 
prepared.  If  he  change  his  purpose,  remain  as  you 
are.     He   has  provisions  only  for  a  few  days  more. 

1  See  §  320.  /.  *  See  §  287.  a. 


74  Latin  Composition. 

Should  the  event  of  the  war  prove  favorable,  you  will 
but  deem  it  fitting  to  make  some  effort  for  the  inde- 
pendence of  one  who  exposes  himself  to  so  great 
.peril  for  the  purpose  of  apprising  you  of  the  intentions 
of  the  foe.     I  am  Alexander  of  Macedon. 

4.  After  a  short  interval,  Charles,  turning  to  Philip, 
who  stood  awaiting  his  commands,  thus  addressed 
him  :  "  If  the  vast  possessions  which  are  now  bestowed 
on  you  had  come  by  inheritance,  there  would  be 
abundant  cause  for  gratitude.  How  much  more, 
when  they  come  as  a  free  gift  in  the  life-time  of  your 
father!  But  however  large  the  debt,1 1  shall  consider 
it  all  repaid  if  you  only  discharge  your  duty  to  your 
subjects.  So  rule  over  them  that  men  shall  commend 
and  not  censure  me  for  the  part  I  am  now  acting." 

5.  We  are  here  as  in  a  theatre,  where  every  one 
has  a  part  allotted  to  him.  The  great  duty  which  lies 
upon  a  man  is  to  act  his  part  in  perfection.  We  may2 
indeed  say  that  our  part  does  not  suit  us,  and  that  we 
could  act  another  better.  But  this  is  not  our  business. 
All  that  we  are  concerned  in  is  to  excel  in  the3part 
which  is  given  us.  If  it  be  an  improper  one,  the 
fault  is  not  in  us,  but  in  Him  who  has  cast  our  several 
parts,  and  is  the  great  disposer  of  the  drama. 

1  beneficium.  2  posswnus.  8  Plural. 


Lesson  28. 

Substantive    Clauses. 

i.  Read  carefully  §§  329,  with  Note;  330,  331, 
with  a,  b,  c,  d,  e,f  (substantive  clauses  of  Purpose)  ; 
332,  with  a,  b,  c,  d,  g,  h  (clauses  of  Result)  ;  333,  and 


Substantive  Clauses.  75 

b  (clauses  with  quod).  Compare  §§  270,  271,  and 
notice  the  general  schedule  of  substantive  clauses  on 
page  239. 

2.  In  English,  one  action  depending  upon  another 
is  in  almost  any  case  expressed  indiscriminately  by 
that  or  by  the  Infinitive.  In  Latin  the  form  of 
expression  will  depend  on  the  meaning  of  the  depen- 
dent words  or  clause.  This  meaning  can  usually  be 
determined  by  the  following  Rules  :  — 

a.  If  the  words  can  be  put  in  an  independent  form  as  the 
words  of  some  person  in  the  Indicative,  it  is  Indirect  Discourse, 
and  requires  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  (see  examples 
in  §  33o). 

b.  If  they  can  be  put  in  an  independent  form  as  a  Question, 
they  require  the  Subjunctive  as  Indirect  Questions  (see  examples 
in  §  334). 

c.  If  they  can  be  put  in  an  independent  form  as  the  words  of 
some  person  in  the  hnperative,  or  can  be  conceived  as  a  Result, 
they  require  the  Subjunctive.  The  Infinitive  is  used  in  many 
expressions  of  this  class,  either  optionally  or  exclusively  (see 
examples  in  §§  331,  332). 

d.  If  they  could  be  expressed  independently  in  the  Indicative, 
but  as  a  fact,  and  not  as  the  words  of  some  other  person,  they 
regularly  require  quod  with  the  Indicative  (see  examples  in 
§  333)- 

e.  An  English  noun  must  often  be  rendered  by  a  substantive 
clause,  on  account  of  the  scarcity  of  abstract  terms  in  Latin,  or 
the  want  of  a  corresponding  idiom.     Thus  — 

1.  He  was  accused  of  treason  against  his  country,  accusa- 

tns  est  quod  patriam  prodidisset. 

2.  A  value  beyond  all   estimation,  pretium  majus   quain 

ut  aestimetur, 

f.  In  English  a  real  substantive  clause  is  often  introduced  by 
the  common  expression  for  with  the  Infinitive  ;  and  is  usually 
rendered  in  Latin  by  the  Accusative  and  Infinitive  :  ut  with  the 
subjunctive  is  more  rare.  The  meaning  of  the  particular  ex- 
pression must  be  carefully  noticed.     Thus  — 


76  Latin   Composition. 

1.  For  a  dying  father  to  bequeath  an  empire  to  his  son  is  a 

deed   -worthy    of  gratitude,  patrtm,   inoHentem,  filio 
imperium  legare  factum  est  gratia  (lignum. 

2.  The  next  thing  is  for  me  to  speak  of  the  -war  against  the 

pirates,  reliquum  est  ut  de  hello  dicam  piratico* 

Note.  —  The  forms  of  Indirect  Discourse  were  developed  in 
Latin  into  a  very  complex  system,  which,  for  the  sake  of  fuller 
practice,  will  be  exhibited  in  the  two  succeeding  Lessons. 

Exercise  27. 

1.  But  before  Caesar  allowed  his  tired  soldiers  to 
enjoy  the  fruits  of  the  victory  of  Pharsalia  he  required 
them  to  complete  the  conquest.  The  pursuit  was  con- 
tinued during  the  remainder  of  the  day  and  on  the 
morrow.  But  the  task  was  easy.1  The  clemency  of 
the  conqueror  induced  ail  to  submit.  When  Caesar 
entered  the  camp,  and  saw  the  dead  bodies  of  many 
Romans  lying  about,  he  exclaimed,  "  They  would 
have  it  so.  To  have  laid  down  our  arms  would  have 
sealed  our  doom." 

2.  The  soldiers  of  Viriathus  recognized  their  general 
simply  by  his  tall  figure,  and  by  his  striking  sallies 
of  wit,  and  above  all  by  the  fact  that  he  surpassed 
every  one  of  his  men  in  temperance  as  well  as  in 
toil. 

3.  The  sailors  were  willing  to  do  as  he  wished. 
But  they  were  afraid  that  the  vessel  could  not  stand 
the  beating  of  the  waves,  and  as  Marius  also  was 
much  troubled  with  sickness,  they  made  for  land. 
They  wandered  about  without  any  definite  object, 
seeking  merely  to  escape  from  the  present  evil  as 
worst  of  all,  and  putting  their  hopes  on  the  chances 
of  fortune.  For  the  land  was  their  enemy,  and  the 
sea  also ;  and  they  feared  2  to  fall  in  with  men,  and 

1  Lit.  "  not  difficult." 
2  Notice  construction  of  verbs  of  fearing  (§  331.  f). 


Intermediate  Clauses.  77 

feared  also  not  to  fall  in  with  men,  because  they  were 
in  want  of  provisions.  After  some  time  they  met 
with  a  few  herdsmen,  who  had  nothing  to  give  them 
in  their  need.  But  they  recognized  Marius,  and  ad- 
vised him  to  get  out  of  the  way  as  quick  as  he  could.1 

4.  Griselda,  it  is  now  time  for  you  to  reap  the  fruit 
of  your  long  patience ;  and  that  they  who  have  re- 
ported me  to  be  cruel,  unjust,  and  a  monster  in 
nature,2  should  know  that  what  I  have  done  has  been 
all  along  with  a  view  to  teach  you  how  to  behave  as  a 
wife,  and  lastly  to  secure  my  own  ease  and  quiet  as 
long  as  we  live  3  together,  which  I  feared  might  have 
been  endangered  by  my  marriage.  Therefore  I  had 
a  mind  i  to  prove  you  by  harsh  and  injurious  treat- 
ment ;  and  not  being  aware  that  you  have  ever  trans- 
gressed my  will,  either  in  word  or  deed,  I  now  seem 
to  have  met  with  that  happiness  I  desired.  I  intend 
then  to  restore  in  an  hour  what  I  have  taken  away 
from  you  in  many  ;  and  to  make  you  the  sweetest 
recompense  for  the  many  bitter  pangs  I  have  caused 
you  to  suffer. 

1  Subjunctive.  3  ingenio.  3  Subjunctive. 

4  mihi  propositum  habui. 

Lesson  29. 

Intermediate   Clauses. 

Learn  §§  340,  341.  a,  b,  c,  d;  342  (Intermediate 
clauses).  Compare  §  336,  and  b  (Subordinate  clauses 
in  Indirect  Discourse). 

Remark.  —  Besides  the  constructions  of  dependent  clauses 
already  mentioned  (which  for  the  most  part  are  suggested  by 
some  particle  or  some  construction  in  English),  another  is 
found  in  Latin,  which  has  no  English  equivalent  whatever  : 
namely,  that  of  a  clause  subordinate  to  another  which  is  itself 


78  Latin  Composition. 

suborditiate.  This  is  especially  to  be  observed  when  any  one 
of  the  Infinitive  and  Subjunctive  expressions  which  have 
been  treated  under  the  head  of  substantive  clauses  —  itself 
the  subject  or  object  of  some  leading  verb  —  has  another 
clause  depending  on  it.  In  this  case,  the  verb  of  the  latter 
is  almost  invariably  in  the  subjunctive.  But,  in  applying 
the  rule,  the  following  conditions  must  be  observed  :  — 

a.  When  a  subordinate  clause  depends  on  an  infinitive  or 
subjunctive,  so  that  it  becomes  logically  a  part  of  the  same  expres- 
sion, its  verb  must  regularly  be  in  the  Subjunctive  (see  examples 
in  §  342). 

N.  B.  This  rule  does  not  apply  to  the  case  of  a  simple  relative 
clause  following  a  complementary  infinitive,  which  will  generally 
come  under  the  following  head. 

b.  If  the  subordinate  clause  is  inserted  for  mere  definition  or 
explanation  —  so  that  it  may  be  regarded  as  true  independently  of 
the  connection  in  which  it  stands  —  its  verb  will  be  in  the  Indica- 
tive (see  examples  under  §  336.  b). 

c.  When  a  clause,  though  not  depending  on  an  infinitive  or 
subjunctive,  is  represented  as  containing  the  words  or  thought 
of  any  other  persoti  than  the  writer  or  speaker,  so  that  it  be- 
comes informal  indirect  discourse,  the  verb  must  be  in  the 
Subjunctive  (see  examples  under  §  341). 

Note.  —  This  construction  is  especially  common  in  clauses 
expressing  a  reason  or  motive,  which  otherwise  do  not  take  the 
subjunctive. 

d.  A  subordinate  clause  in  a  Conditional  sentence  will  have 
the  mood  and  tense  of  the  principal  verb. 

Exercise  28. 

i.  Sulla,  encouraging  his  soldiers,  who  were  35,000 
men  well  armed,  led  them  to  Rome.  The  soldiers 
fell  on  the  tribunes  whom  Marius  had  sent  and  mur- 
dered them.  Marius  also  put  to  death  many  friends 
of  Sulla  in  Rome,  and  proclaimed  freedom  to  the 
slaves  if  they  would  join  1  him.  But  it  is  said  that 
only  three  slaves  accepted  the  offer. 
1  See  c,  above. 


Intermediate  Clauses.  79 

2.  The  next  day  Marius,  compelled  by  hunger,  and 
wishing  to  make  use  of  his  remaining  strength  before 
he  was1  completely  exhausted,  went  along  the  shore, 
encouraging  his  followers,  and  entreating  them  not  to 
abandon  the  last  hope,  for  which  he  reserved  2  himself 
on  the  faith  of  an'old  prediction.  For  when  he  was 
quite  a  youth,  and  living  in  the  country,  he  caught  in 
his  garment  an  eagle's  nest  as  it  was  falling  down,3 
with  seven  young  ones  [in  it]  ;  which  his  parents  won- 
dering at,  consulted  the  soothsayers,  who  told  them 
that  their  son  would  become  the  most  illustrious  of  men, 
and  that  it  was  [the  will  of]  fate  that  he  should  receive 
the  supreme  command   and   magistracy  seven  times. 

3.  His  attendants  advised  him  to  wait  until  he  had 
made  preparations  of  men  and  money.  To  which  he 
only  returned,  "They  that  love  me  will  follow  me." 
In  a  few  days  he  drove  the  enemy  from  before  the 
city,  and  took  the  count  prisoner;  who,  raging  at  his 
defeat  and  calamity,  exclaimed,  "that  this  blow  was 
from  fortune ;  but  valor  could  make  reprisals,  as  he 
should  show,  if  he  ever  regained  his  liberty." 

4.  When  with  infinite  toil  they  had  climbed  up  the 
greater  part  of  that  steep  ascent,  Balboa  commanded 
his  men  to  halt,  [and]  advanced  alone  to  the  summit, 
that  he  might  be  the  first  who  should  enjoy  a  spec- 
tacle which  he  had  so  long  desired.4  As  soon  as  he 
beheld  the  South  Sea  stretching  in  endless  prospect 
below  him,  he  fell  on  his  knees,  and,  lifting  up  his 
hands  to  heaven,  returned  thanks  to  God,  who  had 
conducted 5  him  to  a  discovery  so  beneficial  to  his 
country  and  so  honorable  to  himself. 

1  See  a,  above.  *  See  b,  above.  3  ad  terrain. 

4  See  c,  above.  6  See  b,  above. 


8o  Latin   Composition* 


Lesson  30. 

Indirect   Discourse. 

Read  §§  335-339,  throughout  (Indirect  Discourse), 
noticing  carefully  the  Remark  on  page  248. 

Remark.  —  1.  The  Indirect  Discourse  in  Latin  corre- 
sponds to  the  common  reporting  of  speeches,  &c,  in  the 
newspapers  and  elsewhere,  in  which  the  pronouns  and  the 
tenses  of  the  verb  are  changed,  and  the  whole  quotation  is 
usually  introduced  by  that,  following  a  verb  of  saying,  &c 
This  form  of  discourse  is  much  more  common  and  highly 
developed  in  Latin  than  in  English,  and  may  often  be  used 
in  rendering  the  English  direct  narrative  or  quotation. 
Many  difficulties  and  obscurities  are  avoided  in  Latin  by  the 
use  of  the  reflexive  pronoun,  to  refer  to  the  speaker,  and  of 
the  Indicative  and  Subjunctive  moods  as  given  in  §  336. 
The  rule  defining  the  employment  of  these  moods  is  as 
follows :  — 

a»  The  main  clauses  (statements)  have  their  verbs  in  the 
Infinitive  with  the  subject  in  the  Accusative,  as  substantive 
clauses  dependent  on  the  verb  of  saying,  &c. 

6.  Dependent  clauses,  introduced  by  relatives,  relative  or  con- 
ditional particles,  and  the  like,  have  their  verbs  in  the  Subjunctive, 

as  INTERMEDIATE   CLAUSES. 

c.  Imperative  forms  of  speech  take  the  Subjunctive. 
N.  B.  For  special  indirect  forms  see  §§  337,  338. 

d.  The  Subject  of  the  verb  must  regularly  be  expressed  in 
indirect  discourse,  though  a  pronoun  omitted  in  the  direct.  Refer- 
ences to  the  speaker  must  be  made  by  the  reflexives  se  and  suua. 

e.  Repetitions  of  some  verb  of  saying,  &c,  which  are  common 
in  English  for  the  sake  of  keeping  up  the  form  of  indirect  dis- 
course, should  be  omitted  in  Latin. 

/.  Particular  attention  should  be  given  in  translating  the  afio- 
dosis  contrary  to  fact,  which  is  done  by  the  future  participle  with 
fuisse  (see  examples  in  §  308.  d). 


Indirect  Discourse,  81 

fj.  Sequence  of  Tenses  is  very  often  violated  in  indirect  dis- 
course for  the  sake  of  greater  vividness,  by  the  use  of  primary 
instead  of  secondary  tenses,  —  but  never  in  a  narrative  clause 
with  cum. 

2.  An  Indirect  Question  includes  all  the  cases  where  an 
interrogative  clause,  or  one  introduced  by  an  interrogative 
word  (who  ?  where  ?  whether,  and  the  like)  is  made  the  sub- 
ject or  object  of  a  verb  or  of  some  equivalent  phrase.  As 
most  interrogatives,  both  in  English  and  Latin,  have  the 
same  form  with  the  relatives,  care  must  be  taken  to  distin- 
guish them  by  noticing  whether  there  is  an  Antecedent, 
expressed  or  implied,  which  is  the  distinguishing  mark  of  the 
Relative. 

N.  B.  For  other  interrogative  forms  see  §§  210-212. 

Exercise  559. 

i.  When  I  came  to  the  foot  of  the  hill,  I  met  with 
a  very  aged  man,  who  asked  me  what  I  was  and 
whither  bound.  I  told  him  that  I  was  a  pilgrim  going 
to  the  celestial  city.  Then  said  the  old  man,  "  Thou 
lookest  like  an  honest  fellow.  Wilt  thou  be  content  to 
dwell  with  me  for  the  wages  that  I  shall  give  thee?" 
Then  I  asked  him  his  name,  and  where  he  dwelt. 
He  said  his  name  was  Adam  the  first,  and  that  he 
dwelt  in  the  town  of  Deceit.  I  asked  him  then  what 
was  his  work,  and  what  the  wages  that  he  would  give. 
He  told  me  that  his  work  was  many  delights,  and  his 
wages,  that  I  should  be  his  heir  at  last. 

2.  His  resolution  was  immediately  formed.  He 
rose  and  called  together  the  officers  of  Proxenus,  and 
addressed  them.  After1  having  pointed  out  the  mag- 
nitude of  the  evils  which  they  had  to  apprehend, 
unless  some  provision  were  made  without  delay  for 
their  defence,  he  dexterously  turned  their  attention  to 

1  cum. 
6 


82  Latin   Composition. 

a  more  animating  view  of  the  situation.  "Ever  since 
they  had  concluded  the  treaty  with  Tissaphernes,  he 
had  observed  with  envy  and  regret  the  rich  posses- 
sions of  the  barbarians,  and  had  lamented  that  his 
comrades  had  bound  themselves  to  abstain  from  the 
good  things  which  they  saw  within  their  reach,  except l 
so  far  as  they  were  able  to  purchase  a  taste2  of  them 
at  an3  expense  which  he  had  feared  would  soon 
exhaust  their  scanty  means." 

3.  I  fancy,  Cephalus,  that  people  do  not  generally 
acquiesce  in  these  views  of  yours,  because  they  think 
that  it  is  not  your  character  but  your  great  wealth  that 
enables  you  to  bear  with  old  age.  For  the  rich,  it 
is  said,  have  many  consolations.  w  True,"  he  said, 
"  they  will  not  believe  me  ;  and  they  are  partly  right, 
though  not  so  right  as  they  suppose.  There  is  great 
truth  in  the  reply  of  Themistocles  to  the  Seriphian, 
who  tauntingly-told -him6  that  his  reputation  was  due 
not  to  himself  but  to  his  country.  '  I  should  not  have 
become  famous  if  I  had  been  a  native  of  Seriphus, 
neither  would  you  if  [you  had  been]  an  Athenian.' " 

4.  I  will  tell  you  [a  tale  of]  what  happened  once  to 
a  brave  man,  Er,  son  of  Armenius,  a  native  of  Pam- 
phylia.  His  story  was,4  that  when  the  soul  had  gone 
out  of  him,  it  travelled  in  company  with  many  others, 
till  they  came  to  a  mysterious  place,  in  which  were 
two  gaps  adjoining  one  another  in  the  earth,  and 
exactly  opposite  them  two  gaps  above  in  the  heaven. 
Between  these  gaps  sat  judges,  who,  after  passing 
sentence,  commanded  the  just  to  take  the  road  to  the 
right,  upwards  through  the  tieaven  ;  while  the  unjust 
were  ordered  to  take  the  road  downwards,  to  the  left. 

1  praeterqiiain  quae.  2  pauca.  3  tantus. 

*  dico.  6  exprobare. 


Certain  Special  Constructions.  83 


Lesson  31. 

Certain   Special   Constructions. 

i.  Read  carefully  §§  332.  c,  and  274  (Exclamatory 
clauses)  ;  332.  d  (tantum  abest  ut,  etc.)  ;  332.  e,  com- 
paring 288.  /  {facere  ut)  ;  332.  g,  and  319.  c,  d 
{quin,  quominus)  ;  292.  c  (Perfect  Participle  with 
kabco)  ;  317.  c,  with  Remark  (disguised  Purpose)  ; 
211,  with  a,  b,  d  (Double  Questions)  ;  308.  b,  c,  d; 
307.  d;  311.  c  (Indicative  used  in  conditions  instead 
of  the  Subjunctive). 

2.  Some  constructions  which  belong  logically  under 
the  preceding  heads  have  special  idiomatic  uses  in 
Latin.     Such  are  the  following  :  — 

a.  The  English  exclamations,  "The  idea  that!"  "To  think 
that !  "  "  That !  "  and  the  like,  referring  to  something  which  has 
actually  happened,  are  expressed  by  the  Accusative  and  Infinitive, 
usually  with  the  enclitic  ne.  When  referring  to  something  antici- 
pated or  to  a  mere  idea,  by  ut  with  the  subjunctive,  usually  also 
with  -ne  :  as, 

1.  To  think  that  you  should  have  fallen  into  such  grief  for 

me !  te  in  tantas  aerwmnas  propter  me  incidisse  ! 

2.  What !  I  interrupt  you  ?  egone  ut  te  interpellem  ? 

b.  English  expressions,  like  "  Far  from,"  or  "  So  far  from," 
with  a  following  clause,  are  rendered  in  Latin  by  tantum  abest, 
followed  by  two  clauses  with  ut  The  former  clause  is  always  the 
subject  of  abest,  which  has  not  a  personal  subject,  as  in  English  ; 
the  latter  clause  is  always  one  of  Result,  not  an  independent 
clause,  as  it  often  is  in  English  (see  examples  in  Grammar). 

c.  Such  phrases  as  "  To  allow  one's  self  to,"  "  manage  to," 
"  act  in  any  way  in  doing  a  thing,"  are  expressed  in  Latin  by 
facere  or  committere,  with  an  ut-clause  as  object.  So  also  where 
verbs  want  the  future  infinitive,  fore  (futurum  esse)  ut  is  used. 


84  Latin   Corn-position. 

d.  Expressions  implying  Hindrance,  usually  (but  not  always) 
followed  in  English  by  from  with  the  participial  noun,  take  in 
Latin  a  subjunctive  clause  with  quominus  (rarely  ne).  If  the 
hindering  is  negatived,  quin  may  be  used  instead.  The  same 
construction  is  used  in  Latin  with  verbs  of  refusing.  Expressions 
like  "  Not  to  doubt  that  {but  that)  "  are  regularly  followed  by 
quin.  The  accusative  with  infinitive  is  to  be  avoided.  "  To  doubt 
whether,"  introduces  an  Indirect  Question,  and  is  so  to  be  treated. 
"  To  hesitate  "  is  expressed  by  the  same  verb  (dubito),  but  with 
a  different  construction  —  the  simple  Infinitive. 

e.  The  English  have,  with  a  participle,  is  sometimes  a  mere 
auxiliary,  corresponding  to  the  Perfect  in  Latin.  Sometimes, 
however,  it  retains  a  slight  notion  of  possession,  and  is  then  to  be 
translated  literally,  with  habeo  or  teneo.    Thus  — 

1.  I  have  guarded  the  prisoners,  captivos  custodii.    But  — 

2.  I   have   the    prisoners   guarded    (under    guard),    captivos 

habeo  custoditos. 

/.  Parenthetical  expressions,  like  "  To  be  brief,"  "  To  say  no 
more,"  "So  to  speak,"  are  really  expressions  of  Purpose,  and  are 
to  be  so  treated  in  Latin  :  as, 

Not  to  be  tedious,  the  enemy  were  beaten  and  put  to  flight, 
ne  longus  sim,  hostes  pulsi  et  fugati  sunt, 

N.  B.  As  this  expression  is  elliptical,  the  sequence  of  tenses 
is  disregarded. 

g.  For  the  treatment  of  Double  or  Alternative  Questions,  con- 
sult the  forms  in  the  Grammar  (§  211). 

h.  In  stating  the  propriety,  possibility,  and  the  like,  of  a  future 
action,  or  one  that  has  not  been  performed  at  all,  Latin  employs 
the  Indicative,  expressing  it  (as  it  were)  as  a  general  truth,  where 
English  uses  the  Potential,  treating  it  as  a  particular  case.  For 
example  — 

1.  It  would  be  tedious  to  follow  up  the  matter,  longum  est 

rem  persequi. 

2.  It  would  befit  us  to  mourn  (but  we  do  not),  nos  decebat 

lugere. 

3.  How  much  better  would  it  have  been!  Quanto  melius 

fuerat ! 


Certain  Special  Consti'uctions.  85 


Exercise  30. 

i.  I  do  not  doubt  that  you  fully  agree  with  me 
regarding  the  motives  and  the  consequences  of 
Caesar's  murder.  I,  for  my  part,  cannot  avoid  feeling 
both  sorrow  and  indignation,  whether  1  I  consider  the 
victim  or1  the  assassins  in  that  great  crime.  What- 
ever may  have  been  the  ambitions  or  the  vices  of  his 
earlier  public  or  private  life,  they  cannot  prevent  us 
from  regarding  his  death  at  this  time  as  the  most 
serious  calamity  to  the  Roman  people,  or  from  con- 
demning and  execrating  the  infamous  conspiracy  that 
slew  him.  Not  to  speak  of  the  glory  and  empire 
won  to  Rome  by  his  victories,  he  was  the  first  con- 
queror in  civil  war  who  refused  to  make  it  an  occasion 
of  massacre  and  revenge.  Far  from  following  the 
example  of  violence  which  the  partisans  of  Pompey 
had  threatened,  he  had 2  disciplined  and  controlled 
his  forces,  so  as  effectually  to  check  the  fury  of 
slaughter  or  the  lust  of  plunder.  At  least,  his  mercy 
to  his  enemies,  after  the  victory  at  Pharsalia,  should 
have3  forbidden  all  thoughts  of  private  resentment. 
[To  think]  that  Marcus  Brutus,  whom  he  not  only 
had  spared  on  the  field  of  battle  and  in  the  hostile 
camp,  but  even  called  his  son,  should  strike  the  dead- 
liest blow  against  him !  that  Cicero,  who  had  so 
lately  extolled  with  fulsome  praise4  his  pardon5  of 
Marcellus,  should  with  yet  greater  fervor  have  gloried 
in  the  manner  of  his  death  !  Was  it  the  hope  of  real 
liberty,  or  was  it  jealousy  of  his  more  vigorous  genius 
and  more  dazzling  glory? 

1  sive.  *  habeo.  3  debuerat. 

4  effusis  laitdibus  efferre.  5  Clause  with  quod. 


86  Latin   Composition. 

2.  But  the  death  of  Caesar  could  not  cause1  true 
and  lasting  freedom  to  exist  in  a  city  which  had 
beheld  the  murder  of  Gracchus,  the  massacres  of 
Marius,  the  proscriptions  of  Sulla,  the  profligacy  of 
Catiline,  the  violence  of  Clodius  !  The  wicked  act2 
of  his  enemies  did  not  hinder  Rome  from  becoming 
subject  to  the  tyranny  of  a  Caesar ;  it  did  prevent  it 
from  enjoying  a  firm  peace  and  an  enlightened  rule 
under  the  ancient  forms  of  the  commonwealth.  It 
kindled  again  the  fury  of  civil  war.  It  destroyed  the 
remnant  of  those  ancient  families  and  the  authority  of 
the  Senate,  which  had  made  the  glory  of  Rome.  It 
extinguished  the  freedom  of  debate,  and  all  confidence 
among  men.  It  committed  the  destiny  of  the  Repub- 
lic to  the  hands  of  Mark  Antony  and  Octavianus. 
It  removed  the  mighty  Julius,  to  prepare  the  way  for 
Tiberius,  Caligula,  and  Nero. 

1  Lit.  "  bring  it  to  pass  that,"  &c.  *  f acinus. 


VOCABULARY. 


Note.  —  In  using  this  Vocabulary,  it  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  Latin  terms 
here  given  are  not  in  all  cases  the  best  or  even  the  ordinary  equivalent  of  the  English 
words,  but  such  as  appear  to  be  best  suited  to  the  passages  where  these  occur.  They 
need  not,  therefore,  prevent  the  use  of  such  other  terms  as  may  be  preferred.  In  select- 
ing the  right  word,  where  several  are  given,  it  will  often  be  necessary  to  consult  the  Latin 
lexicon.  For  numerals,  reference  should  be  had  to  the  Grammar.  Where  numbers 
occur,  they  may  be  written  in  Roman  numerals,  but  should  always  be  read  in  full,  as 
Latin  words. 

The  small  figures  mark  the  conjugations  of  the  verbs.  In  general,  the  gender  only 
of  the  less  usual  forms  of  nouns  is  given,  and  in  verbs  only  those  principal  parts  which 
are  required.     Adjectives  in  us,  when  not  otherwise  marked,  are  to  be  declined  like  bonus. 


A,  an,  usually  omitted  ;  a  cer- 
tain, quidam  (p.  18). 

abandon,  relinquo,  amitto  (lose). 

abide,  maneo?  mansi. 

abode,  to  make,  habito.1  [circa. 

about  (here  and  there),  passim; 

above,  supra  (ace),  insuper ; 
above  all,  maxime. 

abroad,  to  get,  emano.1 

abstain,  temper  of  se  abstinere, 

abundance,  abundantia,  ae. 

abundant,  satis  (with  gen.). 

abuse  (v.),  abutor,3  usus. 

academy,  academia,  ae. 

accept,  accipio?  cepi. 

accompany,  comitor.1 

account  (v.),  fiabeo,2  existimo.1 

account,  on  —  of,  ob,  propter 
(ace.) ;  it  is  of  —  ,  interest  (see 
§  50,  4.  d).    (See  p.  29). 


accuse,  accuso.1 

accustomed,  to  be,  soleo? solitus. 

achieve,  gero,3  gessi. 

acquiesce,  consentior*  sensus. 

Acron,  Acron,  onis. 

across,  trans  (ace). 

act  {n.),  factum ,  /acinus,  oris. 

act,  ago*  egi;  —  a  part,  partes 

agere,  tueri;  —  as,  esse  pro. 
acting,  actio  in  scena. 
actor,  actor,  oris ;  his  trio. 
Adam,  A  da  f mis,  i. 
add,  addo* 
addition  of  territory,  fines  pro- 

moti,  propagati. 
adj  oining,  conjnnctus,  proxim  us. 
address,  adloquor3  appello.x 
admire,  ?niror.x 
advance,  progredior3  gressus. 
advantage,  utilitas,  atis ;  I  have 

the  —  of,  me  adjuvat  quod. 
advise,  hortor,x  moneo} 


88 


Latin   Composition , 


affair,  res,  rei  (f.). 

affection,  amorj  affections,  animi. 

afflicted,  adflictus. 

afraid,  to  be,  timeo*  ui. 

after,  posts  conj.  postquam. 

afterwards,  postea. 

again,  iterum,  rursus,  postea. 

against,  contra,  adversus  (ace). 

Agamemnon,   Aga?nemnon, 

on  is,  ace.  ona. 
age,  aetas,  atis  (f.). 
aged,  confectus  (provectus)  ae- 

tate,  longaevus. 
agitate,  co7mnoveo?  movi. 
ago,  abhitic. 

agree,  adsentior^  (dat). 
agreeable,  gratus,  a,  um. 
aid,  auxilium,  i. 
air  (music),  cantus,  us. 
alarm,  terreo?  ui. 
alarmed,   territus  (abl.),  sollici- 

tus;  —  for,  metuens  (dat.). 
alas,  vae! 

Alcibiades,  Alcibiades,  is. 
all,  omnis,  e  (whole),  totus,  solus 

(gen.  ius). 
all  in  a  body,  universi. 
allied,  conjunctus. 
allot,  trib?to,*  ui,  utum. 
allow,  potestatem  dare  (dat). 
ally,  socius,  i. 
almost,  fere,  paene. 
along,  praeter.  —  alone,  solus. 
along  with,  una  cum. 
already,  jam. 
also,  quoque. 
altar,  ara,  ae. 
although,  quanquam. 
altogether,  omnino. 
always,  semper. 
ambassador,  legatus,  i. 


ambition,  ambitio,  onis;  cupid- 

itas,  atis  (f  ). 
ambitious,  a?nbiiiosus. 
among,  inter  (ace.) ;  sometimes 

expressed  by  dat.  ;  apud. 
ancestor,   proavus,     i,    auctor 

generis ;  pi.,  majores,  um. 
ancient,  antiquus,  vetus,  eris. 
and,  et,  -que  (enclitic),  atque. 
anger,  ira  (visit  with,  persequi). 
animal  (wild),  /era,  ae  (f.)  ;  the 

lower  animals,  bestiae. 
animating,  laetus. 
answer,  respondeo?  di,  sum. 
annual,  annuus,  sollemnis. 
Antipater,  Antipater,  tri. 
antiquities,  antiquitas,  atis  (f.). 
anxiety,  sollicitudo,  inis  (f.). 
anxious,  sollicitus. 
any,  ullus,  ullo  modo;  —  one, 

quisquam,  quivis(p.  1 8) ;  does 

any  ?  num  quis  f 
Apennines,     Apenninus     (sc. 

mons),  i  (m.). 
apparel,  vestitus,  us;  in  funeral 

— ,  sordide  vestitus. 
appear,  appareo?  ui;  videor.* 
appease,  lenio* placo} 
apply  (for  aid),  se  conferre,peto. 
apprehend,  metuo? 
apprise,  doceo.* 
appoint,  praeficio  (ace,  dat.). 
appointed    (to  head),  praefec- 

tus  daius. 
approach  (n.),  adventus,  us. 
approval,  gratia,  ae. 
arbitration,  arbitrium,  i. 
arbitrator,  arbiter,  tri. 
archbishop,  archiepiscopus,  i. 
arduous,  arduus. 
Argos,   Argi,  orum. 


Vocabulary. 


89 


aristocracy,  nobilitas,  atis. 

arm  (v.),  armo.1 

arrasd,  armatus. 

arms  (weapons),  arma,  orum. 

army,  exercitus,  iis. 

arrival,  adventus,  us. 

arrive,  perve/.io*  advenio.4, 

arrogance,  arrogantia,  ae. 

arrow,  sagiita,  ae. 

art,  ars,  tis  (f.). 

artificial,  artijiciosus. 

artisan,    opifcX,  icis. 

Aruns,  A  runs,  Aruntis. 

as,  ttt',  (when),  cum,  pro. 

as  .  .  as,  tarn  quam,  aeque  ac. 

as  if,  as  it  were,  tanquam. 

ascent,  ascensus,  us. 

ashamed,  to  be,  pudere  (impers. 
§  50,  4.  c). 

aside,  se-  (verb-prefix). 

ask,  rogo,1  quaero,  peto  (ad). 

assassin,  sicarius,  i. 

assassinate,  interficio?  occido? 

assistance,  auxilium,  i. 

assume,  sumo?  adrogo.1 

assumed,  simulatus. 

Assyrian,  Assyrius. 

at,  with  name  of  town,  see  p.  41 ; 
near  (not  in),  apud,  ad ;  as 
cause  (as  "  alarmed  at "),  abl. ; 
at  all,  omnino  j  at  once,  statim. 

Athenian,  Atheniensis,  e. 

Athens,  Athenae,  arum. 

attached  to,  conjunctus  cum. 

attack,  aggredior,3  opptigno} 

attain,  adsequor.3 

attempt  (v.),  conor} 

attempt  (n.),  conatus,  iis  (m.). 

attend,  comitor  j  l  to  —  the  ses- 
sion of  the  Senate,  in  Sena- 
tum  ire. 


attendant,  socius,  comes. 
attention,   to   pay,   specto  yl    to 

turn,  animum  revocare  (ad). 
attitude,  status,  us. 
attractive,  juc  undus. 
audacious,  audax,  acis. 
augury,  augurium,  i. 
authority,  auctoritas,  atis  (f.). 
avenge,  ulciscor3  ultus. 
avert,  averto,  ti,  stem} 
avoid,  fugio3  fugi,  evito; 1  I 

cannot  — ,  non  possum  non. 
await,  exspecto}- 
awake,  e  somno  excitare. 
aware,  to  be,  animadvertere. 
away,  to  be,  abesse. 
awhile,  aliquamdiu. 
axe,  securis,  is  (¥.). 


babe,  infans,  tis. 

banish,  pello3  pepuli,  pulsumj 
expel 7o.3 

bank,  ripa,  ae. 

bar  (v.),  claudo.3 

barbarian,  bai'bartis. 

barbarously,  saeve. 

barren  of,  to  be,  careo?  ui 
(abl.). 

battle,  proeliu?n,  i  (n.)  ;  pugna, 
ae  (f.)  ;  field  of  battle,  acies, 
ei  (f.),  locus  ubi pugnatur. 

bay,  sinus  j  us. 

be,  su?n  (see  paradigms  of  com- 
pound tense)  ;  to  be  so,  ita  se 
habere;  —  able  posse. 

beach,  litus,  oris  (n.). 

hear,  fero,fer re,  tuli,  latum. 

bear  up,  sustineo?  ui. 


9° 


Latin   Composition . 


bear  no  relation  to,  nihil  at- 
tinere  ad. 

beard,  barba,  ae. 

beast,  wild,  f era,  ae. 

beating,  vis,  vis  (f.). 

beautiful,  pulcher,  a,  um. 

beauty,  species,  ei,  forma,  ae. 

because,  quia. 

become,  fio,  fieri  (or  passive). 

before,    ante,    antehac,    ante- 
quam. 

begin,  incipio?  cepi;  coepi. 

beginning,  initium,  i. 

behalf,  in,  pro  (abl.). 

behave,  se  gerere. 

behind,    post;    go   behind,   se- 
quor? 

behold,  contueor,  video,  conspicio. 

believe,  credo 3  (dat). 

belong,  esse  (with  gen.  or  dat.) ; 
Pertineo,   ui  {ad). 

bench,  subsellium,  i. 

beneath,  subter,  sub. 

beneficent,   beneficus   (use    su- 
per!). 

beneficial,  utilis,  e. 

besides,  praeter,  praeterea  (adv.). 

besiege,  oppugno.1 

besiegers,  obsidentes. 

best,    optimus;    (adv.)    optime, 
maxime ;  (of  two)  magis. 

bestow,  dono.x 

betray,  prodo*  ostendo 3  (show). 

better,  melior,  us. 

between,  infer  (ace). 

bid,  jubeo?  jussi. 

bind,  obligo} 

bird,  avis,  is  (f.). 

birth,  by,  natu. 

bite,  niordeo?  momordi. 

bitter,  acerbus. 


bitterly,  vehementer. 

blame,  culpa,  ae. 

bland,  blandus. 

blast,   of  music,   clangor,    oris 

(M.). 
blow  (a  blast  of  an  instrument), 

edo? 
blow,  ictus,  us  (m.);  plaga,  ae 

(f.),  vulnus,  eris  (n.). 
boar,  aper,  apri. 
boast,  glorior,1  praedico 1  de. 
bodily  gifts,  bona  corporis. 
body,  corpus,  oris  (n.)  ;  of  men, 

agmen,  inis  (n.). 
bolster-up,  subvenio 4  (dat.). 
bondage,  servitus,  utis  (f.). 
book,  liber,  bri  (m.). 
booty,  praeda,  ae. 
borders,  fines,  ium  (m.). 
born,  natus;  to  be  —  ,  nascor.3 
both,  uterque,  utraque,  utrum- 

que,  gen.  utriusque;  both  .  . 

and,  et  .  .  et. 
bound,  obligatus ;  to  be  going 

anywhere,  tendere. 
bow  one's  head,  se  inclina?'e. 
boy,  puer,  eri. 
brave,  fortis,  e. 
break,  frango?  fregi,  fraction. 
break  up,  confringo. 
breathe,    exspiro;1    animam 

ejfiare,  to  breathe  one's  last. 
breathing,  spiritum  ducens. 
breeze,  aura,  ae. 
bribe  (v.),  corrumpo,*  rupi,  rup- 

tum, 
bribes  (n.),  dona,  orum. 
bribery,  a?nbitus,  us  (m.)  . 
bridge,  pons,  pontis  (m.). 
bright,   clarusj  — distinctions, 

praeclara. 


Vocabulary. 


91 


brilliant,  clarus,   insignis,   e, 
splendidus. 

bring,  adfero,  irr.,  porto,x  duco, 
perduco  ;  3  —  to  an  end,  confi- 
cio  ;  3 —  to  pass,  efficio? 

broken,  fr actus,  turbatus. 

brother,  frater,  tris  (m.)  ;  — in- 
law, uxoris  frater. 

brutality,  immanitas,  atis  (f.). 

brute,  bestia,  ae  (f.). 

build,  aedifico;  x  military  works, 
roads,  &c,  munio.* 

building,  aedificium,  i. 

bulk,  magnitudo,  inis  (f.). 

bull,  taurus,  i. 

burn  (v.),  ardeo,2  si. 

burst,  inrumpo} 

business,  negotium,  res;  make  it 
one's  — ,  operam  ponere  in. 

but,  sed,  autem  (§  43,  3.  b),  ta- 
men;  but  if,  sin,  quod  si  ;  — 

buy,  emo.3    [for,  nisi  (with  verb). 

by  (near),  ad;  (with  passives) 
ab,  a  (abl.) ;  means,  ablative 
alone  (see  p.  28)  ;  by  far, 
longe;  be  by  (near),  adesse. 


Cadiz,  Gades,  htm  (f.). 

Caesar,  Caesar,  aris;  adj.,  Caesa- 
rianus. 

Caenina  (of),  Caeninensis,  e. 

calamity,  calamitas,  atis  (f.). 

call,  appello,1  advoco;1  — to 
mind,  co?nme7Jiorare  ; l  —  upon 
(for  opinion),  sententiam  ro- 
gare;  —  together,  convoco. 

camp,  castra,  orum  (n.)  ;  of  the 
camp,  militarise  e. 


campaign,  bellum,  i. 

can,  possum,  posse,  potui. 

candidate,  to  become  (for  con- 
sul), co?isu latum  peter e. 

cap,  pileus,  i  (m.). 

capitol,  capitoiium,  i. 

captain,  dux,  ducis. 

captivated,  captus. 

capture  (v.),  capio? 

capture,  expugnaiio,  onis  (f.). 

care,  cur  a,  ae. 

careful  of,  studiosus  (gen.). 

carry,  porto,1  fero,  deicio? 

Carthage,  Carthago,  inis  (f.). 

Carthaginian,  Carthaginiensis. 

cast,  p7'oicio ;  3  —  the  parts  of  a 
play,  disti'ibuo. 

cast,  jactus  (part,  of  j  acid). 

cat,  fe 'lis,  is. 

catch,  excipio;  3  —  at,  cap  to} 

Catiline,  Catilina,  ae. 

Cato,  Cato,  onis. 

Caudine  Forks,  Furculae  Cau- 

diiiae. 
cause  to  suffer,  aliqtia  re  adji- 

cere ;  efficere  ut. 
cause,  res,  rei ;  causa,  ae;  res 

(plur.). 
cavalier,  eques,  itis. 
cavalry,  eques,  itis,  pi. 
celebrate,  celebro} 
celestial,  caelestis,  e. 
censor,  censor,  oris ;   one   who 
has  been  —  ,  censorius  (p.  10). 
censure,  reprehendoj* 
chain,  vinculum,  i. 
chair,  sella,  ae  (f.).  \tor. 

champion,  defensor,  propugna" 
chance,   occasio   oblata ;   casus, 

us  (m.)  ;  by  chance,  forte. 
change,  rnuto} 


92 


Latin  Corn-position* 


character,  indoles,  mores  (pi.), 
charge,  accusatio,  crimen. 
Charles,  Carolus,  i. 
chariot,  cur v  us,  us  (m.). 
chase,  venatio,  onis  (F.). 
chastise,  verbero.1 
check,  reprimo.z 
cheer,  recreo,1  hortor} 
cherish  hate,  odium  gerere. 
chief,  dux,  cisy  princeps,  ipis. 
chief- town,  caput  gentis. 
chiefly,  ?naxime. 
child,  puer,  ij  adj.  puerilis,  e. 
children,  liberi;  young — ,pueri, 

orum,  infantes. 
childless,  orbus. 
chink,  rim  a,  ae. 
choose,  delego3  gi;  (of  officers) 

facio,3feci;  cteo1  (p.  122,  dd). 
Cicero,  Cicero,  onis. 
circle,  cir cuius  j  (v.)  circa  esse. 
circumstance,  res,  rei. 
citizen,  civis,  is. 
city,   urbs,   urbis,   civitas,   atis 

(f.)  ;  of  the  — ,  urbanus. 
civil,  civ  His,  e. 
claim,  vindico.1 
class,  ordo,  inis  (m.). 
claw,  unguis,  is  (m.). 
cleft,  fissus  (part,  of  Jindd). 
clemency,  cle?nentia,  ae. 
client,  c liens,  tis. 
climb,  scando,3  adscendo3 
close  (v.),  claudo,8  si,  sum. 
close  to,  prope  (ace.)  ;  prope  ab. 
closed,  clausus.  —  closely,  arte. 
clothed,  vestitus. 
coast,  litus,  oris  (n.). 
coil,  volvo3 
cold,  algor,  oris  (m.). 
colleague,  collega^  ae. 


college,  collegium,  i. 

colony,  colonia,  ae. 

come,  venio,*  venij  —  across, 
transeo,  ire;  —  forward,  ex- 
sistoj3 — in  (of  wind),  ad- 
Jla7'e ;  —  to,  pervenio 4  ad,  ac- 
cedo  3  ad. 

comeliness,  forma,  ae. 

command  (w.),jubeo,i  jussij  (in 
office),  praeessej  be  master 
of,  i?npero.x 

command  (n),  imperatum,  i; 
supreme  —  ,  imperium,  i;  by 
— ,  jussu. 

commander,  imperator,  oris. 

commanding,  dux,  ducis  (gen.)  ; 
as  descriptive  adj.,  augustus. 

commend,  laudo.1      \committo. 

commit  (an  act),  facio,  efficio,* 

common  (in  common),  commu- 
nis, e. 

common  people,  plebs,  is  (f.). 

commonwealth,  res publica. 

communicate,  impertio.* 

community,  populus,  i. 

companion,  socius,  i. 

compare,  comparo.x 

company:  in  — with,  una  cum. 

complete,  adfinem  perduco* 

completely,  plane. 

compelled,  coactus  (cogo). 

compose,  concipio,  scribo.s 

compulsion,  under,  coactus. 

comrade,  comes,  itis. 

conceal,  celo l  (two  ace),  occulo? 

concerns,  it,  refert  (§  40,  4.  d). 

conclude  (make),  facio. 

condemn,  damno,1  reprehendo3 

condition,  condicio   fortunae ; 
fortutiae,  arum. 

conduct  (v.),  duco3  deduco. 


Vocabulary. 


93 


conduct  (harsh),  asperitas. 
confederation,  foedus,  eris  (n.). 
confer  on,  defer o  ad,  confero  in. 
confidence,  fiducia,  ae,  fides. 
confidence,  to  have  —  in,  con- 

fido  3  (dat.  or  abl.).       [obsecro. 
conical,  coni  (gen.).  —  conjure, 
connect,  conjungo.3 
connected,  conjunctus. 
conquer,  vinco,3  vici,  victum  j 

devinco.  —  conquest,  victoria. 
conqueror,  victor,  oris. 
consequences,  exitus,  us  (sing.). 
consider,  existimo,1  considero.1 
consideration,  res,  rei  (f.). 
consistent,  to  be,  congruo3 
consolation,  solatio,  consolatio, 

onis  (f.). 
conspicuous,  to  be,  emitieo.2 
conspiracy,  conjuratio,  onis. 
conspirator,  conjuratus,  i. 
conspire,  conjuro.1 
consul,  consul,  iilis ;  (one  who 

has  been),  consularis. 
consulship,  consulatus,  us  (m.)  ; 

in  one's  consulship,  consul,  in 

appos.  with  name. 
consult,   consulo,3  ui  (§   51,  2. 

consume,  consumo3 
contempt  (with),  fastidiens,  lis. 
contend     (as    with     difficulty), 

lab  or 0  l  (abl.). 
content,    contented,   contentus 

(abl.) ;   wilt  thou  be  — ,  satin 

habes  ? 
continue,  persequor,3  secutus; 

—  in   pursuit,   hostes    consec- 

tari. 
contrary  to,  contra  (ace). 
control,  7iioderatio,  onis  (f.). 


controlled,  frenatus. 

convict,  co/iviuco,6  damno.1 

corner,  an^ulus,  i. 

counsellor,  to  have,  in  consili- 
um adkibere. 

count  (a  title  of  rank),  comes, 
it  is. 

countless,  innumerabilis,  e. 

country,  regio,  onis;  terra ,  ae; 
(one's  native),  patria,  ae j  — 
people,  agrestes,  turn,  rus- 
tici,  orum;  in  the  — ,  ruri. 

court,  aula,  ae.  —  cover,  tego.3 

covered,  tcctus  (f.)  cobpertus; 
(here  and  there,  as  with  dwell- 
ings), sparsus. 

cowardice,  ignavia,  ae. 

cowardly,  ignavus. 

cradle,  area,  alveus. 

crafty,  dolostts,  callidus. 

crawl,  serpo.3 

create,  creoj  1  facio,3  feci ;  con- 
stituo3 

credit  (v.),  confido3 

credit  (n.),  laus,  dis  (f.). 

Creon,  Creon,  ontis. 

crime,  scelus,  eris  (n.). 

crisis,  'discrimen,  inis  (n.). 

cross,  transire. 

crowd,  comitatus,  us,  turba, 
ae. 

crown,  corona,ae; (royal  power), 
imperium,  regfium. 

cruel,  crudelis,  e. 

cry,  clamo ;  x  —  out,  clamo,  ex- 
clamo,  vocifero.x 

cultivated,  cultus. 

curious,  7nemorabilis,  e. 

curule,  curulis,  e. 

custom,  mos,  moris  (m.), 

cynic,  cynicus. 


94 


Latin  Composition , 


D.   " 

danger,  periculum,  i. 
dangerous,  gravis,  e. 
daughter,  filia,  ae. 
day,  dies,   diei  (m.),  (rarely  F. 

in  singular), 
dazzling,  clarus. 
dead  (slain),  occisus. 
deadliest,  gravissimus. 
dearly,  care,  carissime. 
death,   mors,  tis  j   condemn  to 

— ,  damnare  capitis  (§  50, 4.  b), 

morte  multarej  put  to  — ,  in- 

terficere. 
debar,  prohibeo,2  ui,  itum. 
debase,  depravo.1 
debate,  sententias  dicere. 
debt  (kindness),  see  note,  p.  74. 
deceit,  fallacia,  ae. 
deceive,  decipio.3       \ 
decemvir,  decemvir,  viri. 
decide  the  contest,  decerto.1 
decision,  judicium,  i. 
declare,  nuntio,x  adfirmo} 
dedicate,  dedico} 
deed,  factum,  i. 
deem,  puto.1 
deeply,  vehe?nenter. 
defeat  (v.),  supero} 
defeat  (n.),  calamitas,  clades. 
defend,  defendo;  defence,  salus. 
degree  (to  what  — ),  quo. 
delay,  ?nora,  ae. 
deliberate,  delibero} 
delight  (v.),  delecto} 
delight  (n.),  gaudium,  i;  delec- 

tatio,   onis  (f.)  ;   oblectamen- 

tum,  i. 
deliver,  liber v,1  trado.3 
deliverer,  liberator,  oris. 


demand,  postulo,1  flagito?- 

Demosthenes,  Demosthenes,  is. 

deny,  nego} 

depose  (a  king),  regno  spolio.1 

deprive,    orbo, l   privo  ;x  —  of 
voice,  vocem  eripere  (dat.). 

deputation,  legatio,  onis  (f.). 

descended,  genitus  (with  abl.). 

descend,  descendo.3 

descent,  genus,  eris  (n.). 

desert  (n.),  deserta,  orum. 

deserted,  desertus. 

desire,  cupio?  ivi  (with  ace.  or 
infin.),  jubeo.2 

desire  (n.),  cupido,  inis  (f.). 

despatch,  co?ificio?  interficio.* 

despise,  contemno,*  psu 

despoil,  spolio} 

despotism,  dominatio,  onis  (f.). 

destiny,  fortunae,  arum. 

destroy,  deleo,2  evi,  etum, 

destroyer,  perditor,  oris. 

destruction,  exitium,  pernicies, 

detected,  detectus. 

determine,   statuo  ;  3  —  on,  ca- 
per e  (p.  65). 

detestable,  nefandus. 

devoid,  expers,  tis  (with  gen.). 

devotions    (of — ),   precatidi 
(gen.). 

dexterously,  sollerter, 

diadem,  diadema,  a  tis  (n.). 

dictator,  dictator,  oris. 

dictatorship,  dictatura,  ae. 

die,  morior,3  mortuus. 

die  out,  exstinguor? 

die  (n.),  a  lea,  ae. 

dignity,  dignitas,  honos. 

difficult,  difficilis,  e. 

dinner,  cena,  ae  (f.). 

dip,  tingo3  tinxi,  tine  turn. 


Vocabulary. 


95 


direct,  viam  monstrare. 
disappear,  evanesco3  ui. 
disaster,  clades,  is  (F.). 
discharge,  praesto,1  fungor. 
disciplined,  coercitus  (p.  85). 
discontinue,  abrogo.1 
discourse  (v.),  disputo.1* 
discovery  (conduct  to  — ),  effi- 

cere  ut  inveniret. 
discredit,  infamia,  ae  (f.). 
disease,  morbus,  i  (m.). 
disgrace,  ignominia,  dedecus. 
display,  praebeo* 
di  spirited,  fr actus  animo. 
displease,  displiceo,  ui  (dat). 
disposer,  rector  et  moderator. 
disposition,  voluntas,  atis. 
disregard,  neglego,  xi. 
dissatisfied,  non  contentus. 
dissembler,  simulator,  oris. 
dissolution,  solutio,  onis  (f.). 
distinguish,    laudibus    ornarej 

with  distinction,  honorifice. 
distress,  res  adversae. 
distribute,  distribtco.z 
distrust,  diffidentia,  ae. 
disunion,  dissensio,  onis  (f.). 
divide,  divido,3  si,  sum. 
divine,  aivinus. 
diviner,  haruspex,  icis. 
divinity,  natura  divina. 
do,  facio3  feci,  factum. 
dog,  cam's,  is  (gen.  pi.  canum). 
dominion    (subjects),    civitas, 

atis  (f.). 
doom :  to  seal  — ,  pernicies  at- 

que  exitium  esse. 
door,  fores,  ium  (f.)  ;  porta,  ae 

(f.)  ;  out  of  doors,  foras. 
doubtful,  dubius. 
downward,  deorsu?n. 


drama,  fabula,  ae. 

draw  up,  subduco;3  troops  — , 

copias  iustruo.3 
drink  (n.),  potio,  onis  (f.). 
drive,  pello,3  pepuli,  pulsum. 
drowned :   to  be  — ,  aqua  pe- 

rire. 
dry,  siccus. 
dry  (up),  exsicco.1 
due,  to  be,  deberi. 
duly,  rite. 

duty,  munus,  erisj  officium,  i. 
dwell,  habito.1 


eagerness,    earnestness,   studi- 

um,  ij  eagerly,  avide, 
eagle,  aquila,  ae, 
earlier,  prior,  oris. 
early,  mane. 
early-ripe,  maturus. 
earnest :  in  — ,  serio. 
earth,   terra,  ae;  surface  of  — 

expressed  by  omnis. 
ease,  tranquillitas,  atis  (f.). 
East,   oriens,   lis  (m.)  ;    of  the 

— ,  Asiaticus. 
easy ,  facilis,  e. 
educate,  educotl  erudio.* 
education,  disciplina,  ae, 
effectually,  penitus. 
effeminacy,  mollities,  ei  (f.). 
effort,  to  make,  nitor.3 
Egypt.  Aegyptus,  i  (f.). 
elder,  major  (natu). 
elect,  creoj  *  facio3 feci,  f actus. 
election  (as   consul),    consula- 

tus,  us  (m.). 
elegy,  elegia,  ae. 


96 


Latin   Composition. 


elephant,  elephantus,  i. 

eloquence,  eloquentia,  ae. 

emblem,  signum,  i. 

eminent,  illustris,  e. 

empire,  imperium,  i. 

employ,  ulor,8  usus,  adhibeo. 

empty,  mam's,  e. 

enable,  facer e  ut  possim. 

encounter  (v.),  confligo  *  cum. 

encourage,  cohortor.1 

end  iy.),finio.x 

end,  finis,  (f.  or  m.)  ;  at  an  —  , 
fijiitus;  bring  to  an  — ,  confi- 
cio,3  feci ;  — of,  extremus. 

endanger,  in  periculu?n  addu- 
cere. 

endless,  sine  fine. 

endowed,  praeditus. 

endure,  fero  (perferd),  tuli;  ca- 
pable of  enduring,  patiens,  tis. 

enemy,  hoslis,  is  ("  the  enemy," 
usually  plur.) ;  a  personal  — , 
inimicus,  i. 

energy,  stadium,  i. 

engage,  adhibeo?  ui,  itum. 

engage  in,  inire. 

engaged,  occupatus. 

English,  Angli,  orum. 

enjoy  (fruit),  percipio.3 

enlightened  rule,  imperium  sa~ 
pienter  administration. 

enmity,  odium,  i. 

Enna  (man  of),  Hennensis,  is. 

enrich,  locupleto} 

ensign,  insigne,  is  (n.). 

enter,  intro;1  i?ieo,  ire;  — a 
ship,  conscendo.3 

enterprise,  conatus,  us  (m.). 

entire,  totus  (gen.  ius). 

entitle,  inscribo.3 

entreat,  obsecro.1 


envenomed,  venenatus. 

envy,  invideo ;  invidia  (noun). 

Epidaurian,  Epidaurius. 

Epirots,  Epirotae,  arum. 

equal,  par,  part's. 

equally,  non  minus,  aeque. 

establish,  conloco.1 

estate,  praedium,  i. 

esteem  (v.),  aestimo.1 

Etruscan,  Etruscus. 

even,  etiam  j  not  — ,  ne  .  .  qui- 

dem  j  —  as,  ut. 
event,  factum,  ij  eventus,  us 

(M.). 

ever,  unquamj  (always),  semper. 

every,  everybody,  quisque,  qui- 

libet,  omnis,  unusquisque  (p. 

i9). 

everywhere,  ubique,  ubivis. 
evil,  malusj  (n.),incommodum,  i. 
exactly,  plane. 
exalted,  excelsus. 
example,  exemplum,  i. 
except,  praeter  (ace),  nisi. 
excess,  nimium . —  excel,  excello. 
excited,  concitatus. 
exclaim,  clamo.1 
execrate,  exsecror.1 
exercise  (v.),  exerceo,*  ui,  itum. 
exercise   (n.),   exercitatio,  onis 

(use  plur.). 
exert,  exerceo*  ui. 
exertion,  labor,  oris  (m.). 
exhaust,  conficio,z  exhaurio.* 
exigency,  necessitas,  atis  (f.). 
exile,  exsilium,  i;  to  be  in — , 

exsulo;1  an  — ,  exsul,  ulis. 
expel,  expello,3  puli,  pulsum. 
expense,  pretium,  i. 
experience  (v.),  obire  (ace.). 
exploit,  res  gesta. 


Vocabulary. 


97 


expose,  obicio?  jeci;  offer o. 
exterminate,  exstirpo.1 
extinguish,  restinguo?  nxi. 
extirpate,  exstirpo.1 
extort,  extorqueo,2  torsi. 
extraordinary,  extraordinarius. 
extremely,  express  by  superl. 
eye,  ocuius,  i  (m.). 


F. 


face,  vulius,  us  (m.). 

facilitate,  adjuvo,x  juvi. 

failings,  vitia,  or  urn. 

fair  share,  jus ta  pars. 

fair-speaking,  blandiloquus. 

faith :  on  the  —  of,  fntus  (with 
abl.). 

faithful,  fidus. 

Falerian,  Falernius. 

fall,  cado,*  pereo;  —  to  the  lot 
of,  obtingo,  tigi  (of  office,  use 
rather  obti?iere,  of  the  man 
chosen);  let  — ,  deicio ;  — in 
with,  occurrojz  — upon,  in- 
vader e  in;  —  down,  decido j 3 
—  on  one's  knees,  in  genua 
procumbere. 

false,  falsus. 

faltering,  vacillans,  tis. 

fame,  fama,  ae. 

family ,  familia,  ae. 

famine,  fames,  is  (f.). 

famous,  clarus. 

fancy,  opinor}  {late. 

far,  by  far,  longe ;  far  and  wide, 

farewell,  vale. 

fate,  fatum,  i ;  For  tuna,  ae. 

father,  pater,  tris ;  parens,  tis  ; 
of  the  fathers,  patrius. 


fatigue,  labor,  oris  (m.). 

fault,  culpa,  ae. 

favor  (v  ),faveo?favi,  fautiun. 

favor  (n.),  beneficium,  i. 

favorable,  secundus  j  prove  — , 
bene  succedere. 

fear  (v.),  timeo?  metuo? vereor* 

fear  (n.),  timor,  oris  j  metus,  us. 

feeble,  exiguus. 

feel,  sentio,4  sensij  adficior  (with 
abl.). 

fellow,  vir,  viri. 

ferment,  agitatio,  tumultus. 

fervor,  studium,  i. 

festival,  festus  dies. 

few,  aliquot,  pauci,  ae,  a. 

field,  ager,  gri  (m.),  arvum,  i. 

fierce,  acer,  feroxj  fiercely  dis- 
puted victory,  acerrimis  pug- 
nis  paria  victoria. 

fig,  or 

fig-tree,  fi cu s ,  i  (f.). 

fight  (v.),  pugno ;  —  a  battle, 
committere  proelium. 

fight  (n.),  pugna,  ae. 

figure,  species,  ei  (¥.),  statura. 

fill,  compleo,  i?npleo? 

find,  invenio*  video? 

finish,  per  ago. z 

fire,  ignis,  is  (m.). 

firm,  firmus. 

first,  prim  tis  ;  at  — ,  primo;  (be- 
forehand),  ante. 

fitting,  to  be,  decere. 

&2L,figO.Z 

flame,  flamnia,  ae  (f.),  ignis,  is 

(m.). 
flee,  fugio,z  fugi ;  confugio. 
fleet,  classis,  is  (f.). 
flight, /oga,  ae. 
flock,  pecus,  oris  (n.). 


98 


Latin  Co?nfiosition , 


flog,  fustibus  caedere  or  virgis. 

flow,  flu o,A  xi,  xum. 

foe,  host  is,  is  (c). 

fold,  si  tuts,  us  (m.). 

follow,  seqi/or,3  insequor,  imitor. 

follower,  comes,  itis. 

food,  cibus,  i  (m.).  —  foot,  pes. 

foot,  of  hill,  imus  collis;  —  (in- 
fantry), pedes,  itis  (pi.). 

for  (prep.),  pro  (abl.) ;  often 
expressed  by  dative  (§  51, 
7.  r.),  or  by  ace.  of  place. 

for,  nam,  enim,  etenim  (§  43,  3. 
d)  ;  (instead  ot),  in  loco. 

forbid,  veto}  ui. 

forces,  copiae,  arum. 

forest,  silva,  ae. 

forfend:  heaven  — ,  di  omen 
avertant. 

forget,  obliviscor,3  oblitus  (§  50, 
4.  a). 

forgetting,  oblitus  (gen.). 

forgive,  ignosco,3  novi. 

fork,  /urea,  ae. 

form  (v.),facio,  capio.s 

form  (n.),  forma,  aej  (political) 
institutum,  i. 

former  (the),  ille,  a,  ud. 

forsaken,  desertus. 

forth :  to  go  — ,  egredi. 

fortify,  munio.* 

fortitude,  fortitu do,  inis  (F.). 

fortress,  castellum,  i  (n.). 

fortune,  for  tuna. 

forum,  forum,  i. 

forward :  to  come,  exsistere. 

found,  condo,3  didi;  to  —  a  col- 
ony at,  coloniam  deducere 
(with  ace.  of  name  of  town). 

franchise,  civitas,  atis  (f.),  jus, 
juris  (n.). 


free,  liber,  era,  umj  —  (as  a 
gift),  gratuitus;  —  town,  mu- 
nicipium;  freedom,  liber tas. 

friend,  amicus,  ij  intimate — , 
familiaris. 

friendly,  to  be,faveo,2favi. 

friendship,  amicitia,  ae. 

fringe,  praetexo3  ui. 

from  (out  of),  ex ;  (away  from), 
ab;  (by  reason  of),  propter 
(see  p.  33). 

frugal,  parcus. 

frugally,  frugaliter. 

fruit,  fructus,  us. 

full,  plenus;  —  measure,  summus 

fully,  bene,  plane. 

function,  munus,  eris  (n.). 

furious,  ferox,  ocis. 

further  (adj.),  reliquus. 

fury,  saevitia,  ae,  furor,   oris 

(M.). 

future,  futurus. 

G. 

Gabinian  law,  Gabinia  lex. 
gain   (v.),  pario,3  peperi,   par- 

turn  ;  sibi  conciliare. 
gain  (n.),  quaestus,  us. 
gain  over,  concilio} 
gallant,  fortissitnus. 
galley,  navis,  is  (f.). 
games,  ludi,  orum. 
gap,  hiatus,  us  (m.). 
garment,  vestis,  is  (f.). 
gate,  janua,  porta,  ae  (f.). 
gather,  carpo,3  psi. 
Gaul    (the    land),    Gallia,    aej 

(the  people),  Galli,  orum. 
gay,  laetus. 
general  (n.),  imperator,  oris. 


Vocabulary. 


99 


generally,  fere    (see    u  men "), 

VUlgO. 

genius  (intellect),  ingenium,  i. 

German,  Germanus. 

get,  adipiscor;  —  away,  effugio. 

getting  round,  circumfusi. 

gift,  donu?n,  ij  munus,  eris. 

gifts,  bona,  orum. 

gigantic,  ingens,  lis,  immanis,  e. 

give,  do,1  dedi,  datum;  tribuo,3 
adhibeo ;  2  —  back,  reddoj 3  — 
up,  depono  j  —  place,  cedo3 
cessi;  —  to  one's  self  ,sumo? 

glory  (v.),  glorior.1 

glory  (n.),  gloria,  ae,  laus,  dis 
(f.),  decus,  oris  (N.),fama,  ae. 

go,  eo,  ire,  ivi,  itum;  pro  cedo? 
iter  facio;3  —  on  behind, 
sequor;3  —  out,  egredi3  ex- 
cedo3  exire ;  —  up  to,  adire, 
accedere;  so  goes,  ita  se  ha- 
bet. 

goat,  caper,  pri  (m.). 

god,  dens,  i  (§  10,  4.  /). 

good,  bonus  ;  make  — ,  compen- 
sare ;  be  —  for,  convenire 
(dat.). 

goodness,  virtus,  utis  (f.). 

governor,  praefectus,  i. 

grandson,  nepos,  otis. 

gratitude,  occasion  of,  gratum, 
res  grata. 

great,  magmis,  itnmanis. 

greatly,  multumj  so  — ,  tantum, 
magnijice. 

Grecian,  Greek,  Graecus. 

greeting,  salutatio,  onis  (f.). 

grief,  luctus,  us  (m.)  ;  dolor,  oris, 

(M.). 

groan,  gemitus,  its  (m.). 
gross,  gravis,  e. 


ground,  terra;  on  the  — ,  humi. 

group,  agmen,  inis  (n.). 

grow  up,  adolesco,3  evij  —  out, 

provenio.A 
guard  (n.),  custos,  odis. 
gust,  flatus,  iis  (m.). 


habitation,  domicilium,  I. 

hail,  appello.1 

hall,  aula,  ae. 

halt,  consisto? 

hand,  manus,  us  (f.)  ;  holding 
in  — ,  ipse  manu  tenensj 
(power),  potestas,  atis  (f.) 

Hannibal,  Hannibal,  dlis. 

happen,  accido,3  evenio. 

happiness,  felicitas,  atis  (f.). 

happy,  felix,  icis. 

harbinger,  praenuntia,  ae. 

harbor,  portus,  iis  (m.). 

hardship,  labor,  oris  (m.). 

hardy,  durus. 

harsh    treatment,    crudelitas, 
atis  (¥.). 

Hasdrubal,  Hasdrubal,  dlis. 

hasten,  propero.1 

hastily,  temere. 

hateful,  odiosus. 

hatred,  odium,  i. 

haughty,  arrogans,  tis. 

have,  habeo?  ui,  itum ;  (take  to 
one's  self),  adhibeo 2  (see  p.  84). 

head  (n.),  caput ,  itis  (n.). 

head-quarters,  castra  ;  appoint- 
ed to — ,  praefectus,  with  gen. 

health  (state  of),  valetudo,  inis 

(F.). 

hear,  audio.4. 


IOO 


Latin   Composition, 


heart,  animus,  i. 

heat,  calor,  oris  (m.). 

heaven,  caelum,  i. 

heifer,  juvenca,  ae. 

heir,  heres,  edis. 

help,  auxilium,  i. 

herald,  fetialis,  is. 

herdsman,  pastor,  oris. 

here,  hie  J  —  and  there,  passim. 

hereditary,  paternus. 

heritage,  hereditas,  atis  (f.). 

Hesiod,  Hesiodus,  i. 

high,  alius,  excelsus. 

highest,  smnmus,  maximus. 

hill,  mons,  collis  (m.). 

hinder,  impedio* 

hindrance,    impedhnentum,    i 

(N,). 

his    (of   his),    ejus;    reflexive, 

suus. 
history,  historia,  ae. 
hold,  teneo  y2  —  out,  propono. 
holiday,  dies  f est  us. 
home,  domus,  iis ;  domicilium, 

i;  at  — ,  domi. 
Homer,  Ho?ncrus,  i. 
honest  men,  boni,  orum. 
honesty,  probitas,  atis  (f.). 
honey,  mel,  mellis  (n.). 
honor  (v.),  colo?  ui,  cultum. 
honor    (n.),   decusy   oris   (n.)  ; 

honor,    oris    (m.)  ;    dignitas, 

atis  (f.)  ;  with  — ,  hones te. 
honorable,  honorifiens. 
hope  (n.),  spes,  spei(F.) ;  voiwn,  i. 
hopeless,  inutilis,  e. 
Horace,  Horatius,  i. 
Horatian,  Horatius. 
horn,  cornu,  us  (n.). 
horse,   equus,   i ;   war-horse, 

equus  militaris. 


hostile  (of  the  enemy),  hostilis, 
ej  (actively  hostile),  infensus. 

hostilities,  bellum. 

hour,  hora,  ae ;  in  an  — ,  me- 
mento temp  or  is. 

house,  domus,  us  (f.). 

how,  quamj  —  much,  quantum, 
quantoj  interrog.,  quomodo. 

however,  tamen,  vero,  quam- 
visj  — large,  quantum  vis. 

human,  humanus. 

humble,  humilis,  demissus. 

humbled,  fr actus. 

humiliation,  molestia,  ae. 

humility,  with,  demissis  verbis. 

hunger,  fames,  is  (f.). 

hunter,  venator,  oris. 

hurry  (v.),  propero.1 

hurtful,  to  be,  noceo,2  ui. 

husband,  maritus,  i. 


I,  ego;  I  for  my  part,  ego  vero 

(or  equidem). 
ides,  idus,  uum  (§  84). 
idleness,  socordia,  ae.  —  if,  si. 
ignorance,  inscitia,  ae. 
ignorant,  ignarus. 
ill,  male. 

illustrious,  darns,  praeclarus. 
Illyrians,  Illyrii,  orum. 
image,  imago,  inis  {¥.). 
imitate,  imitor} 
imitation,   imitatio,  onis  (f.). 
immediately,  statim,  illico. 
immortal,  sempitemtts,  immor- 
immovable,  immobilis.      [talis. 
impart,  communico  *  cum. 
impatient,  impatiens,  tis. 


Vocabulary, 


ipi 


impend,  i?npendeo? 

implore,  oro.1 

important,  pot  ens,  tis. 

impression,  see  memory. 

improper,  minus  aptus. 

in,  in,  de  (abl.). 

increase    (v.   a.),  adaugeo*  xi, 

ctutn  (in  neut.  sense,  use  pas- 
sive). 
increasing,  major,  us. 
indeed,  quidem. 
independence,  libertas,  atis  (f.). 
indifference    to,    contemptio, 

onis  (f.)  (with  gen.). 
indignation,  ha,  ae,  hidignatio, 

onis  (F.). 
indolence,  ig?iavia,  ae. 
induce,  iuduco.3 
infamous,  turpis,  e,  nefandus. 
infamy,  ignominia,  ae. 
inferior,  inferior,  us. 
infinite,  summits. 
inflict  death  on,  morte  multare. 
influence,  to  have,  gratia  valeo} 
influenced,  adfectus. 
inform,  certiorem  facio. 
inhabit,  habito} 
inherit,  accipio3 
inheritance,  hereditas,  atis  (f.). 
injury,  injuria,  ae ;  do  no  — , 

nihil  nocere  (dat.). 
insolently,  insolenter. 
inspiration,  spiritus,  afflatus. 
inspire,  animum  dare  ;  may  the 

gods  — ,  di  duint. 
instance,  for,  quidem. 
instantly,  staiim. 
instead   of,  pro  (abl.);   in  loco 

(with  gen.). 
instil,  instillo  J  (ace.  and  dat.). 
institute,  constituo3  instituo.3 


instructed,  ceriior /actus. 

insult  (n.),  contumelia,  ae. 

insurgents,  use  seditio. 

intelligence,  intehigentia,  ae. 

intend,  in  animo  esse  {habere). 

intention,  consilium,  i. 

intercede,  deprecor.1 

interest,  to  be  one's  — ,  inter 
esse  (gen.  §  50,  4.  d). 

interests,  utilitates  et  commoda. 

interregnum,  inter?-egnum,  i. 

interrupt,   interrumpo?  rupi. 

interval,  te?npus,  oris  (n.). 

intimate  (adj.  or  noun),  famili- 
ar is,  is. 

into,  in  (ace). 

intolerable,  intolerabilis,  e. 

introduce,  induco,8  duxi. 

invade,  invado3  si,  sum. 

invaders,  hostes  inrumpentes. 

invasion,  inruptio,  onis  (f.). 

invent,  invenio.* 

invention,  inventa,  orrwt  (n.). 

inventor,  inve?itor,  ton's  (m.). 

inventress,    invenirix,    tricis 

(F.). 

inviolable,  inviolatus . 
invite,  invito,1  oro.x 
irritated,  moleste  fere?is. 
island,  insula,  ae. 
Italian,  Italicus. 
Italy,  Italia,  ae. 
ivory,  ebur,  oris  (n.)  ;  of  ivory, 
eburneus. 


J. 


jealous,  invidus  (gen.). 
jealousy,  invidia,  ae. 
jest,  jocus,  ij  pl.joca. 


102 


Latin   Composition. 


join  in,  accedere  ad,  jungere  se 

(dat.)  ;    in   a   military  sense, 

militare  cum  aliquo. 
joined  to,  conjunctus  cum. 
3°y»  gaudium,  i.  [tri. 

judge  (n.),  judex,  Zeis,  arbiter, 
judicial  power,  judicium,  i. 
Jugurtha,  Jugurtha,  ae ;  (adj.), 

Jugurthinus. 
Julian  (adj.),  Julius,  a,  um. 
Jupiter,  Juppiter,  Jovis. 
just,  Justus. 

just  now,  nunc  maxime. 
justice,  aequitas,  tatisjjustitia, 

ae. 


keep,  servo; x  —  silence,  taceo? 
kill,  interjicio,3  occldo? 
kind,  comis,  e,  benevolus. 
kindle,  incendo? 
kindly,  comiter,  blande. 
kindness,   benejicium,   i ;  as  a 

quality,  comiias,  facililas,  at  is 

(f.),  benevolentia,  ae. 
king,'rur,  regis;  (adj.),  regius. 
kingdom,  ngnuin,  i. 
knee,  genu,  us  (n.). 
knife,  cultellus,  i. 
knight,  eques,  His. 
know,  scio,*  nosco,3  novi ;  intel- 

lego  ; 3  (be  aware),  sentio.4 
knowledge,  scientia,  ae. 


labor,  labor,  oris  (m  ). 
lake,  lacus,  us  (m.). 
lament,  moleste  ferre. 


lamp,  lucema,  ae. 
land,  terra,  ae. 

language,  oratio,  onis ;  verba. 
large,  magnus. 
lasting,  diuturnus. 
last,  duro.1 

last  (adj.),  ultimus;  at  — ,  tan- 
dem, extremum. 
lastly,  denique. 
latest,  supremus. 
lastly,  denique. 
Latium  (of),  Latinus,  a,  um. 
latter  (the),  hie,  haec,  hoc  (see 

P.  13). 
law,  lex,  legis  (f.). 
lay,  impono;  8 —  hand  on,  tango. 
lay  hold,  teneo?  tango? 
lay  down,  deponere. 
lead  (v.),  duco,3  adduco3  duxi, 

ductum  ;  —  away,  abduco.3 
leader,  dux,  ducis. 
leap  into,  insilio,4  ui;  —  over, 

transilio,4  ui. 
learn,  disco,3  didici. 
learned,  doctus.— at  least,  saltern. 
leathern,  ex  pel  lib  us  /actus. 
leave,  relinquo,8  liqui;  (go  from), 

egredi;  (proceed),  projicisci. 
left  (hand),  sinistra,  ae. 
legion,  legio,  onis  (f). 
length,  at,  tandem,  nunc  demum. 
less,  inferior,  us j  minus. 
let  i3l\ude7?iittere. 
let  loose,  libero.1 
lethargy,  stupor,  oris  (m.). 
letter,  epistola  (ula),  ae. 
levy,  conscribo? 
liar,  mendax,  acts. 
libation,  libamentum,  i. 
liberate,  libero} 
liberator,  liberator,  torts. 


Vocabulary . 


103 


liberty,  libertas,  tat  is  (f.). 

liberties,  jura  (n.). 

Libyan,  Libycus. 

liefaceo,*  ui;  —  upon,  esse  (gen.). 

life,  vita,  ae ;  in  the  life-time  of, 

lift,  lollo,3  sustuli.   [vivus  (abl.). 

light  (adj.),  lev  is,  e. 

lighted   (illuminated),   inlustra- 

tus ;  (kindled),  accensus. 
like   (adj.),   similis,   e  (gen.  or 

dat.) ;  (adv.),  velut,  ut. 
lineage,  genus,  eris. 
linger,  moror.1 
lion,  leo,  onis  (m.). 
listen  (to),  audio.* 
literature,  litterae,  arum. 
little,  paulum;    how  —  (adv.), 

qua??i  11011  j  distance,  paulum. 
live  (v.),  vivo,8  vixij  habito.1 
long,     longus,     diuturnus ;    — 

since,  jamdudum ;  as  —  as, 

quamdiu  ;  no  longer,  nonjam. 
look  out,  prospicioj  like,  videor. 
loose  (let),  libero,x  emitto* 
loquacious,  loquax,  acis. 
lord,    doi7iinus,    ij    to    be  — , 

potior x  (gen.  §  54,6.  d). 
lose,  amitto? 
loss,  detrimentum,  i. 
loudly,  vehementer. 
love  (n.),  amor,  oris  (m.)  ;  cari- 

tas,  at  is  (f.)  ;  lover,  amans. 
lower,  inferior,  us. 
lust,  cupido,  in  is  (f.). 
luxuriously,  luxuriose. 


M. 

Macedonian,    Macedo7iicus ;   a 
Macedonian,    Macedo,  dnis. 


mad  scheme  or  conduct,furor. 
magnitude,  magnitude 
magistrate,  magistratus,  us. 
maintain,  defendo? 
make,  facio,8  conficio ;  reddo;* 

—  good,  compenso;  l    —  way, 

cedoj  3  —  for  (seek),  peto? 
man,   homo,    inis,    vir,   i  (m.)  ; 

men  generally,   magna  pars 

hominiun;  a  man  who,  is  qui. 
manner,  mos,  moris  (m.). 
many,   multi,  plurimij  so  — , 

tot ;  very  — ,  plerique. 
March,  (of),  Martins. 
march  (v.),  proficiscor?  profec- 

tus ;  progredior? gressus  j  iter 

facere. 
march  (n.),  iter,  itineris  (n.). 
mariner,  nauta. — margin,  ora. 
market-place,  forum,  i. 
marriage,  matrimonium,  i;  — 

with,  conubiumj  to  give  in  — , 

nuptum  dare. 
marry  (of  the  man),  duco,3  duxi 

(sc.  in  matrimonium,  or  uxo- 

rem  in  appos.) ;  of  the  woman, 

nubo*  nupsi  (with  dat.). 
Mars,  Mars,  Martis. 
Marsian,  Marsus. 
martial,  bellicus. 
marvellous,  minis. 
mask,  persona,  ae. 
mass  (of  troops),  caterva,  ae. 
massacre  (v.),  trucido} 
massacre  (n.),  caedes,  is;  truci- 

datio  avium. 
master,  dominus,  i. 
matron,  matrona,  ae. 
may,  licet  (impers.),  possum. 
mean-time,  interea ;  means,  opes 
measure,  consilium,  *'(n.). 


104 


Lathi  Composition. 


mediation,  deprecatio,  onis  (f.). 

meet,  occurro?  nanciscor,3  nac- 
tus,  invenio.* 

memorable,  memorabilis,  e. 

memory,  ?nemoria,  ae  ;  our 
memories  excited  by  our  im- 
pressions, animis  memoria 
plenis  recenti  earum  rerum 
quas  sensibus  percepi?nus. 

men  (soldiers),  milites,  um. 

menial,  servus,  i. 

mercy,  dementia,  ae. 

merit,  virtus,  utis  (f.). 

message,  ?nandatum,  i. 

midst  of,  medius. 

mighty,  magnus  ille. 

might,  possim  (subj.). 

Milan,  Mediolanum,  i. 

military,  bellicus,  militarise  e. 

mind,  mens,  tisj  animus,  i. 

mine,  cuniculi,  orum. 

mingle,  misceor* 

misery,  miseria,  ae. 

misuse,  pravus  usus. 

Mithridatic,  Mithridaticus. 

model,  exemplum,  i. 

moderate,  modicus. 

modern,  hodiernus. 

monarchy,  imperium,  i. 

money,  pecunia,  ae. 

monstrous,  immanis,  e. 

monument,  monumentum. 

morass,  pa/us,  udis  (f). 

more,  plus,  ampiius,  magis. 

morning,  in  the  — ,  mane  (n.)  ; 
(adj.),  matutinus. 

morrow,  posterus  dies. 

mortal,  mortalis,  e. 

most  (men),  plerique ;  (adv.), 
maxime. 

mother,  mater.  —  motive,  causa. 


mountain,  mons,  tis  (m.)  ;  (adj.), 

montanus. 
mountaineer,  montamis. 
mourning,  luctus,  its  (m.). 
mouth,  os,  oris  (n.)  ;  of  river, 

ostium,  i. 
move,  moveo,2  movi. 
moved,  permotus. 
movement,  motus,  us  (m.). 
moving,  incedens,  tis. 
much,  multum,  multo,  magni. 
multiply,  multiplico} 
multitude,  multittido,  inis  (f.). 
Mulvian,  Mulvius. 
municipal  law,  jus  civile. 
murder  (v.),  occido?  trucido.1 
murder  (n.),  caedes,  is. 
mutter,  summissa  voce  dicere. 
my,  meus,  a,  um  (voc.  M.  mi). 
myself,  ego  (ipse). 
mysterious,  secrelus. 


N. 


name  (appoint),  creo.1 

name,  nomen;  in  the  — ,  verbis. 

narrow,  tenuis,  e  j  angustus,  a, 

umj  narrow  pass,  angustiae. 
nation,  gens,  tis;  nalio,  onis. 
nature,  natura,  ae. 
naval,  navalis,  e. 
near,  vicinus ;  (prep.),  prope ; 

(adv.),  juxta,   haud  procul ; 

nearest  relatives,  proxi?ni. 
nearly,  paene.  [i.  d). 

necessary,  opus  (in  pred.  §  54, 
need,  requiro ; 3  to  have  — ,  opus 

esse  (dat.  and  abl.) ;  to  be  in 

— ,  egere. 


Vocabulary. 


i°5 


neglect,  neglego? 

negligence  (act  of),  delictum,  i. 

neighbor,  vicinus,  Jinitimus,  a, 
uni. 

neighborhood,  vicinia,  ae,  vi- 
cinum,  i. 

negligence,  negligentia,  ae. 

nest,  ?iidus,  i  (m.). 

never,  nujiquam. 

nevertheless,  nihilo  minus. 

new,  novus. 

next    (of    two),   posterus ;    of 
several,  proximus.        \noctu. 

night,   nox,  noctis  (f.)  ;  at  — , 

no  (adj.),  nullus  ;  (adv.),  nihil. 

nobility,  nobilitas,  atis  (f.). 

noble,  nobilis,  e  (to  emphasize 
quality,  use  superlative) ;  no- 
bles (as  a  party),  nobilitas. 

noblest,  summus. 

not,  non;  as  question,  nonne ; 
—  to,  nej  if — ,  si  minus. 

nothing,  nihil,  nee  quicquam. 

now,  nunc;  (already), /#////  (of 
past  time),  turn;  (emph.),  hie 
nunc ;  (at  this  age),  hoc  aetatis. 

number,    numerus,    ij    great 
numbers,  multitudo. 

numerous,  magnus. 

Numidian,  Numida,  ae. 


O. 

oath,  jusjurandum  (§  14,  2.  d). 

obedience,  obedientia ;  uncon- 
ditional — ,  obed.  omnium  re- 
rum. 

obey,  ftareo?  ui,  itum. 

object,  causa,  ae;  (definite)  con- 
silium, i. 


obliged,  coactus  (part,  of  cogo). 
observe,  animadverto? 
obstacle,  difficultas. 
obtain,   adsequor,    consequor,3 

secutus  ;  adipiscor*  adept  us. 
occasion,  occasio,  tempus. 
occux,  Jio,Jieri,  /actus. 
ocean,  oceanus,  i  (m.). 
odious,  invisus. 
of,  usually  expressed  by  gen.  or 

possessive  (see  p<  35). 
offensive,  odiosus. 
offer  (v.),  offerre,  polliceri,  prae- 

stare,  imponere. 
offer  (n.),  condicio,  on  is  (f.). 
office,  magistratus,  us;  dignitas 
officer,  praefectus,  i. 
often,  saepe. 
oil,  olemn,  i. 

old,  vetus,  erisj  (of  age),  natus 
old  age,  senectus,  tutis  (f.). 
old  man,  senex,  senis. 
older,  ?najor. 
omen,  omen,  inis  (n.). 
on,  in  (abl.) ;  — ,  de.  [sus. 

once,  quondam;  —  more,  rur- 
one,   unus  (gen.    ius);    the  — 

.    .    .    the    other,    alter  .   .    . 

alter.  —  at  once,  stathn. 
only    (adj.),   solus    (gen.    ius), 

unicus;  (adv.),  modo,  solum, 

tantum. 
onset,  impetus,  us  (m.). 
open  (v.),  recludo,3  si,  sum. 
opinion,  sententia,  ae. 
opportunity  (favorable),  occasio, 

on  is. 
oppose,  resisto,8  stiti. 
opposed,  contrarius ;  —  in  war, 

adversus  aliquem  pugjiare. 
opposite,  contra,  alter,  a,  um. 


io6 


Latin   Composition , 


opposition  (p.  44) ,  vis. 
oppression   in   one's   province, 

repetundae. 
oppressive,  gravis,  e. 
or,  aut,  velj  (as  altern.)  an,  -ne 

(§  71,  2). 
oracle,  oraculum,  i. 
oration,  oratio,  onis  (f.). 
orator,  orator,  oris ;  (adj.),  ora- 
tor ius. 
order  (v.),  jubeo,2  jus  si. 
order,  mandatum,  ij  by  —  of, 

jussu;  (rank),  ordo,  inis. 
other,   alius,   a,   udj  (of   two), 

alter ;  the  — ,  ceteri,  reliquij 

some  — ,  aliquis. 
ought,   debeo,2  op  or  let  (impers. 

with  ace). 
our,  noster,  tra,  trum. 
out,  ex  (in  compos.), 
outlive  (to  have),  supers tes  esse. 
outside  (prep.),  extra. 
over,  supra,   trans  (ace.) 
overcome,  supero.x 
overflowed,  superfusus. 
overhear,  excipio.z 
overflow,  overrun,  se  effundere 

per  (ace). 
overturned,  eversus. 
overwhelmed,  confectus. 
owe,  debeo?  ui. 
own  (often  omitted),  gen.  of  ipse 

in    appos.    with    possessive ; 

proprius. 


painstaking,  diligentia,  ae. 
Palatine,  Palaiinus,  i. 
palm-tree,  pahna,  ae. 


Pamphylia,   Painphylia,   ae; 

(ad j . ),  Pamphyliensis. 
pang,  dolor,  oris  (m.). 
pardon  (v.),  ignosco,  novi (dat). 
pardon  (n.),  venia,  ae. 
parent,  parens,  tis. 
part,  pars,  tis(F.),  (meaning  duty, 

&c,  use  plur.)  ;  for  the  most 

— ,  ?nagna  ex  parte. 
partisan,  fautor,  oris. 
partly,  aliqua  {magna)  ex  parte. 
party,  pars,  tis  (f.)  (generally 

plur.) ;  f actio,  onis. 
pass   a  law,   legem  ferre;    — 

over,    supe7'o,x    praetergredi, 

praeterferri ;  (time),  ago? 
passion    (for),   cupiditas,    a  tis 

(f.)  (gen.) ;  passions,  pertur- 

bationes  animi. 
patience,  patientia,  ae. 
patrician,  patricius. 
patron,  patronus,  i. 
pay,  solvo? 
peace,  pax,  pads ;  in  — ,  con- 

cors,  dis. 
peaceful,  quietus. 
peculiar,  proprius. 
Penates,  Penates,  ium  (m.). 
penetrate,  penetro} 
peninsula,  peninsula,  ae. 
people,  populus,  i  (m.),  plebs,  is 

(f.),  homines. 
perfection,  in,  perfecte. 
perform,  ago,3  fungor.3 
peril,  periculum,  i. 
perish,  pereo,  ire,  ii. 
perpetual,  sempiternus. 
Perses,  Perses,  is. 
persuade,    persuadeo  2    (dat ) ; 

friendly    persuasion,     arnica 

verba. 


Vocabulary. 


107 


Fharsalus,  Pharsa7us,  i;  (adj.), 

Pharsalicus. 
Philip,  Philippics,  i. 
Philometcr,    Phi  to  me  tor,    oris, 

ace.  ora. 
philosopher, philosophus,  i. 
Physcon,  Physcon,  onis. 
pilgrim,  peregrinator,  oris. 
pillar,  columna,  ae. 
pipe,  tibia,  ae. 
pirate,  firaedo,  onis. 
pity  (v.),  have  —  on,  ?nisereor  2 

(gen.  person). 
place  (v.),  impono*  depono /*  — 
at  the  head,  praepono  3  (dat.). 
place   (n.),  locus,  ij   pi.  loca, 

orum. 
play  (on  instrument),  canoj 3  — 

a  part,  partes  agere. 
player,  histrio,  onis. 
pleasant,  commodus. 
please,  placeo?  ui,  itumj  (wish), 

volo. 
pleasure,  voluptas,  atis  (f.). 
pleasure-grounds,    horti    deli- 

cati. 
plebeian,  plebeius. 
pledge,  polliceor.* 
plot,  conjuratio,  onis  (f.). 
plunder,  praeda,  ae. 
plunge,  i?iicio,z  jeci. 
poet,  poeta,  ae  (m.). 
poetry,  versus,  tmtn  (plur.  M.). 
point  out,  indico.1 
poison,  venenum,  i. 
polished,  excultus. 
pollution,  violare  (ger.  p.  69). 
Pompey,  Pompeius,  ij    (adj.), 

-anus. 
poor,  miser,  era,  unij  pauper, 
eris. 


populace,  vulgus,  *  (n.). 

population,  multitudo  homi- 
num. 

position,  locus,  i  (pi.  loca). 

possession,  possessio,  onis,  ager, 
gri.  —  posterity,  posteri  (pi.). 

posted,  collocatus. 

pour  (neut.),  sefundere. 

poverty,  egestas,  atis  (f.) 

power,  potestas,  atis  (f.)  ;  (do- 
minion), imperium,  i  (n.)  ; 
potent ia,  ae  (f.). 

powerful,  potens,  lis. 

praise  (v.),  laudo.1 

praise  (n.),  laus,  dis  (f.). 

pray,  precor.1 

prayer,  carmen  precationis. 

precede,  anteeo,  ire. 

prediction,  vaticinatio,  onis  (f.). 

preparations,  to  make  military 
— ,  copias  parare. 

prepare  (a  way),  munio.4, 

prepared,  paratus. 

present  (n.),  munus,  eris  (n.). 

present  (adj.),  praesens,  lis. 

preserve,  conservo.1 

preserver,  conservator,  oris. 

prevail,  vinco? 

prevent,  imped™.* 

priest,  sacerdos,  oiis,  pontifex, 
icis. 

principal,  maximus. 

prison,  career,  eris  (m.). 

prisoner,  captivus,  i. 

private  (citizen),  privatus,  i, 

privation,  inopia  omnium  re- 
rum. 

prize,  praemium,  i. 

proceed,  progredior* 

produce,  efficio? 

professed,  apertus. 


io8 


L at  in   Composition , 


professions  (verbal),  verba,  pro- 
missa. 

profit  (v.),  fructum  capere. 

profligacy,  Jlagitia,  orum. 

promise  (v.),  promitto?  polli- 
ceor,*  itus;  edico.3 

promise  (n.),  promissum,  i. 

promontory,  promuntorium,  i. 

proof,  testimonium,  i. 

property,  bona,  orum. 

propose,  fero,ferre  (of  a  law). 

proscribe,  proscribo*  [(f.). 

proscription,   proscriptio,   onis 

prosecute,  persequor* 

prospect  (in),  ante  oculos. 

prostrate,  prostratus. 

proud,  superbus. 

proudly,  superbe. 

prove  (try),  experior.k 

province,  provincia,  ae. 

provision,  to  make,  provideo."1 

provisions,  commeatiis,  uu?n. 

public,  publicus. 

Punic,  Punicus. 

purchase,  emo,z  emi,  emptum. 

pure,  purus. 

purple,  purpureus.  [ — ,  qua  re. 

purpose,  consilium,  i;  for  what 

pursue,  persequor; 3  celeriter  ad 
consectandtan,  in  hot  pursuit. 

push  (against),  trudo.z 

put,  pono?  posui,  positum ;  — 
an  end  to,  finio ; 4  —  to  death, 
interficio  ; 3  —  off  (shore),  sol- 
vere navem. 


quaestor,  quaestor,  oris. 
quality  (good),  virtus,  utis  (f.). 


quarter  (district),  vicus,  i  (m.). 

quickly,  celeriter. 

quiet,  quies,  etis  (F.). 

quiet,  quietus,  placidus j  remain 
— ,  quies co?  evi. 

quietly,  quiete. 

quit,  relinquo?  reliqui. 

quite,  admodum. 

quoth,  inquit  (after  the  first 
word  or  words  of  the  quota- 
tion). 

R. 

rage,  ira. 

raging,  iratus,furens,  tis. 

rags,  squalor,  oris  (m.). 

raise,  tollo,8  sustuli,  sublatum. 

rank,  ordo,  inis  (m.). 

rascal,  improbus,  i. 

rather,  potius. 

reach,  mantis,  uum  (f.). 

read  (aloud),  7'ecito.1 

reader,  lector,  oris. 

ready,  paratus  ad. 

real,  verus. 

reap  (fruit),  capere,  percipere. 

reason,  ratio,  onis  (f.),  res,  rei 

(F.). 

reawaken,  denuo  conciio.1 

recall,  revoco} 

receive,  accipio*  (excipio),  cepi, 

ceptum. 
recognize,  agnosco,3  novi;  (hold 

valid),  ratum  (justum)  habere. 
recollection,  recordatio. 
recommend,  com?jiendo} 
recommendation,     commenda- 

tio,  onis  (f.). 
recompense,  to  make,  compen- 

sare. 
recount,  memoro,  commemoro} 


Vocabulary, 


109 


recourse,  to  have,  se  conferre 

ad. 
recover,  recupero?- 
recovering,  experrectus  (p.  65). 
redeem,  compenso.1 
reed,  arundo,  inis  (f.) 
reedy,  arundinibus  praetextus. 
refinement,  humanitas,  atis{¥.). 
refuge,  perfugium,  i;  take  — , 

confugio* 
refusal,  recusatio,  onis. 
refuse,  recuso} 
regain,  recipio* 
regard    (think),    exist! mo ;  y  — 

for,  studium  (gen.)  ;  pay  — , 

rationem  habere,  respicere;  re- 
regret,  dolor,  oris,     [gardin^,  de. 
reign  (v.),  regno.1 
reign  (n.),  regnum,  i. 
reject,  recuso,1  eieio,3  jeci. 
relation,  to  bear,  atiineo* 
relative,  propinquus. 
relief,  opts  (gen.),  e?n  (f.). 
rely  on,  confido 3  (dat.  or  abl.). 
relying,  fretus  (abl.). 
remain,  ma7ieo?  mansi. 
remainder    of,    remaining,    re- 

liqaus. 
remark,  animadverto? 
remarkable,  insignis,  e. 
remember,  recordor1  (§  50,  4. 

a,  R.). 
remembrance,  recordatio,  onis. 
remind,  moneo?  ui,  itum. 
remnant,  reliquiae,  arum. 
remote,  ultimus. 
remove,  averto?  amoveo.2 
renounce  (allegiance  to),  impe- 

rium  abicere. 
renovate,  renovo.x 
renown,  laus,  dis  (f.). 


repay  (a  kindness),  referre. 
repent,  paenitet. 
repeat,  iterum  with  verb, 
reply,  respondeo?  di,  sum, 
reply,  responsum,  i. 
report,  nuntio,1  dico.s 
represented,  expressus. 
representative,  exemplum,  i. 
reprisals,  to  make,  compensare. 
republic,  respublica  (§  14,  2.  d.). 
reputation,  fama,  ae. 
require,  postulo.1 
rescue,  servo,1  eripio. 
resentment,  simultas,  atis  (f.), 

iracundia,  ae. 
reserve,   reservo;  l  —  to  one's 

own  use,  sibi  adservare. 
residence,  domicilium,  i. 
resign  (office),  abdicoy1  (power), 

depono? 
resist,  resisto,s  stiti.  \.%^x'\ 

resistance,   contendere   (inf.    or 
resolution,  consilium,  i. 
resolve,  conslituo.3 
rest-of,  reliquus. 
restless,  inquietus. 
restore,    renovo,1   restituo,z 

reddo? 
retire,  abeo,  ire  (abl.). 
return,     revertor,z     regredior,z 

redeo,  respondeo;  on    his   — , 

rediens,  tis ;  —  thanks,  agere 
return  (n.),  reditus,  us.  [gralias. 
revenge,  ultio,  onis  (f.). 
revive    (neuter),    renascorj z 

(trans.),  restituo? 
revolution,  civilis  motus  (m.). 
reward,  praemium,  ij  to  give 

as  — ,  donare. 
rich,  dives,  itis,  opimus. 
riches,  divitiae,  arum. 


no 


Latiri  Composition. 


right,    rectus,   a,    um;    rights, 

jura,   um  (n.)  ;    to  think  — , 

recte  sentire. 
right  hand,  dextra,  ae. 
ring  (signet-ring)',  anulus,  i. 
rise,  orior*  (infin.  oriri),  coorior, 

ortus ;  surgo,z  surrexi. 
rival,  aemulus,  i. 
river,  flumen,  inis  (n.). 
road,  iter,  itineris  (n.). 
rob,  spolio.1 

robe,  toga,  ae,  vestis,  is  (f.). 
roll  (for  writing),  tabellae,  arum. 
Roman,  Romanus. 
Rome,  Roma,  ae;  (as  people), 

Romani j    (as   state),    civitas 

Ro7?iana  (respublica). 
room,  cubiculum,  i.    [radicitus. 
root,  radix,  icisj  —  and  branch, 
rose,  rosa,  ae ;   full  of  roses, 

roseus.  —  round,  circum. 
roving,  vagus. 
royal,  of  royalty,  regius. 
ruin,  exitium,  i. 
rule  over,  impero.x 
ruler,  princeps,  ipis. 
rumor,  rumor,  fama. 
run,  curro*  cucurri. 
rush,  procurroj*  —  upon, 

inruo? 


S. 


Sabine,  Sabinus. 

sacred,  sacer,  era,  um. 

sacrifice,  mac  to.1 

safe,  tutus. 

safety,  salus,  utis  (f.). 

sail  (v.),  navigo.1 

sail  (n.),  velum  j  sailor,  nauta. 


sake :  for  the  —  of,  causa,  fol- 
lowing a  gen. 
sallies  of  wit,  facetiae,  arum. 
same,  idem,  eadem,  idem. 
sanctuary,  aedes,  is. 
satellite,  safeties,  itis. 
satisfied,  contentus. 
savage,  barbarus. 
save,  servo} 
say,  dico,3  aio,  inquam  (Gr.  p. 

81);  absol.  loquor. 
scarcely,  vix. — scanty,  exiguus. 
schooled,  adsuef actus. 
scorn,  ludibrium. 
sea,  ma7'e,  is  (n.)  ;  (adj.),  marinus. 
sea-shore,  or  a,  ae. 
season,  tempus,  oris  (n.). 
seat,  sedes,  is  (f.). 
seated,  sedens,  tis. 
secession,  secessio,  onis  (f.). 
second,  secundus,  alter. 
second  time,  iterum. 
secret,  res  occulta;  —  society, 

sodalitas,  atis  (F.).    - 
secretary,  scriba,  ae  (m.). 
secure  (v.),  occupo.x 
secure :  to  be  — ,  non  dubia?n 

spem  habere  j  to  make  — ,  tu-> 

tiorem  reddere. 
security,  securitas,  atis  (f.) 
sedition,  seditio,  onis  (f.). 
see,  video,2  vidi,  visum. 
seek,  peto?  cupio,%  adpeto.z 
seem,  vidcor?  visus. 
self-same,  idem,  eade7n,  idem* 
seize,   prehendo3    di,    suntj 

eripio.3 
sell,  vendo,3  didi. 
senate,   senatus,  us   (m.)  ;  — 

house,  curia,  ae. 
senator,  senator,  oris;  adj.  -ius. 


Vocabulary. 


in 


send,  mitto,3  mist,  missum. 

sense,  sensus,  tis  (m.). 

sensible,  prudens,  tis. 

sentence,   to   pass,  judicium 
ferre. 

separate,  separo} 

separate  (his  own),  proprius. 

sepulchre,  sepulcrum,  i. 

serious,  gravis,  e. 

seriously,  in  seriiun. 

Seriphus,  Seriphus,  i  (f.)  ;  (adj.), 
Sertphius. 

servant,  servus,  i. 

serve,  servio;x  —  well  or  ill, 
bene  aut  male  rnereri  de. 

servile,  servilis,  e. 

session,  consessus,  us  (but  may- 
be omitted;  as,  in  Senatum 
venire). 

set,  pono ;%  —  on  foot,  incipio,3 
cepi,  ceptufn;  —  out,  prqficis- 
cor?  fectits ;  — sail,  navigo.1 

several,  phi  res,  ium;  singulis 

severe,  severus. 

severely,  saeviter. 

severity,  severitas,  atis  (f.). 

shade,  umbra,  ae. 

shaft,  telum,  jaculum. 

shame,  ignominia,  ae,  dedecus, 
oris  (n.). 

share  (v.),  participo.1 

share  (n.),  pars,  tis  (f.). 

she,  ea,  ilia. 

she-wolf,  lupa,  ae. 

shelter,  lego,3  texi,  tectum,        m 

shepherd,  pastor,  oris. 

ship,  navis,  is  (f.). 

shivered,  pulsus. 

shore,  litus,  oris  (n.)  ;  go  on  — , 
in  terram  egredi. 

short,  brevis,  e. 


^ shortly  after,  paulo  post. 
should,  &c,  see  p.  63. 
show,  demonstro} 
shrink,  abhorreo* 
sick,  to  be,  aegroto} 
sickness  (sea-sickness),  nausea, 

ae. 
side  (party),  pars,  tis  (f.)  ;   on 

the  — ,  a  parte  (often  plural), 
siege,  for  the  siege  of,  ad  oppug- 

nandum. 
sight,  conspectus,  us  (m.),  spec- 

taculmn,  i. 
sign,  signal,  signum,  i. 
signify,  significo.1 
silence,    si  lent  ium,    i;    in    — , 

silentio,  iacite  j    to  keep  — , 

silere,  tacere.  \jncdo. 

simple,      inconditus ;     simply, 
since,  post  (ace.  ;    see  p.  40) ; 

ever  — ,  jam  hide  aj  postea. 
singular,  mirus. 
sister,  soror,  oris. 
sit,  sedeo,2  sedi.  —  situation,  res. 
s  kilf ul,  per  it  us  (ge  n . ) . 
skill,  ars,  artis  (f.). 
slaughter,  caedes,  is  (f.). 
slave,   servus,    i;   to   be  a  — , 

serviojA  —  market,  grex  ve- 

naliiun. 
slay,    inter 'ficio?  feci,  fectwn, 

caedo,s  cecidi,  caesus  j  —  with 

cruelty,  t?-ucido.x 
slayer,  interfector,  oris. 
slight,  parvus. 
sloth,  ignavia,  ae. 
small,  parvus. 
smite,  percutio*  cussi. 
snake,   anguis,  is,  serpens,  tis 

(m.). 
snatch,  eripio3  ui. 


112 


Latin  Composition  < 


so,  sic,  ita ;  —  .  .  as,  ita  .  .  ut, 
tarn  .  .  quamj — many,  tot; 

—  great,  tanius  J  —  that,  adeo 
ut;  will  have  it  so,  sic  velle. 

soldier,  miles,  itis. 

solicitous,  so  I  licit  us. 

solid,  Jirmus. 

some,  aliquid,  nonnullus  (p.  18) ; 

—  thing,  aliquid;  —  time, 
aliquamdiuj  —  times,  inter- 
dum;  — ...  others,  alii. . .  alii. 

son,  filius,  ij in-law,  getter, 

eri. 

song,  carmen,  inis  (n.). 

soon,  brevi  tempore;  (present- 
ly), mox;  —  after,  paulo 
post ;  as  —  as,  ut  primum. 

soothsayer,  haruspex,  icis. 

sorrow,  dolor,  oris  (m.). 

soul,  animus,  ij  anima,  ae. 

sound,  sanus. 

south,  meridionalis  (adj.). 

Spain,  Hispania,  ae;  (adj.), 
Hispanicus. 

spare,  parco,z  peperci;  (refrain), 
temper o.1  Spartan,  Spar t anus. 

speak,  loquor,3  locutus ;  —  of, 
commemoro.1 

spectacle,  spectaculum,  i. 

spectre,  species,  ei  (f.).        [cere- 

speculator,  to  be  a,  quaestumfa- 

speech,  sermo,  onis  (m.). 

spirit,  animus,  i  (m.),  (pi.). 

sport,  lusio,  onis  (f.). 

spot,  locus,  i;  plur.,  loca. 

spring,  ver,  veris  (n.). 

square  (of  a  city),  platea,  ae. 

staff,  baculum,  i. 

stand,  sto;x  steti,  statum;  — 
aside,  de  via  decedere;  — 
(bear),  ferre;  (be),  esse. 


state,  civitas,  atisj  res  publica 

(F.)- 

stately,  procerus. 

statue,  statua,  ae. 

stature,  siatura,  ae. 

steep,  arduus. 

steer,  guber no.1 

step  aside,  decedo.z 

stepmother,  noverca,  ae. 

stick  (n.),fuslis,  is  (m.). 

stifle,  exstinguo? 

still,   etiam   turn,   etiam   nunc, 

adhuc. 
stir  up,  excito.1 
stone,  saxum,  i. 
stop,  moror} 
storm,  violent,  magna  tempes- 

tas. 
story,  fabula,  ae. 
straggle,  vagor.1 
stranded,  in  terram  delatus. 
strange,  novus. 
stream,  Jlumen,  inis  (n.). 
strength,  vires,  ium  (f.). 
strengthen,  confirmo.x 
stretching,  patens,  tis. 
strict,  severus,  exactus. 
strictly,  severe. 
strike, percutio ;  3  —  down,  cae- 

do;z  —  a  blow,  inferre. 
striking  (keen),  argutus. 
stroke,  mulceo?  mulsi. 
strong,  validus. 
stronghold,  praesidium,  i. 
strongly,  vehementer. 
studious,  studiosus. 
stupidity,  stultitia,  ae. 
subject,  to  be,  servire. 
subjects,  cives,  ium. 
submission,  obsequium,  i. 
submit,  se  dedere. 


Vocabulary. 


113 


subterranean,  subterraneus . 

succeed,  succcdo,3  cessi. 

success,     prosperus     eventus, 
successes,    us  (if.). 

successful,  felix,  icis. 

succor  (help),  subvenire  (dat.). 

suckle,  lac  to. x 

such,  talis i  e;  is,  ea,id;  tarn. 

sudden,  subitus.  [subito. 

suddenly  (on  a  sudden),  repente, 

suffer,  fero,  tulij  patior.3 

sufficiency,  satis,     [consciscere. 

suicide,  to  commit,  mortem  sibi 

suit,  convenio.* 

suitable,  idoneus. 

summer,  aestas,  atis  (f.)  ;  (adj.), 
aestivus. 

summit,  summus  mons. 

summon,  co?n>oco.x 

sun,  sol,  solis  (m.). 

superior,  superior,  meliorj  abso- 
lutely, opti?nus. 

support,  confirmo.1 

suppose,  puto.1 

supreme,  supremus,  summus. 

surely,  profecto. 

surface  of  earth,  omnis  terra. 

surmount,  surpass,  supero.1 

surrender  (v.),  dedo,3  dedidi. 

surrender  (n.),  deditio,  onis  (f.). 

surrounded,  stipatus. 

survive,    super  esse,    super stes 
(itis)  esse  with  dat. 

suspend,  suspendo,3  di,  sum. 

suspense,  cura,  ae. 

swallow  (n.),  hirundo,  inis  (f.). 

swamp,  palus,  udis  (F.). 

swear,  juro;  l  —  together,  con- 
juro.1 

sweet,  dulcis,  e. 

sweetly,  jucunde. 


swim,  no,  nato,  trano.1 
symptom,  indicium,  i. 
Syracuse,  Syracusae,  arum  (f.). 
Syracusan,     Syracusanus,     a, 

um. 
Syrian,  Syrus,  a,  um. 


T. 


take,  capio3  cepi,  captuin.porto,1 
duco;3  (enjoy),  fruorzj  — 
away,  adirno,8  emi,  emptiun ; 

—  in  charge,  accipio ;  3  — 
part  in,  communico ;  x  —  claim 
for  one's  self,  sibi  adrogare ; 

—  prisoner,  cape re ;  —  refuge, 
confugerej  —  up  arms,  anna 
cap  ere;  —  by  the  hand,  manu 
arripere;  (follow),  sequi ;  — 
seriously,  in  serium  vertere. 

task,  opus,  eris  (n.). 

talents,  ingcnium,  i  (use  sing.). 

tall,  procerus. 

taunt,  obicio,8  exprobro.1 

teach,  doceo,2  ui. 

teacher,  doctor,  oris. 

tear  away,  detraho3  xi,  ctum. 

tear  (n.),  lacrima,  ae. 

tell,  nuntio,1  narro,x  dico3 

temperance,    le7nperantia,    ae, 

continentia,  ae. 
tempest,  tempestas,  atis  (f.). 
temple,  templum,  i,  aedes,  is  (f.). 
terms,  condiciones,  tun  (f.). 
terrify,  terreo,2  ui,  itum. 
testimony,  testimonium,  i. 
than,  quam,  (or  abl.). 
thanks,  grates,  gratiae,  arutn. 
that,  tit,  quod  (see  pp.  54,  7$) ; 

—  not,  ne ;  but  — ,  quin. 


8 


ii4 


Latin   Composition, 


the,  often  expressed  by  tile. 
theatre,  scena,  ae.  thence,  hide. 
then,  ttun,  inde,  deinde,  igitur. 
there,  ibi.  —  their,  eorum,  suus. 
therefore,  itaque,  qua  de  causa. 
thing,  res,  rei  (f.). 
think,  puto,x  reor?  ratus. 
this,  hie,  istej  often  qui. 
this  day's,  hodiernus. 
thong,  lorum,  i. 
though,  quamquam,  etia?n  si. 
thoughtlessness,  temeritas,  a/is 

(F.). 

thought,  consilium,  i. 
thousand,  mille  (§  18,  i.  e);  one 

of  a  — ,  unus  de  multis. 
threaten,  minor,  minitor  '  (dat. 

of  person)  ;  impendeo  2  (dat). 
thronged,  refertus. 
through,  per,  propter,  or  by  abl. 
throw,  jacio,3  jeci,  jactutn;  — 

off,  abicio?  jeci. 
thrown  (down),  dejectus. 
thus,  ita. 
Tiber,  the  river,  Tiber  is,  is  (m.)  ; 

the  river-god,  Tiberinus,  i. 
till,  donee.  — timidity,  formido. 
time,  tempus,  oris  (n.)  ;  for  some 

— ,  aliquamdiu  ;  from  —  to  — , 

inter dum;  from  that  —  forth, 
jani    inde;  at   the    same   — , 

tamen,  nihilominus. 
tired,  fessus  ;  to   be  — ,  taedet 

(§  50,  4.  c).  [dative. 

to,    ad   (ace.) ;     often    sign    of 
to-day,  hodie,  nunc. 
together,  una. 
toil,  labor,  oris  (m.). 
tomb,  sepulcrum,  i.    [crastinus. 
to-morrow,  eras;  of  — ,  (adj.), 
tongue,  lingua,  ae. 


too,  nimis ;  or  express  by  com- 
parative J  (also),  quoque. 

tooth,  dens,  lis  (m.)  ;  grip  of — , 
morsus,  us  (m.). 

torch,  fax,  facis  (f.). 

torment  (n.),  tormentum,  i;  cru- 
ciatus,  us. 

torture  (n.),  tormentum,  i. 

towards,  ei'ga  (ace),  ad,  versus. 

town,  tnunicipium,  i;  oppidum, 
ij  (village),  vicus,  i  (m). 

trace,  duco.3 

traitor,  proditor,  oris. 

tranquillity,  tranquillilas,  atis 

(F.). 

transaction,  res,  rei  (f.). 
transgress,  minus  obediens  esse 

(dat). 
travel,  iter  facer e. 
traveller,  viator,  oris. 
traverse,  transire. 
treachery,  perfidia,  ae. 
treason,   majestas,   atis  (§   50, 

4-  b). 
treasury,  aerarium,  i. 
treat,  tracto ;  l  —  as  a  son,  in 

filii  loco  habere. 
treatise,  liber,  bri. 
treaty,  indutiaes  arum. 
tree,  arbor.  —  trial,  tortnenta. 
tribe,  tribus,  us ;  gens,  lis  (f.). 
tribune,  tribunus,  i. 
trilling,  minimus. 
tripod,  cor  Una,  ae.         [dis  (f). 
triumph,    triumphus,   i;    laus, 
triumphal,  triumphalis ,  e. 
troops,  milites,  um. 
trouble,  res  adversae  (plur.). 
troubled,  to  be,  laborare. 
Troy,    Troja,   ae  j   of  — ,    Tro- 

janus,  a,  um. 


Vocabulary. 


"5 


true,  verus,  a,  umj  quidem. 
trust,  confido? 
trumpet,  tuba,  ae. 
truth,  Veritas,  atis  (F.). 
turf,  caespites,  urn  (plur.). 
turn,  verto,1  ti,  sum/  —  away, 

avert  or  j  3  —  out-of-doors, 

for  as  eicio.3 
tusk,  dens,  tis  (m.). 
two,  duo ;  where  only — ,  ambo. 
tyranny,  domitiatio,  onis  (f.). 
tyrant,  tyrannus,  i. 


Ufentine,  Ufens,  its. 
unambitious,    minime    ambiti- 

osus. 
uncle,  avunculus,  i. 
uncover,  detego.3 
undaunted,  invictus. 
under,  sub  (ace.  or  abl.). 
understand,     recte    aestimo,x 

teneo.2 
undertake,  adgredior,  suscipio. 
undoubtedly,  sine  dubio. 
unfeeling,  durus. 
ungrateful,  ingratus. 
unjust,  injustus. 
unimpeached,     integer     incol- 

umisque. 
unhappy,  miser,  era,  wn. 
universal,  communis,  e. 
unless,  nisi.  —  until,  donee. 
unprincipled,  improbus. 
unprofitable,  ifiutilis,  e. 
unrighteous,  in/quus. 
unworthy,  indignus. 
upbraid,  obicio,8  j'eci. 
upper  classes,  nobiles. 


upon  (as  living  — ),  ex. 
upward,  sursum. 
urge,  suadeo2  (dat.). 
use  (v.),  utor,3  usus. 
use  (n.),  usus,  us  (m.). 
useless,  inutilis,  e. 
utmost  (adj.),  maximus. 
utterance  (n.),  vox. 


vast,  ingens,  tis. 

vainly,  fr us tr a,  nequicquam. 

Valerian,  Valerius,  a,  um. 

valor,  virtus,  utis  (f.). 

value,  pretiwn,  i. 

Veians,  Veientcs,  ium. 

vein,  vena,  ae. 

vengeance,  ulcisci ;  of  — ,  use 
gerund.  — vessel,  navis  (F.). 

venture,  audeo?  ausus. 

very,  per,  in  compos.  (§  17,  5. 
d)  \  — same,  ipse,  a,  um;  gra- 
viter;  often  by  superl. 

vice,  vitium,  i.flagitium,  i  (n.). 

victim,  hostia,  victima,  ae  (F.). 

victor,  victorious,  victor,  oris 
(m.)  ;  victrix,  icis  (F.). 

victory,  victoria,  ae. 

view,  cogitatio,  onis  (f.)  ;  sen- 
ten  tia,  ae;  to  be  with  a  — , 
pertinere  ad. 

vigorous,  acer,  cris  j  nervosus. 

violence,  vis  (f.). 

violent,  violentus. 

violently,  vehementer,  vi. 

virtue,  virtus,  utis  (p.). 

voluntary,  voluntarius. 

vote,  sententia,  ae. 

vow,  votum,  i. 


n6 


Latin   Composition. 


W. 

-wages,  merces,  edis  (f.). 

■wait,  maneo?  mansij  —  for, 
exspecto.1 

wall  (of  house),  paries,  etis  (m.)  ; 
(of  city),  ?nurus,  moenia. 

wander,  vagor.1 

want  to,  opus  esse  (dat.  of  per- 
son and  abl.  of  thing)  ;  to  be 
in  —  of,  indigere  (gen.  of 
thing). 

war,  bdlum,  /(n.). 

war-horse,  equus  militaris. 

warlike,  bellicosus. 

warrior,  virfortis. 

warn,  moneo; 2  warning,  monitus. 

wasted,  confectus. 

watch,  ob servo.1 

water,  aqua,  ae. 

xva.ve,fluctus,  us  (m.). 

way,  via,  ae  ;  a  good  — ,  ali- 
quantum. 

weaken,  debilito.1 

wealth,  copiae,  aru?n. 

wealthy,  locuples,  tis. 

wear,  gero3  gessi,  gestum. 

well,  bene. 

what  ?  quid?  —  sort  ?  qualis? 

whatever,  quod,  with  indie. 

when,  ctwi,  ubi,  ut  (p.  6y). 

whenever,  cum  (with  indie). 

where,  ubi,  quo,  qua  (§  41,  2. 
a.).  \_sive. 

whether,  utrum  .  .  an,  sive  .  . 

which,  rel.,  quod;  qualis,  e;  int, 

while,  cum.     [quis,  uter  (p.  17). 

white,  albus. 

whither,  quo. 

who,  qui  j  whoever,  quisquis, 
quicu?nque,  siquis. 


who?   (interrog.)   quis  (see  p. 

17). 

whole,  totus  (gen.  ius). 

wholly,  plane,  omnino. 

why,  cur,  quam  ob  rem. 

wide,  latus  j  (of  measure),  in 
latitudinem. 

wicked,  sceleratus. 

wife,  uxor,  oris. 

wild,  ferus,  immanis,  e;  — 
beast,  /era;  — fig,  caprificus. 

will,  volo,  velle,  volui. 

willing,  paratus  ad  (p.  76). 

willingly,  volens,  tis. 

win,  concilia1  pario;3  —  tri- 
umph, triumphum  ago? 

wind,  ventus,  i. 

window,  fenestra,  ae. 

winter  (v.),  hiberno} 

wisdom,  consilium,  i. 

wish,  volo,  cupio3  op  to} 

with,  cum;  with  me,  meewn; 
—  himself,  &c,  secum. 

within,  intra,  inter;  of  time, 
often  expressed  by  abl.  (see 
p.  40). 

without,  sine;  —  doing  a  thing 
(see  p.  60). 

wolf,  lupus,  i  (m.)  ;  lupa,  ae  (f.). 

woman,  mulier ,  femina. 

wonder  (n.),  ?niraculum,  i. 

wont,  to  be,  soleo,2  solitus. 

woodpecker,  picus,  i. 

word,  verbum ,  /. 

work,  7ninisterimn,  i. 

world,  orbis  terrarum;  homi- 
nes, um. 

worn  out  (by  age),  aetate  con- 
fectus. 

worship,  colo,z  colui,  cultum. 

worst,  pessimus. 


Vocabulary. 


117 


worthy,  dignus  (with  abl.). 
-would,  &c,  see  p.  63. 
wound,  vulnus,  eris  (n.). 
wounded,  vulneratus. 
wretched,  miser,  era,  um. 
write,   scrifro,3  ft  si,  ptum  ; 

down,  conscribo.3 
wrong,  pravus. 


year,  annus,  1. 

yesterday,  heri ;  of  — ,  hester- 
nus.  [etiam. 

yet,  ta?nenj  not  — ,  no7idum 
you  (sing.),  tay  (plur.),  vos. 


young,  juvems,  is;  —  man, 
adulescens,  tis j  juvenis,  is j 
—  of  birds,  pullus,  i. 

younger,  niinor,  oris. 

your  (of  sing,  subject),  tuns,  a, 
urn;  vester  (.of  plur.). 

yourself,  ipse  (tu),  te. 

yourselves,  iftsi,  vos. 

youth,  puer,  eri ;  juventus,  i li- 
tis (f.)  ;  young  man,  adules- 
cens, tis. 


Zama  (adj.),  Za?nensis,  e. 
zeal,  alacritas,  atis  (f.). 


PART    SECOND. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  Exercises  given  in  Part  I.  have  been  chosen  chiefly 
to  illustrate  the  constructions  of  Latin  syntax,  and  the  proper 
words  and  phrases  have  been  given  in  a  special  Vocabulary. 
In  those  which  are  to  follow,  the  student  is  expected  to  make 
the  selection  of  words  and  phrases  for  himself,  and  must  rely 
on  his  general  knowledge  of  the  language,  or  on  a  general 
Lexicon.  An  English-Latin  lexicon  should,  however,  be 
used  only  for  the  suggestion  of  words  which  do  not  occur  to 
the  mind  from  a  knowledge  of  the  language.  The  real  guide 
should  be  the  Latin  Lexicon,  in  connection  with  passages 
cited  in  it,  or  else  remembered. 

A  few  points  should  be  put  clearly  before  the  mind  at 
starting. 

I.     Choice  of  the  Word  or  Phrase. 

Single  words,  in  all  languages,  commonly  express  not 
single  ideas,  but  groups  of  ideas.  They  cover,  as  it  were, 
not  points,  but  su?-faces.  The  surface  thus  covered  by  parallel 
words  is  very  often  quite  different  in  different  languages. 
Words  do  not  coincide,  but  only  partly  overlap ;  and 
hardly  any  word  in  one  language  is  exactly  equivalent  in 
meaning  to  the  apparently  corresponding  word  in  another. 
Thus  the  English  bold  and  boldness  correspond  most  nearly 
to  the  Latin  audax  and  audacia;  but  these  often  have  an 
idea   of   blame,  which  is  not   in  the    English  words :  homo 


120  Latin   Composition. 

audax  is  a  man  bad  as  well  as  bold.  On  the  other  hand, 
the  verb  to  lie  in  English  implies  a  moral  offence,  while 
the  corresponding  Latin  mentior  conveys  no  such  opprobrium, 
though  it  may  be  conveyed  by  the  context.  The  word  law 
answers  most  nearly  to  lex,  which,  however,  is  limited  to 
written  or  statute  law ;  so  that  the  abstract  expression  the 
law  (including  common  law)  would  have  to  be  rendered 
by  jura  atque  leges,  or  some  similar  phrase. 

Besides  this  difference  in  the  original  meaning  of  words, 
their  derived  or  figurative  meanings  are  often  very  widely 
different.  Thus  the  English  noun  form  may  mean  things 
so  different  as  shape  (jigura),  mariner  {modus),  vain  show 
(simulatio),  ceremony  (ritus),  a  bench  at  school  (scamnum),  or 
a  hare's  bed  (Jatibulum).  The  adjective  right  may  be 
aeqitus  (a  right  decision),  aptus  (a  right  selection),  or  dexter 
(on  the  right  hand).  The  verb  to  raise  may  be  tollo,  levo  (to 
lift),  augeo  (as  of  wages),  stnco  (of  buildings),  cieo,  moveo  (to 
raise  pity,  &c),  conscribo  (of  troops),  colo  (of  grain  and  fruits). 
On  the  other  hand,  the  Latin  tollo  may  mean  to  lift,  exalt, 
take  away,  weigh  (anchor),  destroy  ;  signum  is  a  mark  or  sign, 
signal,  standard,  statue,  constellation  ;  gravis  is  heavy,  weighty 
(dignified  or  influential),  burdensome,  offensive,  sickly. 

This  difference  is  especially  to  be  noted  in  the  case  of 
English  words  derived  from  Latin.  The  apparent  likeness, 
in  such  cases,  is  one  of  the  commonest  sources  of  error. 
Usually  the  corresponding  Latin  words  are  much  the  more 
energetic  and  forcible,  since  they  are  the  growth  of  roots 
still  living  and  vigorous  in  the  language.  Thus  the  Latin 
labor  is  toil  or  hardship  ;  deprimere  ("  depress  "),  to  sink, 
as  a  ship  in  battle  ;  opprimere  ("  oppress  "),  to  overwhelm,  or 
smother;  supprimere  ("  suppress  "),  to  trample  down.  The 
judicious  selection  of  a  Latin  term  will  thus  frequently  restore 
to  life  a  dead  or  fated  metaphor ;  while  a  vague  or  general 
term  —  such  as  is  often  given  in  English  by  a  Latin  deriva- 
tive —  may  require  to  be  rendered  in  Latin  by  some  qualify- 
ing phrase. 

Hence,  in  translating  into  Latin,  — 


Part  II.     Introduction.  121 

a.  Notice  carefully  the  exact  shade  of  meaning  in  which  the 
English  word  is  used,  and  see  that  the  Latin  word  covers  the 
ground.  In  securing  this,  it  is  often  necessary  to  notice  the  other 
words  in  the  sentence.  Thus  drown  may  often  be  rendered  by 
submergere,  because  the  rest  of  the  sentence  shows  what  is  meant ; 
but  if  not,  then  the  idea  of  death  by  drowning  must  be  brought  out 
by  some  explanatory  word  or  phrase. 

b.  Observe  the  cases  where  Latin  makes  distinctions  of  meaning 
not  recognized  in  English.  Thus,  city  may  be  either  tubs  (a 
collection  of  streets,  houses,  &c),  oppidum  (a  fortified  or  garrison 
town),  or  civitas  (a  political  community).  An  enemy  may  be 
iniimcus  (a  personal  enemy),  or  hostis  (a  public  foe).  Glory  may 
be  either  fama  (reputation  in  common  talk),  dec  us  (outward  splen- 
dor or  distinction),  laus  (the  approval  and  praise  of  men),  or  gloria 
(the  more  general  word). 

c.  In  a  far  greater  number  of  cases,  English  makes  distinctions 
not  recognized  in  Latin.*  For  example,  society,  participation, 
association,  partnership,  alliance,  and  several  other  words,  are 
represented  by  the  Latin  societas.  If  it  is  not  clear  from  the 
context  which  is  meant,  some  descriptive  or  limiting  word  must  be 
added :  as,  societas  generis  humani,  societas  et  cojnmunicatio, 
societas  et  foedus,  and  so  on  (see  e,  below). 

cc.  In  general,  the  Latin  prefers  to  make  a  person  subject  rather 
than  a  thing,  a  thing  rather  than  an  abstraction,  so  that  an  idea 
is  often  expressed  in  Latin  from  a  point  of  view  different  from  our 
own.     Thus, — 

Caesar  stationed  the  auxiliaries  ...  so  that  they  might  make 
a  display,  alarios  constituit  .  .  .  ut  ad  speciem 
alariis  uteretur. 

So  to  serve  for  any  thing  may  often  be  rendered  by  uti,  governing 
the  noun  which  expresses  the  English  subject  (but  compare  Gr. 
§  233). 

d.  In  many  expressions  we  find  an  English  phrase  of  two  or 
more  words  rendered  in  Latin  by  a  single  term ;  as,  a  sense  of 
duty,  officium  ;  a  feeling  of  shame,  pudor  ;  presence  of  mind, 
animus  (alone,  but  also  with praesens  or  praesentid). 

*  English  employs,  roughly,  about  five  times  as  large  a  vocabulary  as  Latin,  with  a  far 
smaller  proportion  of  regular  derivatives. 


122  Latin    Composition. 

dd.  As  in  all  languages,  there  are  in  Latin  many  technical 
or  semi-technical  expressions,  which  must  be  carefully  noticed. 
Such  a  word  or  phrase  will  often  be  suggested  by  some  word  in  the 
English  expression  from  the  Latin  equivalent  of  which  it  is  often 
a  regular  derivative. 

e.  There  are  many  words  in  English  which  have  no  natural 
equivalent  whatever  in  Latin.  These  must  be  analyzed,  and  ex- 
pressed by  phrases  ;  often  substituting  special  and  concrete  words 
for  general  and  abstract  ones  ;  and  oftener  putting  the  force  of  an 
adjective  into  a  verb,  or  noun,  or  adverb.     Thus,  — 

i.  Accomplice,  scelerum  {consiliorum)  conscius. 

2.  Art,  artes  fingendi  et  pingendi. 

3.  Conscience,  conscius  animus. 

4.  Historian,  rerum  gestarum  scriptor. 

5.  Inspiration,  dlvinus  quidam  adflatus, 

6.  Lawgiver,  qui  leges  ponit. 

7.  Panic,  res  trepida. 

8.  Patriotism,  studium  rei  publicae,  and  the  like. 

9.  Rhetoric,  rhetorum  praecepta. 

(Stereotyped  expressions,  however,  of  this  kind,  should  be  avoided.) 

/.  Latin  generally  prefers  to  express  in  concrete  ternis  what 
English  gives  in  abstract  (compare  i).  Thus,  strength,  vigor, 
energy,  pungency,  may  be  expressed  by  sanguis,  lacerti,  nervi, 
aculei;  expression  or  sentiment  by  vox.     So,  too,  the  phrases,  — 

1.  I  do  not  fear   a   bad   man's    anger,   improbum   iratum 

non  metuo. 

2.  The  assassination  of  Caesar  seemed  to  many  a  glorious  act, 

occisus    Caesar    multis    pulcherrimum    /acinus 
videbatur. 

3.  Every    evil    at  its   birth   seems   harmless,   omne  malum 

nascens  innocuum  videtur. 

4.  The  world  hates  ingratitude,  omnes  immemorem  bene- 

flcii  oderunt, 

5.  There  is  a  wide  difference  between  learning  and  ignorance, 

plurimum  interest  inter  doctum  et  rudem. 

6.  Firmness    and    dignity    are  characteristics   of  true  courage, 

constantem   et   gravem   eum   esse  volumus   quern 
fortern  dicimus. 


Part  II     Introduction,  123 

7.  He   had    read    no    poetry,   and    knew   nothing   of   oratory, 
nullum  poetam  legerat,  nullum  oratorem  noverat. 

ff.  Nouns,  especially  abstracts,  are  less  common  in  Latin  than 
in  English.  Hence  abstract  qualities,  if  connected  with  the  sub- 
ject, must  often  be  rendered  by  adjectives  or  participles  ;  if  con- 
nected with  the  predicate,  by  adverbs.  Names  of  actions  (verbal 
abstracts)  are  expressed  by  verbs,  colored  if  necessary  by  adverbs 
or  adverbial  phrases. 

g.  Even  the  few  abstract  nouns  found  in  Latin  are  constantly 
made  concrete,  especially  by  using  them  in  the  plural :  as, 

1.  The  life  of  all,  vitae  omnium. 

2.  The  immortality  of  the  soul,  aeternitas  animorum, 

3.  The  cold  of  the  winters,  frigora  hibema. 

4.  Some  cases  of  superiority,  quaedam  eoccellentiae. 

5.  Sharing     in      misfortune     (of    several    persons),     societates 

calamitatum. 
h.  The  two  languages  often  differ  in  their  modes  of  express- 
ing the  Degree  of  a  quality.  Thus,  as  much  or  equally  is  often 
rendered  by  no  less ;  and  conversely,  less  by  not  so  much,  more  by 
so  much  as  ?io  other,  and  the  like,  according  to  convenience  of 
expression  in  the  particular  case. 

i.  Certain  literal  forms  of  speech  are  frequent  in  Latin,  present- 
ing the  object  as  it  appears  to  the  eye  or  comes  at  first  hand  before 
the  thought.     Thus,  — 

1.  They   refresh   themselves   with    food    and    sleep,  corpora 

cibo  somnoque  curant. 

2.  To  relieve  one  from  superstition  or  disease,  aut  rellgione 

animos  aut  corpora  morbis  levare. 

3.  In  the  face  of  the  world,  ante  omnium  oculos, 

4.  A  musical  ear  detects  very  slight  discords,  musicorum 

aures  vel  minima  dissona  sentiunt. 

5.  I   never   lose    sight    of  him,    numquam    ab    eo    oculos 

deicio.    So  — 

7.  The  tribunes  were  especially  alarmed,  praecipuus  pavor 

tribunos  invaserat.     (Here  the  personification  adds  to  the 

vigor  of  the  expression  ;  so,  contemptor  animus,  tiro  exercitus,  &c.). 

ii.  The   same   tendency  to  literalness  is  seen  in  the  use  of  a 

second  ?ioun  ("  hendiadys  "),  where    English   uses  an  adjective,  a 

phrase,  or  a  compound  (compare  Part  I.  p.  5).     Thus. — 


124  Latin   Co?nf>osition. 

i.  Rational  instruction,  ratio  et  doctrina, 

2.  An  eye-witness,  spectator  et  testis, 

3.  A  shameful  disaster,  ignominia  et  calamitas. 

4.  Art-culture,  artificium  et  expolitio. 

J.  English  abounds  in  effete  metaphors  —  rhetorical  expressions 
(noun  or  verb)  —  which  have  lost  their  force  and  become  mere 
conventional  phrases  :  these  must  often  be  expressed  by  some 
simple  word,  or  wholly  omitted,  and  the  bare  substance  of  the 
thought  given  in  Latin  (compare  I,  m,  below).     Thus, — 

1.  Homer  flourished   many  years   before,  Homer us  multis 

ante  annis  fuit  (also,  floruit), 

2.  Virtue  in  solitude  could  not  reach  its  highest  development, 

virtus    solitaria  ad   ea   quae    summa    sunt    non 
potuit  pervenire. 

Examples  may  be  found  in  such  nouns  as  object,  point,  feature, 
circumstance,  instance,  capacity,  person,  expression,  elements ;  in 
the  verbs  observe,  remark,  manage,  continue,  discuss,  avail  one's 
self,  assure,  represent,  allude,  qualify,  enhance,  convey,  embrace, 
exist,  constitute,  deliver,  succeed  in,  manage  to;  and  particularly  in 
adverbial  and  prepositional  phrases,  such  as  regarding,  concer?iing, 
with  the  view  of  (ux),  in  reference  to  (ad),  on  account  of  (OB, 
propter),  in  spite  of  all  that  (tamen),  &c. 

ft.  Latin  often  prefers  an  abstract  noun  to  an  adjective  ;  thus 
making  the  quality  the  main  thing,  and  (as  it  were)  embodying  it. 
Thus,  — 

1.  Isocrates  had  many  pupils  of  high  rank,  Isocrates  nobili- 

tate  discipulorum  floruit. 

2.  It  takes  much  water  to  quench  a  furious  blaze,  via  flam- 

mae  aquae  multitudine  opprimitur. 

3.  Orators  are  and  always  have  been  few,  magna  oratorum 

est  semperque  fuit  paucitas. 

4.  A  gloomy  winter  was  followed  by  a  sickly  summer,  tristem 

hiemem  pesfibus  aestas  excepit. 

5.  "Weak  men  were   overcome  with  superstition  (i.e.  because 

they  were  weak),  superstitio  homitium  imbecillitatem 
occupavit. 

6.  "When  the  pleasant  spring-time  is  past,  then  come  summer 

and    autumn,   praeterita   verni   temporis    suavitate, 
aestas  venit  et  auctumtius. 


Part  II.     Introduction.  125 

I.  The  simplicity  of  Latin  requires  that  force  or  color  shall  be 
given  to  an  expression  but  once,  whether  in  subject  or  predicate  ; 
and  that  neutral  or  unemphatic  phrases  shall  be  used  in  other 
parts  of  the  clause  (compare  /  and  h).     Thus,  — 

1.  Immense  indignation  prevailed,  indlgnatio  ingens  erat. 

2.  But  how  vast  the  privilege,  for  the  soul  to  live !  At  Mud 

quanti  est,  animum  vivere! 

3.  In   both    cases    he    acted    with    dignity,    utnimque   egit 

graviter. 

4.  All  incidents   of   life    which    happen    in    accordance   with 

nature,  omnia  quae  secundum  naturam  fiunt. 

5.  For  even  these  tributes  are  honorable,  haec  enim  ipsa 

sunt  honovabilha. 

To  the  same  habit  of  mind  may  be  referred  the  frequent  use 
of  such  colorless  words  as  ars,  genus,  locus,  ratio,  res,  sententia, 
studium,  vis ;  afficio,  ago,  capio,  facio,  habeo,  possum,  sum,  versor 
(see  Lexicon  under  these  words). 

II.  An  English  sentence  is  often  filled  out  with  words  not 
strictly  necessary  to  the  sense,  but  inserted  for  fulness  or  rotundity 
of  expression.  In  general,  it  is  unclassical  to  express  any  thing 
which  is  obvious  from  the  context,  or  to  repeat  what  has  once  been 
said  in  other  words  in  the  same  clause  or  phrase  (compare  I). 

m.  English  narrative  abounds  in  varied  descriptive  phrases 
alluding  to  an  idea  or  person  once  expressed:  these  must  be 
omitted  in  Latin  ;  or,  if  something  is  necessary  to  prevent  ambigu- 
ity, a  simple  pronoun  is  used.  Proper  names  are  repeated,  but  not 
so  often  as  in  English.  Thus,  the  words  italicized  in  the  following 
extract  (recounting  the  death  of  the  elder  Pliny)  would  be  omitted 
in  a  Latin  version  of  the  passage,  or  else  expressed  by  pronouns  :  — 

"  As  the  shades  of  evening  gathered,  the  brightness  of  the  flames 
became  more  striking ;  but,  to  calm  the  panic  of  those  around  him,  the 
philosopher  assured  them  that  they  arose  from  cottages  on  the  slope, 
which  the  alarmed  natives  had  abandoned  to  the  descending  flakes  of 
fire.  .  .  .  The  sea  was  agitated,  and  abandoned  by  every  bark.  Pliny, 
wearied  and  perplexed,  refused  to  stir  farther  ;  while  his  companions, 
all  but  two  body-slaves,  fled  in  terror.  Some,  who  looked  back  in  their 
flight,  affirmed  that  the  old  man  rose  once  with  the  help  of  his  attendants, 
but  immediately  fell  again,  overpowered,  as  it  seemed,  with  the  deadly 
vapors." 


126  Latin    Composition. 

n.  But  if  the  allusive  or  descriptive  word  is  essential  to  the  idea 
to  be  conveyed,  it  must  be  given  outright  in  a  clause  or  special 
expression  :  as, 

But  the  veteran  could  not  be  deceived:  ille  uutem —  ut 
qui  esset  rei  bellicae  peritiasunus  — -  illudi  non 
potuU. 

o.  The  tendency  in  Latin  to  a  direct  form  of  statement  requires 
that  the  main  idea  should  be  asserted  directly  in  the  main  clause, 
and  not  hidden  in  a  relative  clause,  participle,  or  adverb  (compare 
v).  The  necessary  emphasis  is  to  be  given  by  position.  For 
example,  — 

i.  A  fresh  blow  came,  that  crushed  the  city,  eludes  novu 
civitutem  udftijcit. 

2.  It  is  these  that  delight  in  flattery,  hos  delectut  adsen- 

tutio, 

3.  You  are  the  very  man  I  was  looking  for,  te  ipsum  quue- 

rebum. 


II.  Structure  of  the  Sentence. 

The  best  English  writers  give  a  connected  story  or  argu- 
ment in  short  clear  sentences,  each  distinct  from  the  rest, 
and  saying  one  thing  by  itself.  In  Latin,  on  the  contrary, 
the  story  or  argument  is  viewed  as  a  whole ;  and  a  logical 
relation  among  all  its  parts  is  carefully  indicated,  so  that  the 
whole  forms  a  compact  group.     For  example,  — 

But  gloomy  silence  and  voiceless  Sed  silentium  triste  ac  tacita  maes- 

sorrow  had  paralyzed  the  minds  of       Mia  ita  deflixit  omnium  animos,  ut, 

the  inhabitants.      For  very  dread      prae  metu  obliti  quid  reiinquerent 

they  forgot  what  they  were  leaving  .  ,                r         .     ,  r  ■     .„  ^ 

.                                     J                       °  quid  secum  ferrent,  dejiciente  con- 

behind,  what  they  were   carrying  .,.            .      .              ...     ,. 

.  ,      ,              „7.              n      .  . .  srfio,    roritantesque  am  altos,  nunc 

with  them.      With  no  fixed  idea,  6            2 

,  .  .  .  ,  ,  .  in  liminibus  starent,  nunc  errabundi 
and    inquiring   every   man    of    his 

neighbor,  they   were   at   one   mo-       domos  suas>   ultimum   illud  visuri> 

ment  standing  at  their  thresholds,      pervagarentur. 

at    another    wandering    restlessly 

through  their  homes  to  see  the  end. 

p.  In  particular,  so  much  of  a  statement  as  can  be  so  treated, 
with  its  attendant  circumstances,  modifications,  &c,  is  put  into  a 


Part  II.     Introduction .  127 

single  complex  sentence,   called  a  Period  (§346.  a-d;  compare  s)- 
Thus,  — 

Qui  cum,  multis  circa  fiuitimos  populos  legationibus  terra  marique  nequic- 
quam  missis,  nisi  quod  ex  Etruria  haud  ita  multiwi  frumenti  advectum 
est,  nuilum  momentum  auno/iae  fecisset ;  et,  revoiutus  ad  dispensationem 
tuopiae,  profiteri  cogendo  frumentum  et  vendcre  quod  usu  menstruo  super- 
esset,  fraudandoque  parte  diurni  cibi  servitia,  criminando  hide  et  obiciendo 
irae  populi  frumentarios,  acerba  inquisitione  aperiret  magis  quam  levaret 
inopiam  ;  multi  ex  plebe  spe  amissa  potius  quam  ut  cruciarentur  trahendo 
animam,  capitibus  obvolutis  se  in  Tiber im  praecipitaverunt. 

Here  the  principal  fact  expressed  in  the  main  clause  is,  that 
many  of  the  people  drowned  themselves  rather  than  submit  to  slow 
starvation  ;  while  the  cruel  policy  that  drove  them  to  it  is  described 
in  subordinate  clauses.     In  English  it  might  be  told  as  follows  :  — 

He  sent  a  number  of  embassies  by  land  and  sea  to  the  surrounding 
nations,  but  effected  no  result  beyond  the  importation  of  an  insignificant 
amount  of  corn  from  Etruria,  and  produced  no  movement  in  the  market. 
On  applying  himself  to  the  administration  of  the  meagre  supplies,  he 
compelled  people  to  make  a  report  of  the  corn  they  held,  and  to  offer 
for  sale  all  that  exceeded  the  necessary  supply  of  their  wants  for  a 
month.  He  robbed  the  slaves  of  part  of  their  daily  rations,  and  pro- 
ceeded to  libel  the  corn-merchants,  and  expose  them  to  the  fury  of  the 
populace.  By  this  galling  inquisitorial  policy  he  revealed  rather  than 
relieved  the  distress.  Many  of  the  lower  orders,  in  utter  despair, 
bandaged  the  eyes  and  threw  themselves  into  the  Tiber,  rather  than 
endure  the  torment  of  a  prolonged  existence. 

q.  Even  when  long  periods  are  not  used,  still  the  logical  connec- 
tion is  indicated  by  the  use  of  connecting  Relatives  (see  §  201.  e)  ; 
or  (qq)  by  Correlative  words  and  Particles,  especially  idem,  itaque, 
autem,  enini,  vero,  quidem. 

r.  But,  in  coordinate  clauses,  the  copulative  conjunctions  are 
omitted  oftener  than  in  English  (asyndeton)  ;  the  connection  being 
made  clear  by  the  Position  of  words  and  by  Antithesis. 

s.  Of  two  coordinate  clauses  with  and,  the  less  important  is 
merged  in  the  other  by  the  aid  of  participles  and  subordinate 
phrases.     In  such  cases  a  change  of  subject  should  be  avoided. 

t.  A  change  of  subject  should  be  marked  by  the  introduction 
of  a  pronoun,  if  the  new  subject  has  been  already  mentioned  in  the 
preceding  sentence.  But  (tt)  the  needless  use  of  pronouns  may 
be  avoided  by  change  of  structure. 


128  Latin    Composition. 

u»  A  noun  should  be  kept  in  the  same  case  if  possible. 

In  illustration  of  these  points,  compare  the  following  examples  :  — 

i.  Then  he  called  them  together,  and  having  briefly  addressed  them 
waited  a  little,  and  led  them  out  with  him.  Tunc  convocatos"  cum 
breviter  admonuisset,  paulisper  moratus  secum  eduxit. 

2.  The  plan  was  universally  approved,  and  its  execution  was  intrusted 
to  the  consul.     Cunctis  rem  approbantibus*  negolium  consult  datur. 

3.  This  matter  was  soon  accomplished,  and  the  legions  returned  to 
winter-quarters.    Eo  celeriter  confecto  negotio,"  in  hiberna  legiones  redierunt. 

4.  When  Midas  the  Phrygian  was  a  child,  and  asleep,  some  ants  piled 
grains  of  corn  upon  his  lips.  Midae  Mi  Phrygio?  cum  ptier  esset,  dormienti 
formicae  in  os  tritici  grana  congesserunt. 

5.  They  came  to  the  king  at  Pergamus.  He  received  the  ambassadors 
kindly,  and  conducted  them  to  Pessinus.  Pergamum  ad  regent  venerunt, 
qui*  legatos  comiter  exceptos  Pessinuntem  deduxit. 

6.  If  I  cannot  crush  the  pain,  I  will  hide  it.  Dolorem  M  si  non  potero 
frangere,  occultabo. 

7.  When  the  barbarians  saw  that  he  had  escaped  the  flames,  they 
hurled  darts  at  him  from  a  distance,  and  killed  him.  Quern9  ut  barbari 
incendiui?i  effugisse  viderunt,  telis  eminus  emissis  interfecerunt. 

8.  When  Zopyrus,  who  professed  to  be  able  to  read  every  one's 
character  from  his  outward  appearance,  had  at  a  party  made  a  large 
catalogue  of  moral  defects  to  reproach  Socrates  with,  the  rest  laughed 
him  to  scorn  ;  but  Socrates  came  to  his  assistance.  Cum  multa  in 
conventu  vitia  collegisset  in  eum  Zopyrus,  qui  se  naturam  ctijitsque  ex  forma 
perspicere  projitebatur,  derisus  est  a  ceteris,  ab  ipso  autem  Socrate  suble- 
vatus  u 

9.  For  they  believe  that  these  divinities  were  born  in  the  realm,  and 
that  grain  was  first  discovered  in  their  land  ;  and  that  Libera,  whom 
they  also  call  Proserpine,  was  carried  off  from  the  grove  of  Enna.  It  is 
said  that  Ceres,  in  the  course  of  her  anxious  search  for  her  daughter, 
kindled  her  torch  at  the  fires  that  blaze  from  Etna's  summit ;  and,  hold- 
ing it  before  her,  wandered  over  the  whole  world.  Nam  et  natas  esse  has 
in  Us  locis  deas,  et  fruges  in  ea  terra  primum  repertas  esse  arbitrantur,  et 
raptam  esse  Liberam,  quam  eamdem  Proserpinam  vocant,  ex  Hennensium 
ne??iore.  Quam  cum  investigare  et  conquirere  Ceres  velletyq  dicitur  inflarn- 
masse  taedas  Us  ignibus  qui  ex  Aetnae  vertice  erumpunt ;  quas  sibi  cum  ipsa 
praeferrett    orbem  omnem  peragrasse  terrarum. 

v.  In  turning  loose  sentences  into  periods,  be  sure  to  get  the 
main  idea  in  the  main  clause,  and  keep  the  other  clauses  in  their 
proper  relations    (compare  ©).     In  general,  the  main  subject  or 


Part  II.     Introduction.  129 

object  must  be  put  in  the  main  clause,  not  in  the  subordinate  ones. 
Thus  — 

1.  When  Hannibal  had  reviewed  his  auxiliary  forces,  he  set  out  for 
Gades.     Hannibal,  cum  recensuisset  auxilia,  Gades  profectus  est. 

2.  The  augur  Tiresias  is  described  by  the  poets  as  a  philosopher,  and 
is  never  represented  as  bewailing  his  blindness.  Augurem  Tiresiam, 
quern  sapientem  Jingunt  poetae,  nu?)iqicam  inducunt  deplorantem  caecitatem 
suam. 

3.  The  Volscians  found  that,  now  they  were  severed  from  every  other 
hope,  there  was  but  little  hope  in  prolonging  the  conflict.  In  addition  to 
other  disadvantages,  they  had  engaged  on  a  spot  ill  adapted  for  fighting, 
and  worse  for  flight.  Cut  to  pieces  on  every  side,  they  abandoned  the 
contest  and  cried  for  quarter.  After  surrendering  their  commander  and 
delivering  up  their  arms,  they  passed  under  the  yoke;  and  with  one 
garment  each  were  sent  to  their  homes,  covered  with  disgrace  and 
defeat.  Volsci  exiguam  spent  in  armis,  alia  undique  abscissa,  cum  ten- 
tassent,  praeter  cetera  adversa,  loco  quoque  iuiquo  ad  pugnam  congress/', 
iniquiore  ad  fngam,  cum  ab  omni  parte  caederentur,  ad  preces  a  certamine 
versi,  dedito  imperatore  traditisque  armis,  sub  jugum  missi,  cum  singulis 
vestimentis,  ignominiae  cladisque  pleni  dimittunturp. 

Here  the  main  thought  is  the  return  of  the  Volscians:  the  cir- 
cumstances of  the  surrender,  &c,  are  put  in  the  several  subordinate 
clauses. 

vv.  The  clauses  should  be  arranged  in  the  natural  order  of  time 
or  logical  sequence,  —  cause  before  result;  purpose,  manner,  and 
the  like,  before  the  act.  (There  are,  however,  many  exceptions  to 
this  rule,  from  the  tendency  to  put  the  more  important  first  or  else 
last.) 

w.  Latin  has  a  great  fondness  for  antithesis  and  sharp  contrasts, 
setting  one  word  phrase  or  clause  against  another.  This  tendency 
will  often  control  the  order  of  words,  phrases,  or  clauses. 

x»  As  to  the  order  of  words  :  let  the  main  word  be  seized  and 
put  at  the  beginning  (see  Part  I.  p.  2).  By  this  means  the  drift 
of  the  clause  or  sentence  may  almost  always  be  indicated  in 
advance. 

y.  A  verb  in  the  active  voice  is  often  rendered  in  Latin  by  the 
passive,  and  conversely,  to  avoid  change  of  subject,  or  to  secure  a 
personal  or  concrete  subject  rather  than  an  impersonal  or  abstract 
one  (compare  cc,  with  Lesson  20). 

9 


130  Latin   Composition. 

z.  There  are  many  idiomatic  phrases  which  are  to  be  rendered 
by  Particles  in  Latin,  especially  in  colloquial  expressions,  such  as  : 
well  now,  atque ;  to  be  sure,  by  the  way,  in  fact  (also 
why!),  quidem;  for,  you  see,  elenim ;  and  after  all,  atque; 
considering,  ut ;  I  SAY,  igitur.  Yes  may  be  given  by  etiam, 
maxime,  vero,  with  a  pronoun,  or  by  repeating  the  verb  ;  NO  by 
ii7imo,  7ion,  minime,  or,  repeating  a  word  with  the  negative  (see 
Grammar,  §  212.  a).  These  can  only  be  learned  by  practice  with 
the  Latin  particles. 


III.     Idiomatic   Phrases. 

The  following  examples  include  most  of  the  idiomatic 
usages  which  have  already  been  explained,  together  with  some 
others,  brought  together  here  for  convenient  reference :  — 

1.  I  come  to  help  you,  adjutor  tibi  venio  (Part  I.  page  3). 

2.  I  remember  when  a  boy,  puer  mem  int. 

3.  Fabius  in  his  second  consulship,  Fabius  consul  iierum. 

4.  A  continued  series  of  events,  continualio  et  scries  rerum  (p.  5). 

5.  Both  consuls  were  slain,  uterque  consul  occisus  est  (p.  7). 

6.  He  came  against  his  will,  invitus  venit. 

7.  He  was  the  first  to  see,  primus  vidit  (p.  8). 

8.  The  rest  of  the  crowd,  reliqua  multitudo. 

9.  All  men  praise  bravery,  omnes  fortia  laudant  (p.  9). 

10.  The  fight  at  Cannae,  pugna  Cannensis. 

11.  Another  man's  house,  aliena  domus. 

12.  I  prefer  the  art  of  memory  to  that  of  forgetfulness,  memoriae 

arte?n  quam  oblivionis  malo  (p.  12). 

13.  The  army  of  Caesar  defeated  that  of  Pompey,  Caesaris  exer- 

citus  Pompeianos  vicit. 

14.  That   [just   mentioned]   is   a  great  argument,   but  this   is   a 

greater,    that,   &c.,   hoc   magnum   est    argumentum,    ilhid 
atitem  maj'us,  quod,  etc.  (p.  13). 
15    It  is  just  three  years,  tres  anni  ipsi  sunt. 

16.  The  book  you  gave  me,  liber  quern  mihi  dedisti  (p.  15). 

17.  Caesar  the  conqueror  of  Gaul,  Caesar  qui  Galliam  vicit. 

18.  A  class,  of  which  there  is  great  lack,  cujus  generis  magna  est 

paucitas. 

19.  Those  evils  which  we  suffer  with  many  seem  to  us  lighter, 

quae  mala  cum  multis  patimur  ea  nobis  leviora  videniur. 


Part  II.     Introduction.  131 

20.  There  were  as  many  opinions  as  men,  quot  homines  tot  erant 

sententiae  (p.  16).  „ 

21.  What  can  happen  to  any  [one]  man  can  happen  to  any  man 

[whatever],  cuivis  potest  accidere  quod  cuiqua?n  potest. 

22.  Each  army  was  in  sight  of  the  other,  uterque  utrique  erat 

exercitus  in  conspectu  (p.  19). 

23.  The  boy's  name  is  Marcus,  puero  novien  est  Marco  (p.  26). 

24.  It  is  the  part  of  wisdom,  est  sapientis. 

25.  In  silence,  tacite  (or  silentio),  p.  30. 

26.  I  esteem  Plato  very  highly,  but  the  truth  more,  Platonem  per- 

magni  sed  veritatcm  pluris  aestimo. 

27.  You  have  robbed  me  of  my  property,  bona  mihi  abstulisti. 

28.  Much  more  rich  than  wise,  multo  divitior  quam  sapientior. 

29.  The  more  virtuously  one  lives  the  less  he  will  injure  others, 

quanto  quis  vivit  honestius  tanto  mimes  nocebit  aliis. 

30.  A  means  of  guarding  against  troubles,  cautio  incojnmodorum. 

31.  Jealousy  of  the  Senate,  invidia  senatoria  (p.  35). 

32.  More  learning  than  wisdom,  plus  doctrinae  quam  sapientiae. 

33.  You  ought  to  have  gone,  te  ire  oportuit. 

34.  Within  four  days  after  this  was  done,  the  matter  was  reported 

to  Chrysogonus   in  Sulla's  camp  at  Volaterrae,  quadriduo 
quo  haec  gesta  sunt  res  ad  Chrysogonum  in  castra  L.  Sullae 
Volaterras  defertur  (p.  41). 
35-  To  fight  on  horseback,  ex  equo  pugnare  (p.  43). 

36.  He  would  often  play  with  his  children,  saepe  cum  pueris  hide- 

bat  (p.  46). 

37.  I  begin  to  feel  like  dancing,  jam  lubet  saltare. 

38.  The  commander  is  relieved,  imperatori  succeditur  (p.  49). 

39.  Men  do  not  gather  grapes  from  thorns,  ex  sentibus  uvae  non 

percipiuntur. 

40.  Socrates  was  put  to  death  by  his  fellow-citizens,  Socratem  cives 

sui  interfecerunt  (p.  50). 

41.  Crassus   is   not  envied  for  his   wealth,    Crasso  divitiae  non 

invidentttr  (p.  51). 

42.  What  is  creation  ?     Quid  est  creare  ?  (p.  53). 

43.  It  was  reported  that  Caesar's  house  had  been  attacked  (or,  An 

attack  on  Caesar's  house  was  reported),  oppugnatio  Caesaris 
domus  7iuntiabatur  (p.  55). 

44.  In  the  following  winter,  ea  quae  secuta  est  hieme  (p.  57). 

45.  Any  evil  is  easily  crushed  at  its  birth,  omne  malum  nascens 

facile  opprbnitur  (p.  57). 


132  Latin    Composition. 

46.  Your  being  here  is  agreeable,  quod  ades  (or,  te  udesse)  gratu?n 

est  (p.  60). 

47.  I  dissuaded  him  from  going,  ne  iret  dissuasi. 

48.  I  should  like  to  go,  ire  velim  (p.  63). 

49.  I  could  wish  he  were  here,  vellem  adesset. 

50.  What  was  I  to  do  ?     Quid  facerem? 

51.  Caesar  was  too  merciful  to  punish  his  adversaries,  clementior 

erat  Caesar  quam  ut  initnicos  puniret  (p.  71). 

52.  He  was  accused  of  treason  against  his  country,  accusatus  est 

quod  ftatriam  prodidisset  (p.  7$). 

53.  I  have  yet  to  speak  of  the  war  against  the  pirates,  reliquum  est 

ut  de  bello  dicam  piratico  (p.  72). 

54.  An  inestimable  value,  pretium  ?najus  qua?n  ut  aestimetur. 

55.  To  think  that  you  should  have  fallen  into  such  grief  for  me  ! 

te  in  tantas  aerumnas  propter  me  incidisse  /  (p.  83). 

56.  What !  I  interrupt  you  ?  egone  ut  te  interpellem  ? 

57.  I  do  not  doubt  that  he  will  come,  non  dubito  quin  venturus  sit. 

58.  Not  to  be  tedious,  ne  longus  sun. 

59.  It  would  befit  us  to  mourn,  nos  dccebat  lugere. 

60.  I  fear  he  will  come,  vereor  ne  veniat. 

61.  I  fear  he  will  not  come,  vereor  ut  veniat. 

62.  And  besides,  accedit  quod{?N\\\i  indie). 

63.  To  utter  many  falsehoods,  multa  mentiri. 

64.  It  is  worth  while,  operae pretium  est. 

65.  He  says  he  has  not  done  it,  negat  se  fecisse. 

66.  The  many  defeats  they  have  sustained,  eludes  quas  plurimus 

Passi  sunt. 

67.  To  have  a  prosperous  voyage,  ex  sententia  navigare. 

68.  Such  is  his  self-command,  quae  est  ejus  continentiaj  or,  $uu 

est  continentia.. 

69.  So  far  as  I  know,  quod  scio  (scia?n). 

70.  I  never  heard  him  without  admiration,  numquam  eum  uudivi 

quin  admirarer. 

71.  I  cannot  but  believe,  non  possum  quiti  credam. 

72.  Nothing  prevents  your  reading  the  book,  nihil  obstat  quominus 

librum  legas. 
J 3.  How  many  are  there  of  you  ?  Quot  estis  f 

74.  I  made  him  retire,  effect  ut  se  reciperet. 

75.  He  deserves  to  be  loved,  dignus  est  qui  a?netur. 

76.  For  many  years  he  has  been  in  my  debt,  multi  stmt  atini  cum 

in  nosiro  aere  est. 


Part  II,     Introduction,  133 

Jj.  I  congratulate  you  on  your  influence  with  Caesar,  gratulor  tibi 
quod  tantum  apud  Caesarem  vales. 

78.  He  was  accused  of  having  betrayed  the  king,  accusatus  est 

quod  regent  prodidisset. 

79.  Many  men  admire  poems  without  understanding  them,  pluri7Jii 

carmina  mirantur  neque  ea  intelligunt. 

80.  Instead  of  reading  he  is  playing  ball,  pila?n  agit  cu?n  legere 

debeat. 

81.  He  makes  it  his  object  to  serve  the  country,  id  agit  ut  patriae 

inserviat. 

82.  He  is  kind  in  allowing  you  to  depart,  benignus  est  qui  te  prqfi- 

cisci  patiatur. 

83.  He  is  too  strong  to  be  subdued,  fortior  est  quam  ut  (quam  qui) 

devinci  possit. 

84.  It  was  owing  to  you  that  I  did  not  come,  per  te  stetit  quo- 

minus  ve7iirem. 

85.  To  aim  at  a  revolution,  novis  rebus  studere. 

86.  To  the  great  danger  of  the  state,  cum  siunmo  rei  publicae 

periculo. 

87.  Love  for  Cicero,  amor  Ciceronis  j  Cicero's  love  of  his  brother, 

Ciceronis  amor  fraternus  (or,  in  fratrem). 

88.  He  spoke  so  that  no  one  heard,  ita  locutus  est  ut  nemo  audiret 

(that  no  one  might  hear,  ne  quis  audiret). 

89.  And  no  one  heard,  nee  quisquam  audivit. 

90.  One  understands  in  this  way,  another  in  that,  alius  alio  modo 

intellegit. 

91.  Both  public  and  private  buildings,  both  sacred  and  profane, 

aedificia  publica,  privata,  sacra,  prof  ana. 

92.  We  had  reached  the  temple  of  Vesta,  ventum  erat  ad  Vestae. 

93.  To  be  brief,  quid  multa  ?  quid plura  f 

94.  I  find  great  pleasure  in  doing  this,  hoc  gratis simum  facio. 

95.  I  am  far  from  being  cruel,  procul  abest  quin  saevus  sim. 

96.  He  lost  one  of  his  eyes,  altero  oculo  captus  est. 

97.  You  are  the  very  one  I  was  looking  for,  te  ipsum  quarebam. 

98.  Not  only  not  of  citizen's,  but  not  even  of  Italian  blood,  non 

modo  civicae  sed  ne  Italicae  quidem  stirpis. 

99.  We  are  so  far  from  admiring  our  own  matters,  that,  &c,  tan- 

tum abest  ut  nostra  miremur,  ut,  etc. 

100.  We  seem  to  have  advanced  so  far  that  even  in  fulness  of  words 

we  are  not  surpassed  by  the  Greeks,  tantum  profecisse  vide- 
mur  ut  a  Graecis  ne  verborum  quidem  copia  vinceremur. 


:  3 4  Latin   Composition . 

INDEX 

TO    THE    POINTS    CONSIDERED    IN    THE    FOREGOING 
INTRODUCTION. 


I.    Choice  of  the  Word. 

PAGB 

a.  Shade  of  meaning  in  the  English  word 121 

b.  Distinction  expressed  in  Latin  words 121 

c.  Distinction  expressed  in  English  words 121 

cc.  Opposite  point  of  view 121 

d.  English  phrase  equivalent  to  Latin  word 121 

dd.  Use  of  Technical  words *    .    .     .  122 

e.  No  Latin  equivalent  to  the  English  word 122 

f.  Concrete  form  of  expression  in  Latin 122 

ff.  Use  of  abstract  terms 123 

g.  Abstracts  made  concrete  in  the  plural 123 

h.  Change  of  form  in  expressing  Degree 123 

i.  Literal  forms  of  expression 123 

it.  Pairs  of  words  (hendiadys) 123 

/.  Effete  metaphors  in  English 124 

k.  Abstract  noun  used  for  adjective 124 

/.  Color  to  be  given  to  the  expression  but  once 125 

//.  Words  unnecessary  to  be  expressed  in  Latin 125 

m.  Descriptive  or  allusive  expressions 125 

n.  Phrase  used  for  descriptive  epithet 126 

o.  The  main  idea  to  be  put  in  the  leading  clause 126 

II.     Form  of  the  Sentence. 

p.  Periodic  structure  of  the  sentence 126 

q.  Use  of  Relatives  as  connectives,  &c 127 

qq.  Use  of  autem,  enim,  quidem,  vero,  idem 127 

r.  Connective  omitted  in  coordinate  clauses 127 

s.  Coordinate  clause  made  subordinate 127 

/.  Use  of  Pronoun,  to  mark  change  of  subject 127 

tt.  Repetition  of  Pronoun  avoided  by  change  of  structure     .     .     .  127 

u.  The  Noun  to  be  kept  in  the  same  case 128 

v.  Main  idea  in  the  main  clause 128 

vv.  Clauses  to  follow  the  natural  or  logical  order 129 

w.  Use  of  Antithesis 129 

x.  Emphatic  position  of  the  Main  Word 129 

y.  Change  of  Voice 129 

z.  Use  of  Idiomatic  Particles 130 


Exercises  in   Translation.  135 


EXERCISES    IN    TRANSLATION. 

Note.  —  In  the  following  Exercises,  the  small  letters  refer  to  the 
Notes  on  Words  and  Constructions  given  on  pages  121-130;  the 
Jigitres,  to  the  Notes  at  the  foot  of  the  page. 

I.     Death  of  Epaminondas. 

When  Epaminondasv  had  conquered  the  Lacedae- 
monians at  Mantinea,  and  at  the  same  time  perceived 
that  he  was  dying  of  a  mortal  wound,  as  soon  as  he 
could11  see,1  he  asked  whether  his  shield  were  safe. 
When  his  weeping  comrades  answered  that  it  was 
safe,  he  inquired  whether  the  enemy  were  routed; 
andq  when  he  heard  that11  question11  also  answered 
according  to  his  wish,2  he  ordered  the  spear,  with 
which  he  was  transfixed,  to  be  drawn  out.  And  so, 
drenched  with  blood,  he  expired  in  the  midst  of  joy 
and  victory. 

1  dispicere  {a).  2  ut  citpiebat. 

II.     The  Ring  of  Gyges. 

Gyges,  a  shepherd  of  the  king,  when  the  earth  had 
parted  asunder  after  heavy  stormsd  of  rain,  descended 
into  the  aperture,  and  perceived  a  brazen  horse,  in 
whose  side  there  were  doors.  On  opening  these, q  he 
saw  a  bodya  of  unusual  size,  with  a  gold  ring  on  its 
finger ;  thisq  he  drew8  off  and  put  on  his  arm.  Then 
he  betook  himself  to  the  assembly  of  the  shepherds. 
There,  when  he  had  turned  round  the  bezel  of  the 
ring  to  the  palm  of  his  hand,  he  became1  invisible,6 
whileqq  he  saw  every  thing  himself;  when  heq  turned 
the  ring  back  to  its  place,  he  was  once  more  visible. 


136  Latin   Composition. 

III.     Cyrus  the  Younger. 

When  Lysanderv  the  Lacedaemonian  had  come  to 
to  Cyrus11  the  Younger,  at  Sardis,1  and  had  brought 
him  presents  from  the  allies,  Cyrusx  treated1  him  with 
great  courtesyff  and  kindness  in  other  matters,1  and  in 
particular  showed  him  a2  piece  of  ground  fenced  in 
and  carefully  planted.  Whilstq  Lysander  was  admir- 
ing the  tallnessff  of  the  trees,  the  straightnessg  of  their 
rows,  and  the  fragrance  of  the  perfumes  which  were 
wafted3  from  the  flowers,  he  remarkedj  that  he  ad- 
mired the  ingenuity  no  less  than*  the  industry  of  the 
man  who  had  measured3"  out  and  designed  all  these 
things.  And  Cyrus  answered  him,  tf  Well  now,2  I 
made  all  the  measurements  you4  speak  of;  they  are 
myx  rows,  my  designing ;  many  even  of  these  trees 
have  been  planted  by  my  own  hand."  Then  Lysan- 
der, beholding  his  kingly  robe,  the  comeliness  of  his 
person,  and  his  attire  resplendent  with  much  Persian 
gold  and  many  jewels,  said,  "They  rightly  call  you 
happy,  Cyrus,  since  in  you5  good  fortune  is  combined6 
with  morald  excellence." 

1  Lesson  17,  h.  Rem.        2  Lesson  9,  2.  a.        3  See  Grammar,  §  341.  c. 
4  Lesson  7,  5.  5  tua.  6  Lesson  20,  4. 

IV.     Xenophon's  Sacrifice. 

Whilst  Xenophonv  was  performing  the  customary 
sacrifice,  he  received  the  intelligence3  that  the  elder  of 
his  two  sons,  named  Gryllus,  had  fallen  in  the  battle 
at  Mantinea.  He  did  not,  however,  consider  this  a 
sufficient  reasoncc  for  omitting1  the  appointeddd  worship 
of  the  gods,  but  deemed  it  sufficient  to  lay  aside  his 
sacrificiald  crown.     He  then  inquired8  how  he  had  met1 

1  Lit.  "should  be  omitted  on  that  account." 


Exercises  in   Translation,  137. 

his  death,  and  was  told1  that  he  had  fallen  while  fight- 
ing with  the  utmost  bravery.  He  therefore  replaced 
the  crown  upon  his  head,  calling  the  gods,  to  whom 
he  was  sacrificing,  to  witness  that  the  pleasure  he 
received0  at  the  valor  of  his  son  exceeded0  the  grief 
occasioned1  by  his  death. 

1  Lesson  22,  2. 

V.     The  Sibylline  Books. 

1.  An  old  woman,  who  was  quite  unknown  to  him, 
came  to  Tarquiniusx  Superbus,  the  seventh  and  last 
king  of  Rome,  bringing  with  her  nine  books,  which 
she  declared  to  be  the  oracles  of  the  gods  :  she  said 
she  was  willing  to  sell  them.  Tarquinius  inquireds  the 
price  ;  the  womanm  asked  an  extravagant  and  enor- 
mous sum.  The  king™  laughed,  thinking1  the  old 
woman  in  her  dotage. ff  Then  she  placed  a  brazier 
with  fire  in  it  before  him,  and  burnt  up  three  books 
out  of  the  nine  ;  and  then  inquired  of  the  king  whether 
he  were  ready  to  buy  the  remaining  six  at  the  same 
price.  Tarquinius  laughed  still  more,  and  said  that 
beyond  a  doubt2  the  old  woman  was  out  of  her  senses. 

2.  The  woman  immediately,  on  the  spot,  consumed 
three  more  books,  and  once  more  quietly  made  the 
very  same  request  of  the  king,  namely,  to  purchase  the 
remaining  three  at  the  same  price.  Tarquinius,  struck 
by  the  strangeness  of  the  affair,  concluded  that  such 
persistency  and  boldness  were  not  to  be  trifled1  with ; 
and  purchased  the  three  remaining  books  at  just  the 
same  price  that  had  been  asked  for  all  the  nine.  The 
woman  then  left8  the  presence  of  Tarquinius,  but3 
report   says   was  never   seen  afterwards.     The  three 

1  quasi.  2  plane.  3  Lesson  22,  3.  c. 


138  Latin   Composition. 

books  were  deposited1*  in  the  receptacledd  for  sacred 
things,4  and  were  called  the  Sibylline  Books.  Certain 
priests  consulted  them  as  they  would  an  oracle,  when- 
ever the  Romans  considered  that  the  gods  should  be 
consulted  on  behalf  of  the  state.5 

*  sacrarium.  5  publice. 

VI.     Hannibal  and  Antiochus. 

When  Hannibal  on  his  expulsion8  from  Carthage 
went  to  stay  with  Antiochus,x  king  of  Syria,  the  king 
passed  before1  him  in  review1  immense  bodiesd  of 
troops,  which  he  had  equipped  with  the  view  of 
making  war2  against  the  Roman  people.  He  showed 
him  an  army  decorated  with  gold  and  silver  orna- 
ments ;  he  also  brought  on  the  field11  scythed  chariots 
and  elephants  with  towers,  and  cavalry  glittering  with 
their  bits,  housings,  collars,  and  breast-trappings. 
And  then  the  king,  elated  at  the  sight  of  an  army  so 
great  in  numbers  and  so  splendidly  equipped,  turned 
to  Hannibal  and  remarked,1  "Do  you  think  this  army 
can  be  matched  with  that  of  the  Romans?  and  do  you 
think  all  this  will  be  enough  for  the  Romans?"  To 
this  Hannibal,  jeering  at  the  cowardice  and  weakness 
of  his  soldiers,  though  so  splendidly  equipped,  replied,1 
"It  is  my  beliefff  all  this  will  be  enough,  quite  enough, 
for  the  Romans,  however  greedy  they  may  be." 

Nothings  certainly,  could  have  been  said  more 
smart  or  cutting :  the  king  had  put  the  question8  with 
respect"  to  the  number  of  the  army,  whether  it  would 
be  a  match  for  thatu  of  the  Romans ;  Hannibal's 
answer8  had  reference  to  the  booty  the  Romans" 
would  acquire.11 

1  Lit.  "  showed  to  him  in  the  field."  2  Participle  in  rus. 


Exercises  in    Translation*  130 

VII.     The  Talking  Crow. 

After  the  victory  of  Actium,  amongst  those1  who 
came11  to  congratulate  Augustus*  there  approached 
him"  a  certain  man,  having  with  him  a  crow,  which  he 
had  taught  to  say,  Hail,  Ccesar,  conqueror,  emperor! 
Caesar,  struck  with  the  clevernessff  of  the  bird,  bought 
it  for  twenty  thousand  sesterces.  Being  greeted  in 
a  like  manner  by  a  parrot,  he  ordered  it  to  be  pur- 
chased. He  was8  amused  in  the  same  way  with  a 
magpie,  and  it  also  he  bought.  These  instances1 
induced7  a  ppor  shoemaker  to  teach  a  crow  a  similar 
salutation.  Often,  when1  wearied  with  his  task,  heq 
would  say  to  the  bird,  when1  it  did  not  give  the  re- 
quired11 answer,  "  I  have  lost  my  time  and  my  trouble." 
At  length,  however,  the  crow  learned  to  speak  the 
address.  Then  he  brought  the  bird  to  Augustus. 
He,  however,  upon  hearing  the  crow's  greeting,  re- 
marked,-' "I  have  plenty  of  such  saluters  at  home." 
Whereupon  the  crow  added,  very  opportunely,  "I 
have  lost  my  time  and  my  trouble."  At  this  Augustus 
laughed, s  and  ordered  the  bird  to  be  bought  at  a  still 
higher  price11  than  he  had  hitherto  given  for  the  others. 

1  Participle. 

VIII.     Hannibal  in  the  Alps. — Arnold. 

Day  dawned  ;p  the  main11  army  broke  up1  from  its 
camp,x  and  began  to  enter  the  defile ;  whileqq  the 
natives,*  findingaj  their  positions2  occupied  by  the 
enemy,  at  first  looked  on  quietly,  and  offeredj  no  dis- 
turbanceff  to  the  march/  But  when  they  saw  the 
long  narrow  linef  of  the  Carthaginian  army11  winding7 
along  the  steep  mountain  side,  and  the  cavalry1  and 

1  With  moveo  {i,y).  2  arx  (/). 


140  Latin   Composition, 

baggage-cattle  struggling  at  every  step,3  with  the 
difficulties1  of  the  road,  the  temptation1  to  plunder4 
was  too  strong1  to  be  resisted  ;5  and  from  many  points 
of  the  mountain,  above6  the  road,  they  rushed  down7 
upon  the  Carthaginians.  The  confusion  was  terrible  ;* 
for8  the  road  or  track  was8  so  narrowk  that  the  least 
crowd9  or  disorder  pushedy  the  heavily  loaded1  bag- 
gage-cattle down  the  steep  below  ;u  and  the  horses, 
wounded  by  the  barbarians'  missiles,  and  plunging10 
about  wildly10  in  their  pain  and  terror,  increased  the 
mischief.11 

3  Relative  with  insistere  (/).       4  Lesson  15,  a  (/).        5  Impersonal. 
6  imminens.        7  Imperfect.         8  quippe.        9  With  siquid. 
10  fur 0.  n  strages  (a,  i). 

IX.     The  Embassy  of  Philip.  —  Arnold. 

Fortune  in  another  quarterj  served  the  Romans 
no  lessh  effectually .j  Theqq  Macedonian  ambassadors, 
after  havingy  concluded3  their  treaty  with  Hannibal  at 
Tifata,  made  their  way  back  into  Bruttium  in  safety, 
andp  embarked  to  return11  to  Greece.  But  their  ship 
wass  taken,  off  the  Calabrian  coast,  by  the  Roman 
squadron  on1  that11  station ;  and  the  ambassadors, 
with  all  their  papers,  were  sent  prisoners  to  Rome. 
A2  vessel  which  had  been  of  this  companyff  escaped 
the  Romans,3  and  informed4  the  king  what  had  hap- 
pened. He  was  obliged,  therefore,  to  send  a  second 
embassy  to  Hannibal,  as  the  former  treaty  had  never 
reached17  him ;  and  although  this  second  mission1 
went5  and  returned5  safely,0  yet  the  loss  of  time  was 
irreparable,1  andp  nothing  could  be  done  till  the  follow- 
ing year.6 

1  Rel.  clause  (cf.  Lesson  8,  3).  2  unus  (as  opposed  to  the  rest). 

8  Lit.  "out  of  the  hands  of,"  &c   (z).  *  defero  {dd). 

5  Participle.  6  Lit.  "  done  this  year." 


Exercises  in   Translation.  141 

X.     Hannibal  near  Rome. 

1.  The  next  day,  Hannibal,  crossing  the  Anio, 
drew  out  all  his  forces  in  order  of  battle.dd  Nor  did 
Flaccus  and  his  consuls  decline  the  contest.  The 
troops  on  both  sides  having  been  drawn  up  to  try11  the 
chances  of  a1  battle,  in  which  the  city  of  Rome  was  to 
be  the  conqueror's  prize,  a  violent  shower  mingled 
with  hail  so  disordered  both  the  lines,  that  the  troops, 
scarcely  able11  to  hold  their  arms,  retired  into  their 
camps,  with  lessh  apprehension  of  the  enemy  than  of 
any  thing  else.  On  the  following  day,  also,  a  similar 
storm  separated  the  armies  marshalled  on  the  same 
ground.  After  they  had  retired  to  their  camps,  an 
extraordinary  calm  and  tranquillity  arose.  This  cir- 
cumstance was  held  providential2  among  the  Cartha- 
ginians ;  and  an  expression1"  of  Hannibal's  is  said  to 
have  been  heard,  "That  at  one  moment*  the  inclina- 
tion, at  another  the  opportunity,3  of  becoming  master 
of  Rome,  was  not  allowed4  him." 

2.  Other  contingenciesj  also,  the  one  important,1  the 
other  insignificant,1  diminished  his  hopes.  The  im- 
portant one  was,  that,  while  he  was  encamped5  under 
arms  near  the  walls  of  the  city,  he  heard  that  troops 
had  marched  out  with  colors  flying,11  as  a  reinforce- 
ment for  Spain ;  whileqq  the  less  significant  circum- 
stance11 was  that  it  was  discovered,  from  one  of  his 
prisoners,  that  at  this  very  time  the  very  ground  on 
which  he  was  encamped  had  been  sold,  with  no 
diminution11  of  price  on  that  account.3  Indeed,  it 
appeared  so  great  an  insultg  and  indignity  that  a 
purchaser  should  have  been  discovered  at  Rome  for 

*  See  Lesson  7,  1.  Note.  2  With  religio  (dd).         *  for  tuna. 

4  dare  (z).  5  seder e  (i). 


142  Latin   Composition. 

the  very  soil  which  he  possessed  and  held  as  the 
prizeff  of  war,  that,  calling  instantly  for  a  crier,  he 
ordered  that  the  silversmiths'  shops,  which  then  were 
rangedj  around  the  Roman  Forum,  should  be  put  up 
for  sale.dd 

XL     Young  Scipio. 

1.  At  Rome,  after  the  recovery11  of  Capua,  the 
attention1  of  the  Senate  and  people  was  fixed1  upon 
Spain  as  much  ash  upon  Italy ;  and  it  was  resolveddd 
that  the  army  there  should  be  recruited,1  and  a  general 
despatched.1  It  was  not,  however,  so  clear  whom 
they  should  send,  as  that,  since  two  great  generals 
had  fallen  within  thirty  days,  he  who  was  to  supplydd 
their  place  should  be  chosen  with  extraordinary  care. 
As  some  named  one  man,  others  another,  it  was  at 
last  determined  that  the  people  should  hold  an  assem- 
bly to  electdd  a  pro-consul  for  Spain  ;  and  the  consuls 
proclaimed  a  day  for  the  assembly.  At  first  they  had 
expected  that  those  who  believed  themselves  worthy 
of  so  important  a  command  would  give  indd  their 
names.  As  thisq  expectation  was  defeated,  their 
sorrow  for2  the  disaster  sustained  was  renewed,  and 
also  their  regret  for  the  generals  lost. 

2.  Accordingly,  the  people  sorrowfully,  and  almost 
at  a  loss  what  to  decide  upon,3  descended  into  the 
Campus  Martius11  on  the  day  of  the  election;  and, 
turning  towards  the  magistrates,  looked  round  upon 
the  countenances  of  their  leading  men,  who  were4 
anxiously  gazing  at  each  other,  and  murmured  that 
their  fortunes  were  so  fallen,  and  such  despair11"  was 
felt  for  the  state,  that  no  one  ventured  to  accept  the 

1  cura.        2  Lesson  15,  a.        3  consilium  (dd).       4  Lesson  22,  3.  a. 


Exercises  in   Translation.  143 

command  in  Spain  ;  when  suddenly  Publius  Cornelius, 
son  of  that  Publius  who  had  fallen  in  Spain,  then11 
about  twenty-four  years  of  age,  declaringdd  himself  a 
candidate, dd  took  his  station  on  an  eminence1  whence 
he  could  be  seen.  The  eyes  of  the  whole  assembly 
were8  directed  towards  him,  and  by  acclamations  and 
tokens  of  favord  they  augured  a  happy  and  prosperous 
command. 

XII.     Hannibal's  Exile. 

1.  Hannibalx  was0  the  only  man  who0  perceived1 
that  he  was  aimed  at  by  the  Romans ;  and  that  peace 
was  only  allowed  the  Carthaginians  on  the  under- 
standingj  that  a  remorseless  war  should  be  maintained2 
against  himself  alone.  He  therefore  resolved  to  sub- 
mit to  the  crisis  and  to  his  fate  ;  and,  having  prepared 
every  thing  for  flight,  he  first  publicly  appeared3  in 
the  forum  on  that  day  in  order  to  avert  suspicion, 
but,p  as  soon  as  darkness  fell,j  departed  in  his  out-of- 
doors^  dress,  with  two  attendants  ignorant  of  his 
design.  Horses  being  in  readinessff  at  the  spot  where 
they  had  been  ordered/  he  passed8  through  Byzacium 
by  night,  and  arrived  on  the  following  day  on  the  sea- 
coast,  between  Adolla  and  Thapsus,  at  a  castle  of  his 
own.  There*1  a  vessel  prepared  and  manned  with  row- 
ers received  him.  Thus  did  Hannibal  leave  Africa, 
pitying  the  fate  of  his  country  oftenerx  than  his  own. 

2.  The  same  day  he  crossed  into  the  isle  of  Cer- 
cina.  Finding4  there  several5  Phoenician  merchant- 
ships^  in  harbor,  with  their  freights,6  and  a  concourse 
of  people  having  flocked  together  to  welcome  him  as 

1  fat/o,  with  negative.  2  matter e  (/').  3  obversari  (s). 

*  Lesson  22,  2.  s  Lesson  9,  2.  a.  6  merx  (*). 


144  Latin   Composition. 

he7  disembarked  from  the  vessel,  he  ordered  that  all 
who7  inquired  should  be  informed00  that  he  had  been 
sent  as  ambassador  to  Tyre.  Apprehensive,  however, 
that  one5  of  their  ships,  sailing  by  night  for  Thapsus 
or  Adrumetum,  might  announce  that  he  had  been 
seen  at  Cercina,  he  commanded  a  sacrifice  to  be  pre- 
pared, and8  the  captains  of  the  vessels  and  the  mer- 
chants to  be  invited ;  also  giving  orders1  that  the  sails, 
together  with  the  yard-arms,  should  be  brought  toge- 
ther from  the  ships,  that  they  might  enjoy8  the  shade 
—  for  it  happened9  to  bev  midsummer  —  while  supping 
on  the  shore. 

3.  So  far  as  circumstances3  and  time  permitted,  the 
banquet  was  duly  prepared10  and  celebrated  on  that 
day,11  and  the  feast  was  protracted  with  a  profusion  of 
wine  to  a  late  hour  of  night.  Hannibal,  as  soon  as 
he  found  an  opportunity  of  escaping  the  notice  of 
those  who  were  in  the  harbor,  unmoored  his  vessel. 
The  rest,  having  at  length  arisen  from  their  deep 
slumber,  on  the  following  day,  full  of  the  fumesd  of 
wine,  spent  several  hours  in  carrying  back  and  setting 
in  order  the  tackle  of  their  ships. 

4.  At  Carthage,  too,  there  was  a  concourse  of  the 
people,  accustomed  to  frequent  the  house  of  Hannibal, 
at  the  vestibule  of  his  mansion.  As  soon  as  it  was 
generally  known12  that  he  was  not  to  be  found,13  a 
crowd  of  citizens,11  in  quest  of  the  chief  man  in  the 
state,  flocked1  to  the  forum. x  Some  spread  a  report 
that  he  had  taken  to  flight,  as14  was  really11  the 
case  ;'  others  that  he  had  been  assassinated  by  the 
treachery   of  the. Romans;    and  you  might  observe 

7  Lesson  22,  3.  a.  8  Withyfo  (cc).  9  forte. 

10  With  noun  in  adverbial  phrase  (compare/).  n  Lesson  15,  a. 

12  vulgar i.  13  comparere  (cc).  u  id  quod. 


Exercises  in    Translation,  145 

various  countenances,  as  is  natural11  in  a  state  agi- 
tated15 by  the  intrigues  of  partisans  supporting  different 
factions. 

15  discors,  making  it  more  personal :  lit.  "  of  men  supporting  {favere) 
different  {alius  alius)  parties  and  agitated,"  &c.  (compare  z). 


XIII.     The  Tale  of  Atalanta. — Bacon. 

Atalanta,  who  was  exceeding  fleet,1  contendedx 
with  Hippomenes  in  the  course, x  on  condition  that,  if 
Hippomenes  won,  he  should  espousedd  her,  or  forfeit 
his  life  if  he  lost.  The  match  was  very  unequal,  forp 
Atalanta  had  conquered7  numbers1  to  their  destruc- 
tion.0 Hippomenes  therefore  had  recourse8  to  strata- 
gem. He  procured8  three  golden  apples,  and  purposely 
carried  them  with  him.  They  started.7  Atalanta  out- 
stripped him  soon ;  then  Hippomenes  bowled  one  of 
his11  apples  before  her,1  across  the  course,  in  order1  not 
only  to  make11  her  stoop,  but  to  draw7  her  out  of  the 
path.  She,  prompted  by  female  curiosity,2  and  the 
beauty  of  the  golden  fruit,11  starts  from  the  course  to 
take  up  the  apple.  Hippomenes,  in  the  mean  time, 
holds  on  his  way,  andp  steps  before  her ;  but  she,  by 
her  natural11  swiftness,  soon  fetches  up  her  lost  ground, 
and  leaves  him  again  behind.  Hippomenes,  however, 
by  rightly  timing3  his  second  and  third  throws, ff  at 
length  won  the  race,  not  by  his  swiftness,  but1"  by  his 
cunning. x 

1  eo  consilio  ut.  2  studium  (/).  $  jactare  ad  tempus. 


XIV.     Assassination  of  Caesar. — Plutarch. 

1.  When1  Csesarx  entered,  the  Senate  rose  to  do 
him"  honor,dd  and  some  of  the  party2  of  Brutus  stood 
1  Lesson  22,  3.  a.  a  Lesson  15,  c. 


146  Latin   Composition. 

around  his  chair  at  the  back,  and  others  presented 
themselves  before  him,  as  if  their  purpose1*  was  to 
support  the  prayers  of  Tillius  Cimber  on  behalf  of  his 
exiled  brother ;  and  they  all  joined  in  entreaty,  follow- 
ing Cassar  as  far  as  his  seat.  When  he  had  taken  his 
seat,  and  was  rejecting  their  entreaties,  and  as  they 
urged3  him  still  more  strongly,  began  to  show  dis- 
pleasureff  towards  them  individually,  Tillius,  taking 
hold  of  his  toga  with  both  hands,  pulled  it  downward 
from  the  neck,  which  was  the  signal  for  the  attack." 
Casca  was  the  first  to  strike0  him  on  the  neck  with  his 
sword,  a  blow  neither  mortal  nor  severe ;  for,q  as  was 
natural  at  the  beginningff  of  so  bold  a  deed,  he  was 
confused,  andq  Caesarm  turning  round  seized8  the  blade 
and  held  it  fast. 

2.  And  it  happened0  that  at  the  same  moment*1  he 
who  was  struck111  cried0  out  in  the  Roman  language, 
"You  villain  Casca,  what  are  you  doing?"  and  he 
who  had  given™  the  blow  cried1  out  to  his  brother1  in 
Greek,  "  Brother,  help  !  "  Such  being  the  beginning, 
those  who  were  not  privy  to  the  conspiracy  were  pre- 
vented by  consternation  and  horror  at  what  was  going 
on  either  from  flying4  or  going  to  aid,  and  they  did 
not  even  venture  to  utter  a  word.  And  nowqq  each  of 
the  conspirators  bared8  his  sword  ;  and  Caesar  being 
hemmed  in  all  round,  in  whatsoever  direction  he 
turned  meeting  blows  and  swords  aimed  against  his 
eyes  and  face,  driven  about  like  a  wild  beast,  was 
caught  in  the  hands  of  his  enemies ;  for  it  was 
arranged  that  all  of  them  should  take  a  part  in  and 
taste  of  the  deed1  of  blood.1 

3.  Accordingly  also  Brutus  gave  him  one  blow  in 
the    groin.     It  is    said  by  some   authorities,   that  he 

3  Lesson  22,  3.  *  Lesson  31,  2.  d. 


Exercises  in   Translation.  147 

defended  himself  against  the  rest,  moving7  about  his 
body  hither  and  thither,  and  calling  out,  till  he  saw 
that  Brutus  had  drawn  his  sword  ;  when5  he  pulled 
his  toga  over  his  face  and  offered  no  further  resist- 
ance/ having  been  driven  either  by  chance  or  the  con- 
spirators to  the  base  on  which  the  statue  of  Pompey 
stood.  And  the  base  was  drenched  with  blood,  as  if 
Pompey  was  directing  the  vengeance  upon  his  enemy, 
who  was  stretched  beneath  his  feet,  and  writhing36 
under  many  wounds  ;  for  he  is  said  to  have  received7 
three  and  twenty  wounds.11  Many  of  the  conspirators 
were  wounded  by  one  another,  while  they  were  aiming 
so  many  blows  against  one  body. 

5  turn  vero. 


XV.     Death  of  Marcus  Antonius. 

1.  The  orator,  Marcus  Antonius,  found  a  faithful 
friend  in  these  dangerous  times,  but  still  he  did  not 
escape.  This  friend, m  though  a  poor  man  and  of  the 
lower  class,  received  in  his  house  one  of  the  most  illus- 
trious" of  the  Romans,  and  wishing  to  entertain  him 
as  well  as  he  could,  sent  a  slave  to  one  of  the  neigh- 
boring wine-shops  to  get  some  wine.  As  the  slave 
was  more  curious  than  usual  in  tasting0  it,  and  told 
the  man  to  givey  him  some  better  wine,  the  merchant 
asked  what  could  be  the  reason11  that  he  did  not  buy 
the  new  wine,  as  usual,  and  the  ordinary  wine,11  but 
wanted  some  of  good  qualityff  and  high  price. ff  The 
slave  replied  in  his  simplicity/  as  he  was  speaking  to 
an  old  acquaintance,  that  his  master  was  entertaining 
Marcus  Antonius,  who  was  concealed  at  his  house. 
The  wine-dealer,m  a  faithless  and  unprincipled  wretch,11 


148  Latin   Composition. 

as  soon  -as  the  slave  left  him,  hurried  off  to  Marius, 
who  was  at  supper,  and  having  gained  admission, 
told  him  he  would  betray  Marcus  Antonius  to  him. 

2.  On  hearing1  this,q  Marius  is  said  to  have  uttered 
a  loud  shout,  and  to  have  clapped  his  hands  with  de- 
light ;  and  he  was  near2  getting  up  and  going  to  the 
place  himself,  but  his  friends  stoppedsy  him,  and  he 
despatched  Annius  with  some  soldiers  with  orders1  to 
bring  him  the  head  of  Antonius  immediately.  On 
reaching3  the  house,  Annius  waited8  at  the  door,  and 
the  soldiers  mounting  the  stairs11  entered  the  room  ;  but, 
on  seeing  Antonius,  every  man  began  to  urge  some  of 
his  companions,  and  push  him  forward  to  do  the  deed 
instead11  of  himself.  And  so  persuasive  was  the  charm 
of  his  eloquence,  when  Antonius  began  to  speak  and 
plead  for  his  life,  that  not  a  man  of  them  could11  ven- 
ture to  lay  hands  on  him  or  look  him  in  the  face,  but 
they  all  bent8  their  heads  down  and  shed  tears.  As 
thisq  causedy  some  delay,  Annius  went  up  stairs,11  where 
he  saws  Antonius  speaking,  and  the  soldiers  awed  and 
completely  softened  by  his  eloquence  :  on  whichp  he 
abused  them,  and  running  up  to  Antonius,  cut  off  his 
head  with  his  own  hand. 

1  Lesson  22,  3.  b.  2  Lesson  31,  2.  b,  d.  3  Lesson  22,  2. 

XVI.     Destruction  of  Carthage. 

1.  But  when,  yielding7  to  famine,  the  most  resolute 
of  them  set  fire  to  the  temple,  Hasdrubal  could  not 
endure  to  facej  death  ;  aloneqq  he  ranx  forth  to  the  vic- 
tor, and  falling  upon  his  neck  pleaded  for  his  life.  It 
was  granted  ;y  but  when  his  wife,  who  with  her 
children  was  amongst  the  rest  on  the  roof  of  the 
temple,   saw  him  at   the  feet  of   Scipio,   her  proud11 


Exercises  in    Trans  la  lion.  149 

heart  swelled3  at  this  disgrace  brought  on  her-beloved 
perishing  home,1  and  with  bitter  words  bidding  her 
husband  be  careful  to  save  his  life,  she  plunged  first 
her  sons  and  then  herself  into  the  flames.  The  strug- 
gle was8  at  an  end.  Thep  joy  in  the  campw  and  at 
Rome  was  boundless  :x  the  noblestp  of  the  Romans 
alone  weres  in  secret  ashamed  of  the  most  recent 
achievement  of  the  nation. 

2.  The  senate  ordered  the  general  to  level  the  city 
of  Carthage  and  the  suburb  of  Magalia  with  the 
ground,  and  to  do  the  same  with  all  the  places  which 
had  held  by  Carthage  to  the  last ;  and  thereafter  to 
pass  the  plough  over  the  site  of  Carthage,  so  as  to  put 
an  end  in  legal  formdd  to  the  existence**"  of  the  city,  and 
to  curse  the  soil  and  site  for  ever,  that  neither  house 
nor  corn-field  might  ever  reappear1  on  the  spot.  Theq 
command  was  punctually  obeyed.  The  ruins  burned 
for  seventeen  days.  Recently,  when  the  remains  of 
the  city  wall  were  excavated,  they  were  found  to  be 
covered  with  a  layer11  of  ashes  from  four  to  five  feet 
deep,  filled  with  half-charred  pieces  of  wood,d  frag- 
ments of  iron,  and  projectiles.  Whereqq  the  indus- 
trious Phoenicians  had  bustled  and  trafficked  for  five 
hundred  years,  Roman  slaves  henceforth  pastured  the 
herds  of  their  distant  masters. 


XVII.     Xenophon  at  the  Sea. 

1.  They8  had  crossed1  the  plain  to  the  foot  of  the 
hills  in  the  dark,  during  the  last  watch  of  the  night, 
andp  found  the  passes2  unguarded.  Butqq  the  people1 
fled  from  the  villages  at  their  approach,  and  though 
the  Greeks  at  first  spared7  their  property  ,j  could  not 

l  pervenire  with  trans.  2  Insert  quidem  (qq). 


150  Latin   Composition. 

be  induced  to  listen  to  any  pacific1  overtures.-1  But 
having  recovered  from  their  first  surprise,  and8  col- 
lected a  part  of  their  forces,  they  fell  upon  the  rear  of 
the  Greeks,  and  with  their  missiles  made  some  slaugh- 
ter among  the  last3  troops"  which  issued  in  the  dusk  of 
the  evening"  from  the  long  and  narrow  defile.  In  the 
nightqq  the  watchn-fires  of  the  Carduchians  were  seen 
blazing4  on  the  peaks  of  the  surrounding5  hills ;  sig- 
nals3 which  warned  the  Greeks  that  they  might  expect6 
to  be  attacked  by  the  collected  forces  of  their  tribes. 

2.  On  the  fifth  day,  as7  the  army  was  ascending 
Mount  Theche,  a  lofty  ridge  distinguishedj  by  the 
name  of  the  Sacred  Mountain,  Xenophon  and  the  rear- 
guard observed  a  stoppageff  and  an  unusual  clamor  in 
the  foremost  ranks,11  which  had  reached  the  summit, 
and  they8  supposed  at  first  that  they  sawy  an  enemy 
before  them.  But  when  Xenophon  rode  up  to  ascer- 
tain the  cause,  the  first  shouts  that  struck0  his  ear 
were,  The  sea,  the  sea!  The  glad  sound  ran  quickly 
till  it  reached  the  hindmost,  and  all  pressed  forward 
to  enjoy  the  cheering  spectacle.  The  Euxineqq  spread00 
its  waters  before  their  eyes  ;  waters  which  rolled  on  to 
the  shores  of  Greece,  and  which  washed  the  walls  ot 
many  Greek  cities  on  the  nearest  coast  of  Asia. 

3  In  relative  clause.  4  Infinitive.  5  Lesson  8,  3. 

6  Part  in  dus{y).        7  Lesson  25,  2.  b.        8  adeo  ut  (J> ). 


XVIII.     Vercingetorix. — Merivale. 

Vercingetorix,  with  all  the  gallant  gayetyff  of  his 
nation,1  clads  himself  in  his  most  splendid  armour, 
and  mounted  his  noblest  charger.  Csesarqq  had  drawn8 
up  his  troops,  and  had  seated  himself  to  receive  his 

1  ut  fere  Galli  {/). 


Exercises  in    Translation.  151 

captives.  The  Gaulm  caused11  the  gates  of  his  en- 
campment to  bethrown8  wide,  and  galloped  forth  into 
the  open  space,  in  the  attitude  of  a  warrior  charging.2 
Having  approached  close  to  the  proconsul's  chair,  he 
dexterously  wheeled  round,  and  again  returning  to 
the  same  spot,  sprang  to  the  ground,  and  laid  his 
arms  at  the  feet  of  the  conqueror.  The  armyp  was8 
touched  with  a  sensed  of  admiration  akin  to  com- 
passion, but  Caesar  himself  remained  cold1  and  un- 
moved. 

2  With  arma. 


XIX.     A  Story  of  Wolves. 

We  had1  one  dangerous  place  to  pass,  and  our 
guide  told  us,  if  there  were  more  wolves  in  the  coun- 
try ,j  we  should  find  them  there  ;q  andqq  this  was  a  small 
plain  surrounded  with  woods  on  every  side.  It  was 
within  half  an  hour  of  sunset  when0  we  entered  the 
wood,  and  a  little  after  sunset  when0  we  came  into  the 
plain:  we  met  with  nothing  in  the  first  wood,  except 
that  we  saw  five  great  wolves  cross  the  road,  full 
speed  one  after  another,  as  if  they  had  been  in  chase 
of  some  prey  and  had  it  in  view  :  they  took  no  noticeff 
of  us,  and  were  gone  out  of  sight  in  a  few  moments. 
Upon  this,  our  guide,  who,  by  the  way,2  was  but3  a 
faint-hearted  fellow,  bid  us  keep  in  a  ready  posture,1 
for  he  believed  there  were  more  wolves  a-coming. 
We  kept  our  arms  ready  and  our  eyes  about  us ;  but 
we  saw  no  more  wolves  till  we  came  through  that 
wood,  which  was  near  half  a  league,  and  entered  the 
plain.     As  soon  as  we  came  into  the  plain  we  had 

1  Lesson  20,  2.  c.  2  quidem.  3  sane. 


152  Latin   Comfositio n . 

occasion3  enough  to  look  about  us :  the  first  object  we 
met  with  was  a  dead  horse  which  the  wolves  had 
killed,  and  at  least  a  dozen  of  them  at  work  picking 
his  bones. 

XX.     Death  of  Socrates.  —  Plato, 

1.  When  he  had  thus  spoken,  Socrates  arose  and 
went  into  another  room  that  he  might  wash  himself, 
and  Crito  followeds  him  ;u  butQq  he  ordered8  us  to  wait 
for  him.11  We  waited  therefore  accordingly,  discours- 
ing over  and  reviewing  among  ourselves  what  had 
been  said;  and  sometimes  speaking  about  his  death, 
how  great  a  calamity  it  would  be  to  us ;  and  sincerely 
thinking  that  we,  like  those  who  are  deprived  of  their 
fathers,  should  pass7  the  rest  of  our  life  in  the  condi- 
tion of  orphans. d  But  when  he  had  washed  himself, 
his  sons  were  brought  to  him  (for  he  had  two  little 
ones,  and  one  older),  and  the  women  belonging  to  his 
family11  likewise  came  in  to  him ;  butq  when  he  had 
spoken  to  them  before  Crito,  and  had  left  them  such 
injunctionsg  as  he  thought7  proper,11  he  ordered7  the 
boys  and  women  to  depart,8  and  he  himself  returned 
to  us. 

2.  And  it  was  now  near  the  setting  of  the  sun ;  for 
he  had  been  away  in  the  inner  room  for  a  long  time. 
But  when  he  came  in  from  bathing1  he  sat  down,  and 
did  not2  speak  much  afterwards ;  for  then  the  servant 
of  the  Elevendd  came  in,  and  standing  near  him,  said, 
n  I  do  not  perceive  that  in  you,  Socrates,  which  I  have 
taken1  notice1  of  in  others  :  I  mean,11  that  they  are 
angry  with  me  and  curse  me,  when  being  compelled 
by  the  magistrates  I  announce  to  them  that  they  must 

1  lotus.  2  nee. 


Exercises  in   Translation.  153 

drinky  the  poison.  But,  on  the  contrary,3  I  have  found 
you  to  the  present  timed  to  be11  the  most  generous, 
mild,  and  best  of  all  the  men  that  ever  came  into  this 
place ;  and  therefore  I  am  well  convinced  that  you 
are  not  angry  with  me,  but  with  the  authors4  of  your 
present  condition,  for  you  know  who  they  are.  Now 
therefore,  for  you  know  what  I  came  to  tell  you,  fare- 
well ;  and  endeavor  to  bear  this  necessity  as  easily 
as  possible." d 

3.  At  the  same  time  bursting  into  tears,  and  turning 
himself  away,  he  departed.  But  Socrates,  looking 
after  him,  said,  "And  thou,  too,  farewell;  and  we 
shall  take  care11  to  act  as  you  advise."  And  at  the 
same  time,  turning  to  us,  "  How  courteous,"  he  said, 
*  is  the  behaviorff  of  that  man  !  During  the  whole 
time  of  my  abodeff  here,  he  has  visited  me,  and  often 
conversed  with  me,  and  proved  himself  to  be  the  best 
of  men  ;  and  now  how  generously  he  weeps  on  my 
account!  But2  let  us  obey  him,  Crito,  and  let  some 
one  bring  the  poison  if  it  is  bruised  ;  and,  if  not,  let 
the  man  whose  business11  it  is  bruise  it." 

4.  *  But,  Socrates,"  said  Crito,  "  I  think  that  the 
sun  still  hangs1  over  the  mountains,  and  is  not  set  yet.z 
And  at  the  same  time  I  have  known  others  who0  have 
drunk  the  poison  very  late  after  it  was  announced  to 
them ;  who5  have  supped  and  drunk  abundantly. 
Therefore  do  not  be  in  such  haste,  for  there  is  yet 
time  enough."  Socrates  replied,11  "  Such6  men,  Crito, 
act  fitly  in  the  manner  which  you  have-  described,  for 
they  think  to  derive  some  advantage0"  from  so  doing  ;a 
and  I  also  with  propriety  shall  not  act  in  this  manner.11 
For  I  do  not  think  I  shall  gain  any  thing  by  drinking 

3  quod  contra.  4  Rel.  clause  (Lesson  8,  3).  6  Participle. 

6  isti. 


154  Latin   Composition. 

it  later,  except  becoming7  ridiculous  to  myself  through 
desiring  to  live,  and  being  sparing  of  life,  when 
nothing  of  it  any  longer2  remains.  Go  therefore," 
said  he,  "  be  persuaded,8  and  comply  with  my  re- 
quest."11 

5.  Then  Crito,  hearing5"  this,Q  gave  a  sign  to  the 
boy  that  stood  near  him  ;  and  the  boym  departing,  and 
having  stayed  for  some  time,  came  back  with  the  per- 
son that  was  to  administer1  the  poison,  who  brought  it 
pounded  in  a  cup.  And  Socrates,  looking  at  the  man, 
sain,  "  Well,9  my  friend,  as  you  are  knowing  in  these 
matters,  what  is10  to  be  done?"  "Nothing,"  he  said, 
"  but11  after  you  have  drunk  it  to  walk  about,  until  a 
heaviness  comes  on  in  your  legs,  and  then  to  lie  down  : 
this  is  the  manner  in  which  you  have0  to  act."  And 
at  the  same  time  he  extended  the  cup  to  Socrates. 
And  Socrates  taking  it  —  and,  indeed,  with  great 
cheerfulness,  neither  trembling  nor  turning  color,  but 
as  his  mannerff  was,  looking  sternly  under  his  brows 
at  the  man  — "  What  say  you,"  he  said,  "to  making0  a 
libationx  from  this?  may  I  do  it  or  not?" 

6.  "  We  can  only  bruise  as  much,  Socrates,"  he 
replied,11  "as  we  think  sufficient  for  the  purpose." 
"I  understand  you,"  he  said,  "  butz  it  is  both  lawful 
and  proper  to  pray  to  the  gods  that  my  departure  from 
hence  to  another  world  may  be  prosperous :  which  I 
entreat  them  to  grant  may  be  the  case."j  And  so  say- 
ing, he  stopped  and  drank  the  poison  very  readily  and 
pleasantly.  And  thus  far  the  greater  part  of  us  were 
tolerably12  well  able  to  refrain  from  weeping;13  but 
when  we  saw  him  drinking,  and  that  he  had  drunk  it, 
we  could  no  longer  restrain  our  tears.     And  from  me, 

7  With  ut.  8  credere.  9  quid  est.  10  oportet. 

11  quam  ut.  12  satis.  13  Lesson  31,  2.  d. 


Exercises  in    Translation.  155 

in  spite  of  my  efforts,3  they  flowed,  and  that  not  drop 
by  drop  ;  so  that  wrappingy  myself  in  my  mantle,  I 
bewailed,  not  indeed  for  his  misfortune,  but  for  my 
own,  considering  what  a  companion  I  should  be 
deprived   of. 

XXI.     Hannibal  in  the  Apennines. 

So  furious  a  tempest  attacked  him1  (while)  cross- 
ingx  the  Apennines,  that  it  almost  surpassed  the 
horrors  of  the  Alps.  The  rain  and  wind  together2 
being3  driven  directly4  against  their  faces,  they  first 
halted,  becausev  either  they  were  obliged  to  drop 
their  arms,  or,  if5  they  struggled  against  the  storm, 
they  were  whirled  round  by  the  hurricane,  and5 
dashed  upon  the  ground  :n  afterwards,  as6  it  took 
away1  their  breath,  and  did  not  allow  them  to  respire, 
they  sat  down  for  a  short  time  with  their  backs7  to  the 
wind.  Then,  indeed,  the  sky  resounded8  with  the 
loudest  thunder,9  and  lightnings10  flashed  amid  the 
terrific  peals  :  deafened11  and  blinded,  they  all  became 
insensible12  with  fear.  At  last,  the  rain  having  spent1 
itself,  and  the  violence  of  the  wind  having  been  re- 
doubled13 upon  that  account,  it  was  held  requisite  to 
pitch  their  camp  on  the  very  spot  whereon  they  had 
been  overtaken  by  the  storm.11  But  this  was  like14  a 
fresh  commencement  of  their  toils.  For  they  could 
neither  spread  their  canvas,1  nor  fix  their  poles  :l  nor 
would  any  thing  that  had  been  fixed  remain,  the  wind 
tearing  every  thing  to  shreds15  and  hurrying  it  away  ; 
and  soon  after,  when  the  water  which5  had  been  raised 

1  Hannibal.  2  mixtus  (/).  3  Lesson  22,  2.  4  ipse  (/). 

5  Lesson  22,  3.  a  6  cum.  7  aversus  (i,  y).  8  Infinitive. 

9  sonus  (/).         10  ignis.        ll  captns>  with  nouns.        Vi  With  toj'pere. 

13  magis  accensus.  M  velut.  15  By  prep,  in  compost 


156  Latin   Composition. 

aloft  by  the  gale,  had  been  frozen  on  the  icy  summits 
of  the  mountains,  itv  poured  down  such  a  torrent1  of 
snowy  hail,  that  the  soldiers,  throwing  every  thing 
away,  fell  down  upon  their  faces,15  rather  smothered16 
than  covered  by  their  clothes.  And  such  an  intensity1 
of  cold  succeeded,  that,  whenever  any  one  endea- 
vored to  raise  and  lift  himself  up  from  this  miserable 
prostrate  mass17  of  men  and  cattle,  he  was  long 
unable,  because,  his  sinews  stiffening  with  the  cold, 
he  was  hardly  capablej  of  bending  his  joints. 

16  obruere.  17  strages. 


XXII.     The  Gauls  at  Rome. 

The  Romans,  seeing1  from  the  citadel  the  city  full 
of  the  enemy,  some  new  disaster  continually  arising 
on  every2  side,  were  unable  not  only  to  realizef  it,11  but 
even  to  command3  their  senses.4  Wherever  the  shouts 
of  the  foe,  the  lamentations  of  women  and  children, 
the  crackling  of  fire,  and  the  crash  of  falling  roofs, 
called5  their  attention,11  terrified  at  every  sound,1  they 
turned  their  thoughts,  faces,  and  eyes,  as  if  stationed 
by  fortune  to  be  spectators6  of  the  ruinff  of  their  coun- 
try, and  left  to  protect7  no  part  of  their  property,1 
except  their  own  persons  :l  so  much  more8  to  be  pitied 
than  others  that  have  ever  been  besieged,  inasmuch 
as9  they  were  at  once  invested  and8  shut  out  from 
their  country,  beholding  all  their  effectsj  in  the  power 
of  their  enemies.  Nor  was  the  night  which0  suc- 
ceeded10 a  day  so  miserably  spent  more  tranquil  :x  day- 

1  Lesson  22,  2. 

2  alius  atque  alius  ;  so  as  to  present  the  actual  picture  more  vividly  (cf.  /). 

3  constare.         4  Express  by  the  organs  of  sense  (/).  5  avertere. 

6  spectaculum  {cc).        1  vindex  ( y).        8  ante.         9  Lesson  28,  2.  d. 

10  ex  riper e  (cf.  k). 


Exercises  in   Translation,  157 

light  then  followed  a  restless  night :  nor  was  there  any 
moment  which0  was  free  from11  the  spectacle  of  some 
ever12  new  disaster.  Nevertheless,  burdened  and  over- 
whelmed by  so  many  evils,  they  abated13  notx  their 
courage,  determined,14  although  they  had  beheld  all 
things  levelled  by  conflagration  and  ruin,  to  defend,  by 
their  valor,  the  hill  which  they  occupied,  ill-provided 
and  narrow  as  it  was,15  yet  the  refuge16  of  freedom. 
And  at  last,  as  the  same  things  happened  every  day, 
they  had  abstracted  their  thoughts,  as  ifv  inured  to  ca- 
lamities,1 from  all  sense  of  their  misfortunes  ;  gazing 
only  upon  the  arms,  and  the  swords  in  their  hands,  as 
the  sole  remnants  of  their  hopes. 

11  ccssare  (a),  to  give  a  more  intense   personal  character  than  the 

ordinary  words. 

12  semper.  18  fleeter e.  14  quin  (/). 

15  The  phrase  may  be  omitted  (cf.  //),  or  with  quamvis.       16  relietus  (ee). 

XXIII.     Murder  of  Marcellus. 

1.  The  day  following,  as  I  was  purposing1  to  set 
out  from  Athens,  his  friend  Posthumius  came  to  me 
about  four2  in  the  morning,  and  informed  me  Marcellus 
had  been  stabbed3  the  night  before  by  Magius  Cilo, 
whilst  they  were  sitting11  together  after  supper ;  that 
he  had  received  two  wounds  from  a  dagger,1  one  of 
which  was11  in  his  breast,  and  the  other  under  his  ear ; 
but  that  neither  of  them,  he  hoped,  was  mortal.1  He 
added,5  that  Magius,  after  having  committed  this  bar- 
barous action,11  immediately  killed  himself;  and  that 
Marcellus  had  despatchedy  him  in  order  to  give  me 
this  account,  and. likewise  to  desire  that  1  would  direct 
my  physicians  to  attend11  him.     This  I  instantly  did  ; 

1  hi  ammo  habere.  2  Lesson  17,  e.  3  fei-ire,  pugitoU  icere. 

4  Lit.  "  hoped  he  could  live"  {ee,  i).  5  Lesson  30,  1.  e  {11). 


158  Latin   Corn-position, 

and  followed  them  myself  as  soon1  as  it  was  light. 
But  when  I  had  almost  reachedcc  Piraeeus,  I  metcc  a 
servant  of  Acidanus  with  a  note  to  acquaint  me  that 
our  friendm  expired  a  little  before  day -break.  Thus 
did  the  noble  Marcellusm  unworthily  fall6  by  the  hand 
of  a  villanous  assassin  ;j  and  he  whose  life  his  very 
enemies  had  spared,  in  reverence3  to  his  illustrious  vir- 
tues,7 mety  with  an  executioner  at  last  in  his  own 
friend  !v 

2.  However,  I  proceeded  to  his  pavilion  :  wherer  I 
found  only  two  of  his  freedmen  and  a  few  slaves ;  the 
rest,  I  was  told/  having  fled  in  apprehension  of  the 
consequences11  in  which  they  might  be  involved3  by 
this  murder8  of  their  master.  I  was  obliged  to  place 
the  body9  of  Marcellus  in  the  same  sedan  that  brought7 
me,  and  to  make10  my  chair-men  carry  it  into  Athens  : 
where  I  paid  him  all  the  funeral  honors  that  city  could 
supply  ;j  which  indeed  were  not  inconsiderable.  But 
I  could  not  prevail11  with  the  Athenians  to  suffer12  him 
to  be  buried  within  their  walls ;  a  privilege,-1  they 
assured5  me,  which  their  religious  ordinances  would 
by  no  means  admit.  They  granted  me,  however, 
what  was  the  next  honor,11  and  which  they  had  never 
permitted  to  any  stranger  before  :  they  allowed11  me  to 
deposit  his  ashes  in  any  of  the  Gymnasia  I  should 
think  proper.  Accordingly  I  fixed  upon  a  spot  belong- 
ing to  the  Academy,  one  of  the  noblest  colleges13  in  the 
whole  world.  In  this  place  I  caused  a  funeral  pile  to 
be  erected,  and  afterwards  persuaded  the  Athenians 
to  raisedd  a  marble  monument  to  his  memory ,d  at  the 
public  expense. dd     Thus  have  I  paid  to  my  relation 

6  acerbissima  morte  afficere  (i).  7  dignitas.         8  Clause  with  quod. 

9  Simply  is.  10  With  instrum.  abl.  (j).  n  impetrare. 

12  locum  dare.  l3  gymnasium. 


Exercises  in   Translation.  159 

and  colleague,14  both  during  his  life  and  after  his 
death,  every  friendly  office  he  had  a  right  to  expect15 
from  me.     Farewell. 

14  Express  by  pro  with  abstract  noun  (cc). 

15  With  simple  possessive  pronoun  (/). 

XXIV.     Story  of  Cinctnnatus. — Arnold. 

1.  Then  the  Masterdd  of  the  people  and  the  Master 
of  the  horse  went  together  into  the  forum,  and  bade 
every  man  to  shuty  up  his  booth,  and  stoppeddd  all 
causes  at  law,dd  and  ordered  that  every1  man  who  was 
of  an  age  to  godd  out  to  battle  should  be  ready  in  the 
Field  of  Marsd  before  sunset,  and8  should  have11  with 
him  victuals  for  five  days,  and  twelve  stakes  ;  and  the 
older  men  dressed  the  victuals  for  the  soldiers,  whilst 
the  soldiers1"  went  about  everywhere2  to  get  their 
stakes  ;  and  they  cut  them  where  they  would  without3 
any  hindrance. ff  So  the  army  was  ready  in  the  Field 
of  Mars  at  the  time4  appointed,  and  they  set  forth 
from  the  city,  and  made  such  haste, ff  that  ere  the  night 
was  half  spent11  they  came  to  Algidus  ;  and  when  they 
perceived  that  they  were  near  the  enemy,  they  made 
a  halt.dd 

2.  Then  Lucius  rode  on  and  saw  how  the  camp  of 
the  enemy11  lay5 ;  and  he  ordered  his  soldiers  to  throw 
down  all11  their  baggage  into  one  place,11  but  to  keep 
each  man  his  arms  and  his  twelve  stakes.  Then  they 
set  out  again  in  their  order  of  march  as6  they  had  come 
from  Rome,  and  they  spread  themselves  round  the 
camp  of  the  enemy  on  every  side.  When  this  was 
done,  upon  a  signal  given  they  raised  a  great  shout, 
and  directly  every  man  began  to  dig  a  ditch  just  where 

1  Indef.  Rel.  2  dis-  in  composition.  3  Lesson  23,  2.  c. 

4  ad  edictum.  5  With  situs.  6  Lesson  8,  7. 


160  Latin   Composition. 

he  stood,  and  to  set  in  his  stakes.  The  shout  rang 
through  the  camp  of  the  enemy,  and  filled  them  with 
fear ;  and  it  sounded  even  to  the  camp  of  the  Romans 
who  were  shut  up  in  the  valley,  and  the  consul's  men 
said  one  to  another,  "Rescue  is7  surely  at  hand,  for 
that  is  the  shout  of  the  Romans."8 

7  Lesson  30.  8  Use  civis,  for  facility  in  making  an  adjective. 

XXV.     Princely  Generosity. — Feltham. 

Diogenes  asked1  Platox  for  a  glass  of  wine,  andq  he 
presently  sent  him11  a  gallon.  When  next  Diogenes* 
met  him,  he  said  to  him  :  "  I  asked  you  how  many 
were  two  and  two?  and  you  have  answered,  twenty." 
There  are  some  of  so  noble  a  disposition,  that,  like 
trees  of2  ripe  fruit,  by  degrees  they  drop  away  all 
that  they  have  ;  they  would3  even  outdo  the  demands 
of  all  their  friends,  and  would  give  as  if  they  were 
gods,  that  could  not  be  exhausted  ;  they  look  not  so 
much  either  at  the  merit  of  others,  or  their  own 
ability,4  as  the  satisfactionff  of  themselves  from  their 
own  bounty.  I  find  not  a  higher  genius  this  way,5 
than  glowedj  in  the  victorious01  Alexander.  He  warred 
as  if  he  coveted  all  things,  and  gave  away  as  if  he 
cared  for  nothing.  You  would  think  he  did  not  con- 
quer for  himself,  but  his  friends ;  and  that  he  took, 
only  that  he  might  have  wherewith  to  give ;  so  that 
one  might  well6  conclude  the  world  itself  was  too 
little7  for  either  his  ambition  or  his  bounty.  When 
Perillus  begged  that  he  would  be  pleased  to  give  him 
a  portion  for  his  daughters,  he  immediately  com- 
manded him  fifty  talents.      The  modest  beggar™  told 

1  Lesson  22,  3.  a.  2  onustus.  3  volo.  4  copiae. 

5  Lit.  "  no  greater  example  in  this  kind."       6  facile.       7  parum  sufficere. 


Exercises  in   Translation.  161 

him  ten  would  be  enough.  To  which  the  prince™  re- 
plied :  "  Though  they  might  be  enough  for  him  to 
receive,  yet  they  were  not  enough  for  himself  to 
bestow." 

XXVI.     Defeat  of  Varus.  —  Creasy, 

1.  Fatigue  and  discouragement  now  began11  to 
betray1  themselves  in  the  Roman  ranks.  Their  line 
became  less  steady;  baggage-wagons  were  aban- 
doned from  the  impossibilityff  of  forcing  them  along ; 
and,  as  this  happened,  many  soldiers  left1  their  ranks 
and  crowded1  round  the  wagons  to  secure  the  most 
valuable  portions11  of  their  property  ;  each  busy  about 
his  own  affairs,11  and  purposely  slow  in  hearing  the 
wordd  of  command  from2  his  officers.  Arminius  now 
gave  the  signal  for  a  general-1  attack. ff  The  fierce 
shouts  of  the  Germansx  pealed1  through  the  gloomff 
of  the  forests,  and  in  thronging1  multitudes1  they 
assailed  the  flanks  of  the  invaders,™  pouring  in  clouds 
of  darts  on  the  encumbered  legionaries,  as3  they  strug- 
gled up  the  glens  or  floundered1  in  the  morasses. 

2.  Arminius,  with  a  chosen  band  of  personal  re- 
tainers .round  him,  cheered  on  his  countrymen11  by 
voice  and  example.  He11  and  his  men11  aimed  their 
weapons11  particularly  at  the  horses  of  the  Roman™ 
cavalry  The  wounded  animals,q  slipping  about  in 
the  mire  and  their  own  blood,  threw  their  riders,  and 
plunged  among  the  ranks  of  the  legions,  disordering0 
all  round  them. 

3.  The  bulk  of  the  Roman  army  fought  steadily 
and  stubbornly,  frequently  repelling  the  masses  of  the 
assailants,  but  gradually  losing  the  compactnessff  of 

1  Lesson  22,  3.  b.  2  Lesson  15,  a.  3  Lesson  22,  2. 

11 


1 62  Latin   Composition, 

their  array.  At  last,  in  a  seriesj  of  desperate  attacks 
the  column  was  pierced  through  and  through,  two 
of  the  eagles  captured,8  and  the  Roman  host,  which 
on  the  yester  morning  had  marched  forth  in  such 
prideff  and  might,  now  broken  up  into  confused1  frag- 
ments,11 either4  fell  fighting  beneath  the  overpowering 
numbers  of  the  enemy  or4  perished  in  the  swamps  and 
woods  in  unavailing  efTortsff  at  flight. 

4  partim. 

XXVII.     Siege  of  Syracuse.  —  Arnold, 

Marcellus  brought1  up  his  ships  against  the  sea- 
wall6 of  Achradina,  and  endeavored0  by  a  constant 
dischargeff  of  stones  and  arrows  to  clear  the  walls  of 
their  defenders,  so  that  his  men  might  apply  their 
ladders,  and  mount  to  the  assault.  These  ladders 
rested00  on  two  ships,  lashed2  together  broadside  to 
broadside,3  and8  worked  as  one  by  their  outside  oars. 
But  Archimedes  had  supplied  the  ramparts  with  an 
artillery  so  powerful, k  that  it  overwhelmed7  the  Ro- 
mans before  they  could  get  within  the  range4  which 
their  missiles11  could  reach  :u  andqq  when  they  came 
closer,  they  foundj  that  all  the  lower  part  of  the  wall 
was  loopholed1 ;  and  their  men  were  strucky  down 
with  fatal  aim5  by  an  enemy  whom  they  could  not  see,, 
and  who  shot11  his  arrows11  in  perfect  security. ff  If 
they  still  persevered,  and  attempted11  to  fix  their  lad- 
ders, on  a  sudden  enormous  stones  or  huge  masses6  of 
lead  were  dropped  upon  them,  by  which  their  ladders 
were  crushed  to  pieces,  and  their  ships  were  almost 
sunk.      At   other  times,   machines   like   cranes   were 

1  Lesson  22,  3.  b.  2  jungere.  3  Result-clause  with  applicare. 

*  teli conjectus.        5  Lit.  "aimed  at  from  a  hidden  [place J."        e  pondus. 


Exercises  in   Translation.  163 

thrust8  out  over  the  wall ;  and  the  end11  of  the  lever, 
withs  an  iron  grapple  affixed  to  it,q  wasp  lowered  upon 
the  ships.  As  soon  as  the  grappleq  had  taken  hold, 
the  other  end  of  the  lever  was  lowered55  by  heavy 
weights,  and  the  ship  raised3  out  of  the  water,  till11  it 
was  madey  almost  to  stand  upon  its  stern  ;  then  the 
grapple  was  suddenly  let  go,  and  the  ship  dropped7 
into  the  sea  with  a  violence  which  either  upset7  it, 
or  filled7  it  with  water.  With  equalh  power  was  the 
assault  on  the  land  side11  repelled,  till  Marcellus  in 
despairff  putv  a  stopff  to  his  attacks  ;  and  it  was  resolved 
merely  to  blockade  the  town,  and  to  wait  for  the  effect 
of  famine  upon  the  crowded  population1  within.11 

7  affligo  00  • 


XXVIII.     Battle  of  Metaurus. — Arnold. 

1.  From  the  moment  that  Nero's  marchff  from  the 
south11  had  been  heardcc  of  at  Rome,1  intense1  anxiety 
possessed  the  whole  city.  Every  day  the  senate  satdd 
from  sunriseff  to  sunset ;  and  not  a  senator  was  absent : 
every"  day  the  forum  was  crowded  from  morning11  till 
evening,  as  each  hour  might  bring  some  great  tidings  ;n 
and  every  man2  wished  to  be  among  the  first  to  hear0 
them.  A  doubtful  rumor  arose,j  that  a  great  battle 
had  been  fought,11  and  a  great  victory1  won3  only  two 
days  before  :  two  horsemen  of  Narnia  had  ridden11  off 
from  the  field  to  carry  the  news  to  their  home  ;  itqq  had 
been  heard  and  published  in  the  camp  of  the  reserve4 
army,  which  was  lying  at  Narnia  to  cover  the  ap- 
proach11 to  Rome.  But  men  dared  not  lightly  believe 
what  they  so  much  wished  to  be  true  ;  and  how,  they 

1  Lesson  17,  h.  2  pro  se  quisque  (h). 

8  Compress  the  two  clauses,  making  battle  a  modifier.  4  in  subsidiis. 


164  Latin   Composition. 

said,11  could  a  battle  fought1  in  the  extremityff  of  Umbria 
be  heard  of  only  two  days  after  at  Rome?  Soon, 
however,  it  was  known  that  a  letter  had  arrived1  from 
L.  Manlius  Acidinus  himself,  who  commanded  the 
army  at  Narnia  :  the  horsemen  had  certainly  arrived 
there  from  the  field  of  battle,  and  brought  tidingsff  of 
a  glorious  victory. ff  The  letter  was  read  first  in  the 
senate,  and  then  in  the  forumdd  from  the  rostra  ;dd  but 
some  still  refusedj  to  believe  :5  fugitives  from  a  battle- 
field might  carry  idle  tales  of  victory  to  hide  their  own 
shame ;  till  the  account  came  directly  from  the  con- 
suls, it  was°  rash  to  credit  it. 

2.  At  last,  word11  was  brought  that  officers6  of  high 
rank  in  the  consul's  army  were  on  their  way11  to  Rome  ; 
that  they  bore8  a  despatch  from  Liviusm  and  Nero. 
Then  the  whole  city  pouredy  out  of  the  walls  to  meet 
them,  eager  to  anticipate  the  moment1  which  was  to 
confirm  all  their  hopes.  For  two  miles,  as  far  as  the 
Milvian  bridge  over  the  Tiber,  the  crowd  formed  an 
uninterrupted  mass  ;l  and  when  the  officers  appeared, 
they  could  scarcely  make  their  way  to  the  city,11  thep 
multitude  thronging0  around  them,  and  overwhelming* 
them  and  their  attendants  with  eager  questions. ff  As 
each  man  learned  the  joyfulk  answers,11  he  made  haste 
to  tell0  them11  to  others  :  "  The  enemy's  army  is  de- 
stroyed ;c  the  general  slain  ;c  our7  own  legions  and  both 
the  consuls  are  safe."  So  the  crowd11  re-entered  the 
city  ;  and  the  three  officers,  all  men  of  noble  names,11 
L.  Veturius  Philo,  P.  Licinius  Varus,  and  Q^Metellus, 
still  followed7  by  the  thronging"  multitude,  at  last 
reached  the  senate-house. 

s  With  Jides. 

6  It  is  more  strictly  Latin  to  name  the  office  (legati);  but  here  it  may 
be  paraphrased.  7  Romanas  ;  on  account  of  indir.  discourse. 


Exercises  in   Translation,  165 

3.  The  people  pressed  after1  them  into  the  senate- 
house  itself:  but  even  at  such  a  moment'  the  senate 
forgot  not  its  accustomed  order  ;8  the  crowd  was8  forced 
back ;  and  the  consul's  despatch  was  first  read  to  the 
senators  alone.  Immediately  afterwards  the  officers 
came  out  into  the  forum  :  there  L.  Veturius  again  read 
the  despatch  ;  and,  as  its  contents11  were  short,  he  him- 
self related  the  particularsj  of  what  he  had  seeny  and 
done.  The  interest00  of  his  hearers  grew  more  in- 
tense with  every  word  ;9  till  at  last  the  whole  multi- 
tude11 broke00  out  in  a  universal11  cheer,  and  then 
rushed7  from  the  forum  in  all  directions  to  carry  the 
news  to  their  wives  and  children  at  home,  or10  ran  to 
the  temples  to  pourdd  out  their  gratitude  to  the  gods. 
The  senate  ordered  a  thanksgiving  of  three  days  ;  the 
praetor  announceddd  it  in  the  forum  ;  and  for  three 
days  every  temple  was  crowded ;  and  the  Roman 
wives  and  mothers,dd  in  their  gayest  dresses,  took11 
their  children  with  them,  and8  poured  forth  their 
thanks  to  all  the  gods  for  this  great  deliverance. ff 

8  mos  et  institnta.  9  magis  magisque.  lw  alii  .  .  .  alii. 


XXIX.     Inundations  of  the  Tiber.  —  Gibbon. 

1.  From  her  situation,1  Rome11  is  exposed  to  the 
danger11  of  frequent  inundations.  Withouts  excepting11 
the  Tiber,  the  riversw  that  descend1  from  either  side  of 
the  Apennines  haveiz  a  short  and  irregular  course  :  ap 
shallow  stream1  in  the  summer  heats  ;  anp  irregular 
torrent,1  when  it  is  swollen  in  the  spring  or  winter,  by 
the  fall  of  the  rain,  or  the  meltingff  of  the  snows. 
When8  the  current  is  repelled  from  the  sea  by  adverse2 

1  This  clause  requires  a  verb  in  Latin  to  express  precisely  the  picture 
alluded  to  (cf.  h).  2  Lesson  22,  3.  b. 


1 66  Latin   Composition. 

winds,  when  the  ordinary  bed  is  inadequate11  to  the 
height  of  the  waters,  they  rise  above  the  banks,  and 
overspread,  without  limit  or  control,  the  plains  and 
cities  of  the  adjacent  country.  Soonh  after  the  tri- 
umphff  of  the  first  Punic  war,  the  Tiber  was  increased 
by  unusual  rains;  andp  the  inundation,  surpassing  all 
former  measure-of-time-and-place,3  destroyed11  all  the 
buildings  that  were  situate-1  below  the  hills  of  Rome. 
According  to  the  variety1  of  the  ground,  the  sameq 
mischiefd  was  producedy  by  different  means ;  and  the 
edifices  were  either  swepty  away  by  the  sudden  im- 
pulse,4 or  dissolved7  and  undermined  by  the  long  con- 
tinuance5 of  the  flood. 

2.  Under  the  reign11  of  Augustus,  the  same  calamity 
was  renewed  ;  the  lawless6  river  overturned  the  palaces 
and  temples  on1  its  banks ;  and,q  after7  the  labors  of 
the  emperor  in  cleansing  and  widening  the  bed,  that 
was  encumbered  with  ruins,  the7  vigilancej  of  his  suc- 
cessors was  exercised  by  similar  dangers  and  designs.8 
The  project  of  diverting  into  new  channels  the  Tiber 
itself,  or  some  of  the  dependent1  streams,  was  long 
opposed  by  superstition  and  by  local9  interests  ;cc  nor 
did  the  use  compensate1  the  toil  and  cost  of  the  tardy 
and  imperfect  execution/  Theq  servitude10  of  rivers 
is  the  noblest  and  most  important  victory  which  man 
has  obtained  over  the  licentiousness  of  nature ;  and  ifq 
such  were  the  ravages11  of  the  Tiber  under  a  firm  and 

3  By  memoria.  4  Insert  "the  river,"  as  the  actual  agent  (h). 

6  Insert  "stagnant  water,"  as  the  actual  agent  (h). 

6  Personify  more  directly  :  "spurning  the  curb." 

7  Co-ordinate  clauses  with  et  .  .  .  et  (compare  h). 

8  Lit.  "as  much  care  as  possible  was  taken  against  a  similar  danger." 

9  privatus. 

10  Divide  the  clause  for  greater  precision  :  "as  in  other  .  .  .  so,"  &c. 
(see  dd^ff).  n  Make  precise  with  a  verb,  and  append  the 

result  in  an  adverbial  phrase. 


Exercises  in   Translation,  167 

active  government/  what  could  oppose,7  or  who  can 
enumerate,  the  injuries5  of12  the  city  after  the  fall  of 
the  Western  empire?  A  remedyff  was  produced7  by 
the  evil  itself:  the  accumulation  of  rubbish  and  the 
earth  that  has  been  washed  down  from  the  hills  is 
supposed7  to  have  elevated  the  plain  of  Rome,  four- 
teen or  fifteen  feet  perhaps,  above  the  ancient  level ; 
and  the  modern13  city  is  less  accessible14  to  the  attacks 
of  the  river. 

12  Lesson  15,  a.       ™  With  adverb  (<r).       "  Lit.  "sufficiently  safe  "  (cc). 


XXX.     First  Acting  at  Rome. 

1.  The  pestilence  continuing  during  both  this  and 
the  following  year,  in  which1  Caius  Sulpicius  Pasticus 
and  Caius  Licinius  Stolo  were  consuls,  nothing  memo- 
rable1 was  transacted  ;  only2  that,  for  the  purpose  of 
soliciting2  the  favorb  of  the  gods,  the  lectisternium  was 
performedj  the  third  time  since  the  building  of  the  city. 
But  as  the  disorder  received1  no  alleviation/  either 
from  human  wisdomg  or  divine  aid,  the  strengthd  of 
the  people's  minds  becames  almost  overpowered  by 
superstition,  andp  it  is  said  that,  on  this  occasion,11 
among  other  devices'1  for  appeasing  the  wrath  of 
heaven,  scenic  plays  were  introduced,3  a  new  thing 
to  a  warlike  people  ;  for  hitherto  there  had  been  only 
the  shows  of  the  circus.  However,  this  kind1  of  per- 
formance1 was,  as  in  general  all  beginnings  are,  but  a 
trifling  matter,  and  even  that4  borrowed1  from  abroad. 

2.  Actors  were8  sent  for  from  Etruria,  who,°  though 
without  any  poetical  language, d  or  any  gestures  cor- 
respondent8  to   such   language,   yet  regulating5  their 

1  Lesson  22,  3.  b.  2  exposcere  3  instituere.  *  is  ipse. 

5  imitari  (with  relative). 


1 68  Latin   Corn-position, 

motions  by6  the  measures  of  the  music,7  exhibited, dd  in 
the  Tuscan  manner,  something8  far  fromh  ungraceful. 
The  younger  citizens11  soon  began  to  imitatex  these ; 
throwing  out,  at  the  same  time,  among  each  other, 
ludicrous  expressions1  in  coarse  verses,  and  with'  ges- 
tures adapted00  to  the  words  :  this  kind  of  performance3 
then  beingr  received  with  approbation,11  in  the  coursej 
of  frequent  practice  gained  much  improvement.9  The 
native  performers  were  called10  Histriones,  from11  the 
Tuscan  word  Hister,  signifying  a  player  ;  andq  they  did 
not,  as  formerly,  pronounce1  in  dialogue,12  without  re- 
gard to  order,13  verses  like  the  Fescennine,  artless14 
and  unpolished,  but  represented  comic11  medleys,  com- 
posed15 in  regular11  metre,  with  the  several16  parts  of 
the  performance  properly  adjusted  to  the  music ;  the 
delivery  of  the  words  and  the  gesticulation  being  per- 
formed in  concert  with  the  music. 

3.  Several  years"  after  this,11  Livius,  who  was  the 
first  that  ventured  to  lay  aside17  medleys,  and  to  weave 
a  story  into  a  regular11  plot,  being  also,  as  all  were  at 
that  time,  the  actor  of  his  own  pieces;  and,  having0 
broken  his  voice  by18  being  obliged  to  repeat11  them  too 
often,  after  requesting  the  indulgence  of  the  public,11 
placed8  a  boy  before  the  musician  to  chant,  while0  he 
himself  performed19  the  gesticulations.  Andp  this11  he 
executed11  with  much  freer20  action,  because  disen- 
gaged from  attention  to  the  management  of  his  voice.21 

6  saltare  ad.  7  tibicen  (cc). 

8  motus :  as  the  verb  is  a  general  one,  the  color  is  put  in  the  noun. 

9  excitari.  10  nomen  indere  (dd). 

11  Lit.  "because  a  player  was  called  by  a  Tuscan  word  "  (h). 

12  alternis.  Vi  temere.  14  incompositum.  15  impletus  (cc). 

16  Lit.  "the  song  being  adjusted  (describere)  to  the  musician,  and  the 

movement  corresponding  "  (/).  17  Simple  abl.  with  ab. 

18  Lesson  22,  2.  19  Lit.  "acted  the  song."  20  vigens. 

21  Lit.  "because  the  use  of  the  voice  did  not  hinder"  (cc,  //,  i). 


Exercises  in   Translation.  169 

Hence  originated1  the  practice1  of  the  chanting  being 
performed  by  another  to  the  gesticulation  of  the  actors, 
whose  voices  were  easedcc  of  all  butcc  the  dialogue. 
When,  by  this  regulation,  the  scenic11  business  was 
directed22  to  other11  objects11  than  laughter  and  intem- 
perate mirth,  and  the  amusement1  was  by  degrees 
converted  into  an  art,  the  younger  citizens  leaving  to 
professed11  actors  the  exhibition1  of  plays  began,  ac- 
cording to  the  ancient  practice,  to  throw  out  alter- 
nately ludicrous  jests,1  comprised23  in  verse,  which 
thence11  goty  the  name  of  cxodia,  or  interludes,  and 
were  collected24  principally  out  of  the  Atellan1  farces. 

22  avocare  (cc).  23  intexo.  2*  conserere. 

XXXI.  The  Fire  of  London. 
1.  While  the  warff  continued11  without1  any  decisive 
success  on  either  side,  a  calamity  happened  in  Lon- 
don, which0  threwcc  the  people  into  great  consterna- 
tion. Fire,  breaking  out  in  a  baker's  house  near  the 
bridge,  spread2  itself  on  all  sides  with  such  rapidity, 
that  no  efforts  could  extinguish3,  it,  till  it  laid  in  ashesj 
a  considerable  part  of  the  city.  The  inhabitants, 
without3  being  able  to  provide4  effectuallyj  for  their 
relief,  were  reduced-1  to  be0  spectatorsff  of  their  own 
ruin  ;b  ands  were  pursued7  from  street  to  street  by  the 
flames,  which5  unexpectedly  gathered7  round  them. 
Three  days  and  nights  did  the  fire  advance  ;  andp  it 
was  only11  by  the  blowing-up  of  houses  that0  it  was  at 
last  extinguished.  The  king  and  duke  used  their 
utmost  endeavorsff  to  stop  the  progress  of  the  flames ; 
but  all  their  industry11  was  unsuccessful.  About  four 
hundred  streets  and  thirteen  thousand  houses  were 
reduced  to  ashes.1 

1  Lesson  23,  2.  c.         2  pervagari.         3  ut  qui.        4  adhibere  (ace). 
5  Lesson  22,  3.  b  (v). 


170  Latin   Composition. 

2.  The  causes  of  this  calamity  were  evident.  The 
narrow  streets  of  London,"  the  houses  built  entirely 
of  wood,b  the  dry  season,  and  a  violentk  east  wind 
which  blew, — these  were0  so  many  concurring11  cir- 
cumstances, which0  rendered  it  easy  to  assign  the 
reason  of  the  destruction  that  ensued. j  But  the 
people  werey  not  satisfied  with  this  obvious  account.-1 
Prompted  by  blind  rage,  some  ascribed  the  guilt  to 
the  republicans,0  others  to  the  catholics,0  though  it  is 
not  easy  to  conceive0  the  burningf  of  London  could 
serve  the  purposesj  of  either  party. 

3.^  The  conflagration  was  so  universale  andr  the 
people  so  astonished,  that  from  the  beginning  they 
hardly  stirred6  to  quench  it ;  so  that  there  was  nothing 
heard  or  seen  but  cryingg  out  and  lamentation/  run- 
ning7 about  like  distracted  creatures,  without  at  all 
attempting0  to  save  even  their  goods.  Such  a  strange 
consternation  there  was8  upon  them,  as  it  burned,00 
both  in  breadthff  and  length,  the  churches,  public 
halls,  hospitals,  monuments,  and  ornaments,  ieapingv 
after  a  prodigious  manner  from  house  to  house,  and 
street  to  street,  at  great  distances  one  from  the  other ; 
for  the  heat,  with  a  long  setj  of  fair  and  warm 
weather,  had  even  ignited  the  air,  and  prepared  the 
materials  to  conceive  the  fire,  which  devoured,  after 
an  incredible  manner,  houses,  furniture,  and  every 
thing. 

4.  Oh  the  miserable  and  calamitous  spectacle  !  such 
as  haply  the  worldj  had  not  seenj  since  the  foundation 
of  it.  God  grantdd  my  eyes  may  never  behold  the 
like.x  The  noise  and  crackingff  of  the  impetuous 
flames,  the  shrieking  of  women  and  children,  the 
hurryff  of  people,   the  fallff  of  houses  and  churches, 

6  manum  vertere  (cc).  7  Lesson  22,  2.  8  Pluperfect. 


Exercises  in   Translation.  171 

was  like9  a  hideous  storm,  and  the  air  all  about  so  hot 
and  inflamed,  that  at  last  one  was  not  able  to  approach 
it :  so  that  they  were  forced10  to  stand  still  and  let  the 
flames  burn  on,  which  they  did11  for  near  two  miles  in 
length  and  one  in  breadth.  The  clouds11  of  smoke 
weres  dismal,  and  reached,  upon  computation, ff  near 
fifty  miles  in  length.  Thus  I  left  it  this  afternoon 
burning,  a  resemblance  of  Sodom,  or  the  last  day. 
London  was,  but  is11  no  more.11 

9  speciem  praebere.       10  Part,  in  dus.       ll  in  nubes  tristes  volutus  (/). 


XXXII.     The  Earthquake  at  Lisbon. 

1.  It  was0  on  the  morning11  of  this  fatal  day, 
between  the  hours1  of  nine  and  ten,  that0  I  was  set 
down  in  my  apartment,  just2  finishing0  a  letter,  when 
the  papers  and3  table  I  was  writing  on  began  to  trem- 
ble with  a  gentle  motion,  which4  rather  surprised00  me, 
as  I  could11  not  perceive  a  breath  of  windd  stirring. 
Whilst  I  was  reflecting  with  myself  what  this  could11 
be  owingcc  to,  the  house  I  was  in11  shooky  with  such 
violence,  that  the  upper  stories  immediately  fell,  and 
thoughqq  my  apartment  (which  was  on  the  first  floor) 
did  not  then  sharecc  the  same  fate,j  yet  every  thing 
was  thrownx  out  of  its  place,  in  such  a  manner  that  it 
was  with  no  smallh  difficulty  I  kept  my  feet,  andp 
expected  nothing  less  than  to  be  soon  crushed  to 
death,11  as  the  walls  continued11  rocking  to  and  fro  in  a 
frightful  manner,  opening  in  several  places;  large 
stones  falling  down  on  every  side  from  the  cracks, 
and  the  ends5  of  most  of  the  rafters  starting  out  from 
the  roof.     To  add6  to  this  terrifying  scene,  the  sky  in 

1  Lesson  17,  e.  2  jam.  3  cum.  4  quod  quidem. 

5  Lesson  5,  i.  6  accedit  .  .  .  quod. 


172  Latin   Composition. 

a  moment  became  so  gloomy  that  I  could  now  distin- 
guish no  particular  object  ;j  it  was  an  Egyptian7  dark- 
ness indeed,  such8  as  might  be  felt ;  owing,  no  doubt, 
to  the  prodigiousj  cloudsj  of  dust  and  lime  raised  from 
so  violent  a  concussion,ff  and,  as  some  reported,  to 
sulphureous  exhalations,  butqq  this  I  cannot  affirm  ; 
however,  it  is  certain  I  foundj  myself  almost  choked9 
for  near  ten  minutes.6 

2.  I  had  still  presence*1  of  mind  enough  left11  to  put 
on  a  pair  of  shoes'1  and  a  coat,1  the  first  that  came  in 
my  way,  which10  was  every  thingcc  I  saved,  and  in  this 
dress  I  hurried  down  stairs,  and  madej  directly  to  that 
end  of  the  street  which  opens11  to  the  Tagus. 

3.  In  the  midst  of  our  devotions,ff  the  second  greatj 
shock  came  on,  little  less  violent  than  the  first,  and 
completed  the  ruinff  of  those  buildings  which  had  been 
already  much  shattered.  You  may  judge  of  the  forceff 
of  the  shock,  when  I  inform12  you  it  was  so  violent  that 
I  could  scarce  keep  on  my  knees  ;  but  it  was  attended13 
with  some  circumstances  still  more  dreadful  than  the 
former.  On  a  sudden  I  heard  a  general  outcry ,ff"  The 
sea  is14  coming  in,  we  shall  be  all  lost."  Upon  this, 
turning  my  eyes  towards  the  river,  which  in  that  place 
is  near  four  miles  broad,  I  could  perceive  it  heaving 
and  swelling  in  a  most  unaccountable15  manner,  as  no 
wing  was  stirring.  In  an  instant  there  appeared,  at 
some11  distance,  a  large  body  of  water,  rising  as  it 
were  like  a  mountain.  Itp  came  on  foaming  and  roar- 
ing, and  rushedy  towards  the  shore  with  such  impetu- 
osity, that  we  all  immediately  ran  for  our  lives j  as  fast 
as  possible  ;  many  werep  actually16  swept  away,  and 

7  Use  cimmerius.         8  Express  by  mood.         9  animam  intercludere. 

10  quae  qui 'detn.  n  specto.  12  ex  eo  quod.  13  habeo  (j). 

14  Indir.  disc.  15  mirabilis.  16  quidem. 


Exercises  in   Translation,  173 

the  rest  above  their  waist  in  water  at  a  good  distance 
from  the  banks.  For  my  own  part,2 1  had  the  narrow- 
est escape,ff  andq  should  certainly  have  been  lost,  had 
I  not  grasped  a  large  beam  that  lay  on  the  ground, 
till  the  water  returned  to  its  channel,  which  it  didy 
almost  at  the  same  instant,  with  equal  rapidity.  As 
there  now  appeared00  at  least  as  much  danger  from  the 
seacc  as  the  land,  and  I  scarce  knew17  whither  to  retire 
for  shelter, ff  I  took  a  sudden  resolution  of  returning 
back,  with  my  clothes  all  dripping,  to  the  area  of  St. 
Paul's. 

4.  The  new  scenes  of  horrord  I  met  with  here 
exceed18  all  description ;  nothing  could  be  heard  but 
sighs  and  groans  ;  I  did  not  meet  with  a  soulj  in  the 
passage  who  was  not19  bewailing  the  deathff  of  his 
nearest  relations  and  dearest  friends,  or  the  lossff  of 
all  his  substance ;  I  could11  hardly  take  a  single  step, 
without19  treading  on  the  dead  or  the  dying  :  in  some 
places'1  lay  coaches,  with  their  masters,  horses,  and 
riders,  almost  crushed  in  pieces ;  here  mothers,  with 
infants  in  their  arms ;  there  ladies  richly  dressed, 
priests,  friars,  gentlemen,  mechanics,  either  in  the 
same20  condition,  or  just  expiring;  some  had21  their 
backs  or  thighs  broken,  others  vast  stones  on  their 
breasts  ;  some  lay  almost  buried  in  the  rubbish,  and, 
crying  out  in  vain  to  the  passengers  for  succour,  were 
left  to  perish  with  the  rest. 

5.  As  soon  as  it  grew  dark,  another  scene  pre- 
sentedj  itself  little  less  shocking  than  those  already 
described  :n  the  whole  city  appeared11  in  a  blaze,22 
which  was  so  bright  that  I  could  easily  see  to  read  by 
it.23     It  may  be  said  without  exaggeration24  it  was  on 

17  habeo.         18  verba  deficere.         19  quin.         '20  Explain  particulars. 


174  Latin   Composition. 

fire  at  least  in  a  hundredj  different  places  at  once,  and 
thus  continued j  burning  for  six  days  together,  without 
intermission,  or25  the  least  attempt  being  made  to  stop 
its  progress.-1 

6.  It  wentj  on  consuming  every  thing  the  earthquake 
had  spared,1  and26  the  people  were  so  dejected  and 
terrified,  that  few  or  none  had11  courage11  enough  to 
venture  down  to  save  any  part  of  their  substance  ;j 
every  one  had  his  e}'es  turned  towards  the  flames, 
andp  stood11  looking  on  with  silent  grief,  which  was 
only  interrupted7  by  the  cries  and  shrieks  of  women 
and  children  calling  on  the  saints  and  angels  for 
succour. 

f»  dum  (p).  26  Lesson  22,  3.  b. 

XXXIII.     Character  of  Trajan.  —  Gibbon. 

1.  Trajan1  was  ambitious  of  fame;  and,2  as  long 
as  mankind  shall  continuej  to  bestow3  more  liberal 
applause  upon  their4  destroyers  than  upon  their  bene- 
factors, the  thirst  of  military  glory  will  ever  be  the5 
vice  of  the  most  exalted6  characters.-1  The  praises  of 
Alexander,  transmitted  by  a  succession  of  poets  and 
historians,0  had  kindled  a  dangerous  emulation  in  the 
mind  of  Trajan.7  Like8  him,  the  Roman  emperor 
undertook-1  an  expeditionff  against  the  nations  of  the 
East;  but9  he  lamented,10  with  a  sigh,  that  his  ad- 
vanced age  scarcely  lefty  him  any  hopes  of  equalling 
the  renown  of  the  sonm  of  Philip. 

1  The  proper  name  should  in  strictness  be  omitted,  unless  opposed  to 
some  other  person,  when  it  would  be  introduced  by  aiitem. 

2  denim  (qq)>  3  prosequi  (  /). 

4  With  homo,  because  it  is  not  the  same  persons  who  are  destroyed. 

5  proprium.  6  eximius  qttisque,  to  specialize  the  expression. 
1  With  hie:  "had  kindled  him  to." 

8  With  clause  :  introduce  with  et  vero.      9  Lesson  22,  3.  a.      i(i  queri. 


Exercises  in   Translation,  175 

2.  Yet  the  success00  of  Trajan ,m  however  transient, 
was11  rapidcc  and  specious.  Theqq  degenerate  Parthi- 
ans,  broken  by  intestine  discord,  fled1  before  his 
arms.  He  descended12  the  river  Tigris  in  triumph, ff 
from  the  mountains  of  Armenia  to  the  Persian  Gulf. 
He  enjoyed  the  honor13  of  being0  the  first,  asqq  he  was 
the  last,  of  the  Roman  generals  who  ever  navigated 
that  remote  sea.  His  fleets  ravaged7  the  coasts  of 
Arabia;  and  Trajan  vainly  flattered  himself 14  that  he 
was  approaching  towards  the  confines  of  India. 
Every15  day  the  astonished  senate  received  the  intelli- 
gence of  new  names  and  new  nations,  that  acknowl- 
edged his  sway.  They  were  informed  that  the  kings 
of  Bosporus,  Colchis,  Iberia,  Albania,  and  even  the 
Parthian  monarch  himself,  had  accepted  their  diadems 
from  the  hands  of  the  emperor ;  that  the  independent 
tribes  of  the  Median  and  Carduchian  hills  had  im- 
plored his  protection  ;  and  that  the  rich  countries  of 
Armenia,  Mesopotamia,  and  Assyria,  were  reduced 
into  the  state  of  provinces. 

11  utor  {y  ).  12  devehi.  l3  Lit.  "by  a  singular  fortune,"  &c. 

14  Lit.  "  rejoiced,  being  deceived  by  a  false  hope."  15  identidem. 


XXXIV.     Character  of  Cato. — Middleton. 

In  his  private1  life1  he  was0  severe,  morose,  inexor- 
able, banishing0  all  the  softer  affections  as  natural1 
enemiesff  to  justice,  and  as  suggesting  false  motives* 
from  favor,  clemency,  and  compassion.  In  public 
affairs  he  was  the  same ;  had  but  one  rule  of  policy,11 
—  to  adhere2  to  what  was  right,  without3  regard  to 
times  or  circumstances,  or4  even  to  force1  that  could 

1  With  natura.  2  amplecti.  3  Lesson  23,  2.  c. 

4  New  clause  with  adeo  ut. 


176  Latin   Composition. 

control  him  :  for  instead5  of  managing  the  powerdd  of 
the  great  so  as  to  mitigate  the6  ill,  or  extract  any  good 
from  it,  he  was  always  urging  itx  to  actsff  of  violence 
by  a  perpetual  defiance  ;g  so  that,  with  the  best  inten- 
tion in  the  world,j  he  often  did  great  harm  to  the 
republic.  This  was  his  general  behavior  :ff  yet  from 
some  particular  facts  explained7  above,  it  appears 
that  his  strength7  of  mind  was  not  impregnable,  but 
had  its  weak  places8  of  pride,  ambition,  and  party 
zeal,  which,  when  encouraged11  and  flattered  to  a 
certain  point,9  would  betray10  him  sometimes  into 
measures11  contrary  to  his  ordinary  rule  of  right  and 
truth.  The  last  actff  of  his  life  was  agreeable  to  his 
nature  and  philosophy.1  When  he  could  not  longer 
be  what1  he  had  been,  and  when  the  ills  of  life  over- 
balanced7 the  good  (which,  by  the  principles1  of  his 
sect,1  was  a  just  cause  for  dying),  he  put  an  end  to 
his  life  with11  a  spirit  and  resolution  which  would 
make  one  imagine  that  he  was  glad  to  have  found0  an 
occasion  of  dying  in  his  proper  character. d  On  the 
whole,12  his  life13  was  rather  admirable  than  amiable, 
fit  to  be  praised  rather  than  imitated.14 

5  Rel.  clause  with  decere.  6  Clause  with  si  (//).  7  constantia. 

8  With  aditus  (#).  9  finis.  10  abdiuere,  with  personal  subject. 

11  usus.  vi  Clause  with  ut.  13  With  verb. 

14  With  exemplum  proponere. 


XXXV.     Of  Studies.  —  Bacon. 

i.  Studies0  serve  for  delight,  for  ornament,  and 
for  ability.  Theirq  chief  useff  for  delight  is  in  pri- 
vateness  and  retiring ;  for  ornament,  is  in  discourse  ; 
and  for  ability,  is  in  the  judgment**  and  dispositiondd  of 
business ;  for  expert  men  can  execute,  and  perhaps 


Exercises  in   Translation.  177 

judge  of  particulars  one  by  one ;  but  the  general 
counsels,  and  the  plots1  and  marshalling2  of  affairs, 
come  best  from  those  that  are  learned.  To  spend  too 
much  time  in  studies,  is  sloth  ;  to  use  them  too  much 
for  ornament,  is  affectation  ;  to  make  judgment  wholly 
by  their  rules,  is  the  humor11  of  a  scholar.  They  per- 
fect nature,  and  are3  perfected  by  experience ;  for 
natural  abilities*1  are  like  natural  plants,4  that  need 
pruning  by  study ;  and  studies  themselves  do  give 
forth  directions  too  much  at  large,5  except  they  be 
bounded  in  by  exper  ence.  Crafty  men  contemn 
studies,  simple  men  admire  them,  and  wise  men  use 
them  ;  for  they6  teach  not  their  own  use  ;  but7  that  is8 
a  wisdom  without  them  and  above  them,  won  by  ob- 
servation.* 

2.  Read  not  to  contradict  and  confute,  nor  to  believe 
and  take  for  granted,  nor  to  find11  talk  and  discourse, 
but  to  weigh  and  consider.  Some  books  are  to  be 
tasted,  others  to  be  swallowed,  and  some  few  to  be 
chewed  and  digested ;  that  is,9  some  books  are  to 
be  read  only  in  parts  ;10  others  to  be  read,  but  not 
curiously  ;  and  some  few  to  be  read  wholly,11  but  with 
dilligence  and  attention.  Some  books  also  may  be 
read  by  deputy,  and  extracts  made  of  them  by  others ; 
but  that  would  be11  only  in  the  less  important  argu- 
ments12 and  the  meaner  sort11  of  books ;  else  distilled6 
books  are  like  common  distilled  waters,  flashy13 
things.11 

3.  Reading  makethy  a  full  man  ;u  conference  a 
ready  man ;  and  writing  an  exact  man ;  and,q  there- 

1  ratio.  2  ordo.  3  Insert  ipse  for  the  antithesis. 

4  Use  vitis  or  some  particular  word  ( *').  5  remissus  ac  solutus. 

6  ut  qui.  1  qui  quidem.  8  nascor  ex.  9  quod  die  it. 

10  percurrere.  n  per  in  comp.  12  loci.  13  vapidus. 


178  Latin   Composition. 

fore,  if  a  man  write  little,  he  had  need  have  a  great 
memory ;  if  he  confer  little,  he  had  need  have  a 
present  wit ;  and  if  he  read  little,  he  had  need  have 
much  cunning,  to  seem  to  know  that  he  doth  not. 
Histories1  make  men  wise ;  poetry,  witty  ;  the  mathe- 
matics,1 subtile;  natural  philosophy,  deep;  moral, 
grave  ;  logic  and  rhetoric,  able  to  contend  :  Abcunt 
studia  in  mores  ;u  nay,  there  is  no  stand  or  impedi- 
ment in  the  wit,  but  may  be  wrought  out  by  fit 
studies. 

14  Insert  ut  aiunt  to  show  the  proverb. 


XXXVI.     Antony  in  Defeat. — NortKs  Plutarch. 

1.  Antonius,  flying  upon  this  overthrow,  fell1  into 
great  misery  all  at  once ;  but  the  chiefest  want  of  all 
other,  and  that  pinched  him  most,  was°  famine.  How- 
beit,  he  wascc  of  such  a  strong  nature,  that  by  patience 
he  woulda  overcome55  any  adversity  :  andv  the  heavier 
fortune  lay  upon  him,  the  more  constant  shewed  he 
himself.  Every  man  that  feeleth  want  or  adversity 
knoweth  by  virtue  and  discretion  what  he  should2  do ; 
but  when  indeed  they  are  overlaidj  with  extremity, 
and  be  sore  oppressed,  few  have  the  hearts1  to  follow 
that  which  they  praise  and  commend,  and  much  less3 
to  avoid  that  they  reprove  and  mislike ;  but  rather3 
to  the  contrary,2  they  yield  to  their  accustomed  easy 
life,  and,  through  faint  heartb  and  lackff  of  courage,  do 
change  their  first  mindb  and  purpose.  And  therefore 
it  wras  a  wonderful  example51  to  the  soldiers,  to  see11 
Antonius,v  that  was  brought  up  in  all  fineness  and 
superfluity,  so  easily  to  drink  puddle-water,  and  to 

1  excipere  (cc).  2  optimum  factu.  3  non  modo  .  .  .  sed  etiam. 


Exercises  in   Translation.  179 

eat  wild  fruits  and  roots.  And  moreover  it  is  re- 
ported, that  even  as  they  passed  the  Alps,  they  did 
eat  the  barks  of  trees,  and  such  beasts  as  never  man 
tasted  of  their  flesh  before. 

2.  Now  their  intent  was  to  join  with  the  legions 
that  were  on  the  other  side4  of  the  mountains,  under 
Lepidus'  charge  ;11  whom  Antonius  took  to  be  his 
friend,  because  he  had  hdlpen  him  to  many  things  at 
Caesar's  hand,  through  his  means.  When  he  was 
come  to  the  place  where  Lepidus  was,1  he  camped 
hard  by  him  ;  and  when  he  saw  that  no  man  came 
to  him  to  put5  him  in  any  hope,  he  determined  to  ven- 
ture himself,  and  to  go  unto  Lepidus.  Since  the 
overthrow  he  had8  at  Modena,  he  suffered8  his  beard  to 
grow  at  length,  and  never  dipt  it,  that  it  was  mar- 
vellous long,  and  the  hair  of  his  head  also  without 
combing  ;  and  besides  all  this,  he  went  in  a  mourningdd 
gown,  and  after  this6  sort  came  hard  to  the  trenches 
of  Lepidus'  camp.  Then  he  began  to  speaks  unto  the 
soldiers,  and  many  of  them  their  hearts  yearned7  for 
pity  to  see  him  so  poorly  arrayed,  and  some  also 
through  his  words  began  to  pity1  him  :  insomuch  that 
Lepidus  began  to  be  afraid,  and  therefore  commanded 
all  the  trumpets  to  sound  together  to  stop  the  soldiers' 
ears,  that  they  should  not  hearken1  to  Antonius. 

3.  This  notwithstanding,2  the  soldiers  tooks  the  more 
pity  of  him,  and  spake  secretly  with  him  by  Clodius' 
and  Laelius'  means,  whom  they  sent  unto  him  dis- 
guised in  women's  apparel,  and  gave  him  counsel 
that  he  should  not  be  afraid  to  enter  into  their  camp, 
for  there  were  a  great  number  of  soldiers  that  would 
receive   him,  and  kill   Lepidus,  if  he  would  say  the 

4  With  transgredi.  5  confirmare.  6  miser  (i,  v>  x). 

1  commovere \it  s). 


180  Latin  Composition. 

word.  Antonius  would  not  suffer  them  to  hurt  him, 
but  the  next  morning  he  went  with  his  army  to  wade 
a  ford,  at  a  little  river  that  ran  between  them  ;  and 
himself  was  the  foremost  man  that  took0  the  river  to 
get  over,  seeing  a  number  of  Lepidus'  camp,1  that 
gave  him  their  hands,  plucked  up  the  stakes,  and  laid 
flat8  the  bank  of  their  trench  to  let  him  into  their  camp. 
When  he  was  come  into  theif  camp,1  and  that  he  had 
all  the  army  at  his  commandment,  he  used  Lepidus 
very  courteously,  embraced  him,  and  called  him 
father:  andp  though  indeed  Antoniusm  did  all,  and 
ruled  the  whole  army,  yet  he  always  gave  Lepidus 
the  name  and  honor  of  the  captain. 

8  complanare. 

XXXVII.     Speech  of  Antony.  —  Shakespeare. 

Friends,  Romans,  countrymen,  lend  me  your  ears  : 

I  come  to  bury  Caesar,  not  to  praise  him. 

The  evil  that  men  do  lives  after  them ; 

The  good  is  oft  interred  with  their  bones : 

So  let  it  be  with  Caesar.     The  noble  Brutus 

Hath  told  you  Caesar  was  ambitious : 

If  it  were  so,  it  was  a  grievous  fault ; 

And  grievously  hath  Caesar  answer'd  it. 

Here,  under  leave  of  Brutus  and  the  rest,  — 

For  Brutus  is  an  honourable  man ; 

So  are  they  all,  all  honourable  men,  — 

Come  I  to  speak  in  Caesar's  funeral. 

He  was  my  friend,  faithful  and  just  to  me : 
But  Brutus  says  he  was  ambitious ; 
And  Brutus  is  an  honourable  man. 
He  hath  brought  many  captives  home  to  Rome, 
Whose  ransoms  did  the  general  coffers  fill : 
Did  this  in  Caesar  seem  ambitious  ? 
When  that  the  poor  have  cried,  Caesar  hath  wept : 


Exercises  in   Translation,  181 

Ambition  should  be  made  of  sterner  stuff  : 

Yet  Brutus  says  he  was  ambitious  ; 

And  Brutus  is  an  honourable  man. 

You  all  did  see  that  on  the  Lupercal 

I  thrice  presented  him  a  kingly  crown, 

Which  he  did  thrice  refuse.     Was  this  ambition  ? 

Yet  Brutus  says  he  was  ambitious ; 

And,  sure,  he  is  an  honourable  man. 

I  speak  not  to  disprove  what  Brutus  spoke, 

But  here  I  am,  to  speak  what  I  do  know. 

You  all  did  love  him  once,  —  not  without  cause  : 
What  cause  withholds  you,  then,  to  mourn  for  him  ?  — 

0  judgment,  thou  art  fled  to  brutish  beasts, 

And  men  have  lost  their  reason  !  —  Bear  with  me  ; 
My  heart  is  in  the  coffin  there  with  Caesar, 
And  I  must  pause  till  it  come  back  to  me. 

i   Cit.  Methinks  there  is  much  reason  in  his  sayings. 

2  Cit.  If  thou  consider  rightly  of  the  matter, 
Caesar  has  had  great  wrong. 

3  Cit.  Has  he  not,  masters  ? 

1  fear  there  will  a  worse  come  in  his  place. 

4  Cit.  Mark'd  ye  his  words  ?    He  would  not  take  the  crown  ; 
Therefore  'tis  certain  he  was  not  ambitious. 

i    Cit.  If  it  be  found  so,  some  will  dear  abide  it. 

2  Cit.  Poor  soul !  his  eyes  are  red  as  fire  with  weeping. 

3  Cit.  There's  not  a  nobler  man  in  Rome  than  Antony. 

4  Cit.  Now  mark  him  ;  he  begins  again  to  speak. 
Ant.  But  yesterday  the  word  of  Caesar  might 

Have  stood  against  the  world  :  now  lies  he  there, 
And  none  so  poor  to  do  him  reverence. 

0  masters,  if  I  were  dispos'd  to  stir 
Your  hearts  and  minds  to  mutiny  and  rage, 

1  should  do  Brutus  wrong,  and  Cassius  wrong, 
Who,  you  all  know,  are  honourable  men. 

I  will  not  do  them  wrong:  I  rather  choose 
To  wrong  the  dead,  to  wrong  myself,  and  you, 
Than  I  will  wrong  such  honourable  men. 


182  Latin   Composition. 

But  here's  a  parchment  with  the  seal  of  Caesar,  — 
I  found  it  in  his  closet,  —  'tis  his  will : 
Let  but  the  commons  hear  this  testament, 
(Which,  pardon  me,  I  do  not  mean  to  read,) 
And  they  would  go  and  kiss  dead  Caesar's  wounds, 
And  dip  their  napkins  in  his  sacred  blood ; 
Yea,  beg  a  hair  of  him  for  memory, 
And,  dying,  mention  it  within  their  wills, 
Bequeathing  it  as  a  rich  legacy 
Unto  their  issue. 

4  Cit.  We'll  hear  the  will :  read  it,  Mark  Antony. 

Citizens.  The  will,  the  will !  we  will  hear  Caesar's  will. 

Ant.  Have  patience,  gentle  friends  ;  I  must  not  read  it : 
It  is  not  meet  you  know  how  Caesar  lov'd  you. 
You  are  not  wood,  you  are  not  stones,  but  men  ; 
And,  being  men,  hearing  the  will  of  Caesar, 
It  will  inflame  you,  it  will  make  you  mad. 
'Tis  good  you  know  not  that  you  are  his  heirs  ; 
For,  if  you  should,  O,  what  would  come  of  it ! 

4  Cit.  Read  the  will !  we'll  hear  it,  Antony  ; 
You  shall  read  us  the  will,  —  Caesar's  will ! 

Ant.  Will  you  be  patient?  will  you  stay  awhile  ? 
I  have  o'ershot  myself,  to  tell  you  of  it. 
I  fear  I  wrong  the  honourable  men 
Whose  daggers  have  stabb'd  Caesar ;  I  do  fear  it. 

4  Cit.  They  were  traitors :  honourable  men  ! 

Citizens.     The  will !  the  testament ! 

2   Cit.  They  were  villains,  murderers.     The  will  !  read  the 
will! 

Ant.  You  will  compel  me,  then,  to  read  the  will  ? 
Then  make  a  ring  about  the  corpse  of  Caesar, 
And  let  me  show  you  him  that  made  the  will. 
Shall  I  descend?  and  will  you  give  me  leave? 

Citizens.  Come  down. 

2  Cit.  Descend.  [He  comes  down. 

3  Cit.  You  shall  have  leave. 

4  Cit.  A  ring !  stand  round. 


Exercises  in    Translation.  183 

1  Cit.  Stand  from  the  hearse  ;  stand  from  the  body. 

2  Cit.  Room  for  Antony  !  —  most  noble  Antony  ! 
Ant.  Nay,  press  not  so  upon  me  j  stand  far  off. 
Citizens.  Stand  back  ;  room  !  bear  back. 

Ant.  If  you  have  tears,  prepare  to  shed  them  now. 
You  all  do  know  this  mantle  :  I  remember 
The  first  time  ever  Caesar  put  it  on  ; 
'Twas  on  a  Summer's  evening,  in  his  tent, 
That  day  he  overcame  the  Nervii. 
Look,  in  this  place  ran  Cassius'  dagger  through  : 
See  what  a  rent  the  envious  Casca  made  : 
Through  this  the  well-beloved  Brutus  stabb'd  ; 
And,  as  he  pluck'd  his  cursed  steel  away, 
Mark  how  the  blood  of  Caesar  follow'd  it,  — 
As  rushing  out  of  doors,  to  be  resolv'd 
If  Brutus  so  unkindly  knock'd,  or  no  ; 
For  Brutus,  as  you  know,  was  Caesar's  angel : 
Judge,  O  you  gods,  how  dearly  Caesar  lov'd  him  ! 
This  was  the  most  unkindest  cut  of  all ; 
For,  when  the  noble  Caesar  saw  him  stab, 
Ingratitude,  more  strong  than  traitors'  arms, 
Quite  vanquish'd  him  :  then  burst  his  mighty  heart ; 
And,  in  his  mantle  muffling  up  his  face, 
Even  at  the  base  of  Pompey's  statua, 
Which  all  the  while  ran  blood,  great  Caesar  fell. 
O,  what  a  fall  was  there,  my  countrymen ! 
Then  I,  and  you,  and  all  of  us  fell  down, 
Whilst  bloody  treason  flourish'd  over  us. 

O,  now  you  weep  ;  and,  I  perceive,  you  feel 
The  dint  of  pity :  these  are  gracious  drops. 
Kind  souls,  what,  weep  you,  when  you  but  behold 
Our  Caesar's  vesture  wounded  ?     Look  you  here, 
Here  is  himself,  marr'd,  as  you  see,  with  traitors. 

1  Cit.  O  piteous  spectacle ! 

2  Cit.  O  noble  Caesar ! 

3  Cit.  O  woeful  day  ! 

4  Cit.  O  traitors,  villains  ! 


184  Latin   Composition. 

1  Cit.  O  most  bloody  sight ! 

2  Cit.  We  will  be  reveng'd. 

Citizens.  Revenge,  —  about,  —  seek,  —  burn,  —  fire,  —  kill, 
—  slay,  —  let  not  a  traitor  live  ! 
Ant.  Stay,  countrymen. 

1  Cit.  Peace  there !  hear  the  noble  Antony. 

2  Cit.  We'll  hear  him,  we'll  follow  him,  we'll  die  with  him. 
Ant.  Good  friends,  sweet  friends,  let  me  not  stir  you  up 

To  such  a  sudden  flood  of  mutiny. 

They  that  have  done  this  deed  are  honourable  : 

What  private  griefs  they  have,  alas,  I  know  not, 

That  made  them  do't ;  they're  wise  and  honourable, 

And  will,  no  doubt,  with  reasons  answer  you. 

I  come  not,  friends,  to  steal  away  your  hearts  : 

I  am  no  orator,  as  Brutus  is ; 

But,  as  you  know  me  all,  a  plain  blunt  man, 

That  love  my  friend  ;  and  that  they  know  full  well 

That  gave  me  public  leave  to  speak  of  him. 

For  I  have  neither  wit,  nor  words,  nor  worth, 

Action,  nor  utterance,  nor  the  power  of  speech, 

To  stir  men's  blood  :  I  only  speak  right  on  ; 

I  tell  you  that  which  you  yourselves  do  know ; 

Show  you  sweet  Caesar's  wounds,  poor,  poor  dumb  mouths, 

And  bid  them  speak  for  me  :  but  were  I  Brutus, 

And  Brutus  Antony,  there  were  an  Antony 

Would  ruffle  up  your  spirits,  and  put  a  tongue 

In  every  wound  of  Caesar,  that  should  move 

The  stones  of  Rome  to  rise  in  mutiny. 


INDEX. 


A  or  an  (indefinite  article),  18. 

Ablative  as  Object,  21  ;  of  Separa- 
tion, 32  ;  with  Comparatives,  32  ; 
of  Time,  39  ;  Ablative  Absolute, 
use  of,  58. 

Abstract  term,  expressed  by  sub- 
stantive clause,  75 ;  use  of, 
avoided  in  Latin,  121,  122. 

Accusative  as  Object,  21. 

Adjective,  position  of,  2 ;  agree- 
ment, 6 ;  special  uses,  8 ;  used 
as  noun,  8  ;  as  abstract,  9  ;  for 
the  possessive,  9 ;  with  Cases, 
23  ;  for  genitive,  35. 

A  FEW,  Or  SEVERAL,  l8. 

Allusive  expressions  (in  English), 
often  omitted  in  Latin,  125. 

Antecedent  noun  in  relative  clause, 
preceding  the  demonstrative,  15. 

Any  ("  any  one  who  " ),  18. 

Apposition,  examples  of  its  use,  3. 

As  (correlative),  16. 

Cases,  constructions  of,  20-44;  as 
objects  of  Verbs,  20 ;  as  modify- 
ing Adjectives,  23  ;  indirect  re- 
lations, 25 ;  expressing  Cause, 
Means,  and  Quality,  28  ;  Separa- 
tion and  Comparison,  32  ;  the 
Genitive,  34  ;  use  of  Two  Cases, 
27  ;  of  Time  and  Place,  39  ;  with 
Prepositions,  43. 

Cause  and  Occasion,  29 ;  clauses 
of,  69. 

Characteristic,  clauses  of,  70. 

Compound  Verbs,  regimen  of,  43, 44. 

Concessive  expressions,  73. 

Concrete  terms  preferred  in  Latin, 
122. 

Conditional  Sentences,  72. 


Cum  or  dum}  clause  with,  used  in- 
stead of  participle,  57,  58. 

Dates,  how  expressed,  40. 

Dative  of  indirect  object,  21  ;  vari- 
ous uses  of,  25-27. 

Depriving,  expressions  of,  32. 

Bum,  clause  with,  used  instead  of 
participle,  57,  58. 

Each,  19 ;  Either,  18 ;  Every,  19. 

Exclamation,  forms  of,  86. 

"  Far  from  "  (with  participial  noun), 
how  to  be  expressed,  83. 

"From"  (with  participial  noun), ex- 
pressed by  quominus  or  quin,  84. 

General  Precepts,  how  expressed 
in  Latin,  64. 

Genitive,  its  position,  2  ;  as  object, 
21  ;  of  value,  30;  special  uses  of, 
34;  partitive  uses,  35. 

Gerundive  constructions  (English 
participial  noun),  60. 

Have,  its  uses  as  auxiliary,  84. 

Hendiadys,  in  Latin  use,  5,  123. 

Historical  Infinitive,  46. 

Historical  Present,  45. 

Hour  of  the  day,  40. 

Imperative  forms  of  expression,  63. 

Indirect  Discourse,  80. 

Indirect  Questions,  81. 

Infinitive,  its  uses,  53-56  ;  historical, 
46  ;  as  abstract  noun,  53  ;  forms 
in  Indirect  Discourse,  54. 

"In  respect  to"  (specification),  24. 

Intermediate  Clauses,  yy,  78. 

yam,  to  express  beginning  of  an 
action,  46. 

"Law,"  expressions ,  for,  in  Latin, 
120. 

Literal  forms  of  speech,  123. 


1 86 


Index. 


Main  Word,  position  of,  2,  129. 

"Manage  to,"  &c,  how  expressed 
in  Latin,  83. 

Modifying  word,  position  of,  2. 

Months,  names  of,  40. 

Must,  &c,  expressed  by  Gerundive 
(always  passive),  49. 

Object  Cases,  20,  21  ;  indirect,  26, 

.    37  ;  after  compound  verbs,  43,  44. 

OJficium,  equivalent  to  "sense  of 
duty,"  121. 

Order  of  Words,  1-3. 

Ought,  &c.  (Gerundive),  49. 

Parenthetical  expressions,  "  to  be 
brief,"  "  so  to  speak,"  &c,  84. 

Participial  Noun  (-ing),  how  ex- 
pressed in  Latin,  60;  Construc- 
tions, 57. 

Participles  :  agreement  of,  in  com- 
pound tenses,  7  ;  substituted  by 
temporal  clause,  57 ;  as  modi- 
fiers, 58. 

Passive  Voice,  uses  of,  49,  50 ;  use 
of  cases  with,  51. 

Periodical  structure,  126. 

Place,  names  of,  and  their  con- 
struction, 41. 

Point  of  View  in  Latin  often  differs 
from  that  in  English,  43,  121. 

Position  expressed  by  ab,  43. 

Possessives,  n,  12. 

Potential  Mood  (English),  how  ex- 
pressed in  Latin,  63. 

Prepositions  (Latin),  use  of,  42;  in 
Compounds,  43,  44. 

Price  and  Value,  how  expressed,  30. 

Pronoun,  use  of,  5,  10 ;  Reflexive, 
11;  Demonstrative,  13;  Rela- 
tive, 14;  Interrogative,  17;  In- 
definite, 18. 

Purpose,  with  Gerundive,  61  ; 
Clause  of,  69,  70. 

Quality,  how  expressed,  29. 

Quin  or  quominus,  clause  with,  84. 

Reflexive  Pronoun,  11. 


Relative  Clause,  its  position,  2,  15; 
the  relative  not  to  be  omitted,  15  ; 
used  for  other  constructions, 
15;  as  Connective,  16;  caution 
as  to  its  use,  126  (0),  128  (v). 

Result,  Clause  of,  69. 

Saying,  &c,  Verbs  of,  followed  by 
Indirect  Discourse,  54,  80. 

Sentence,  form  of,  126-129. 

Separation,  &c,  32. 

Several,  18. 

Societas  (the  Latin  word),  121. 

Subject,  to  be  expressed  in  indirect 
discourse,  80 ;  is  a  person  rather 
than  a  thing,  a  thing  rather  than 
an  abstraction,  121. 

Subjunctive  (English),  how  ren- 
dered in  Latin,  63. 

Substantive  Clauses,  74-76 ;  for 
abstract  noun,  75. 

Tenses,  narrative,  use  of,  45,  46; 
perfect  and  imperfect,  45  ;  present 
as  perfect,  46 ;  sequence  of,  in 
indirect  discourse,  81  ;  with  as 
if,  and  similar  phrases,  yy 

That,  as  preventing  repetition,  12; 
as  introducing  indirect  discourse, 
54,  80  ;  various  clauses  with,  75. 

Time,  expressions  of,  40 ;  relations 
of,  66. 

To  or  for,  24,  25,  26. 

"To  be  brief,"  "so  to  speak,"  and 
similar  phrases,  84. 

Too  .  .  .  to,  expressed  by  com- 
parative with  qnam  tit,  70,  71. 

Two  Cases  following  a  verb,  37. 

Value,  expressions  of,  30. 

Verb,  agreement  of,  4,  5 ;  uses  of, 
45-64- 

When,  expressions  signifying,  66 ; 
meaning  whenever,  67  ;  meaning 
since,  67. 

Without,  followed  by  Participial 
Noun,  how  expressed  in  Latin,  61. 

Word  or  Phrase,  choice  of,  1 10-126. 


INDEX 

TO  THE  SYNTAX   OF  ALLEN  AND  GREENOUGH'S    LATIN  GRAMMAR,   WITH 
PARALLEL   REFERENCES   TO   GILDERSLEEVE'S   GRAMMAR. 


A.  &G. 


G. 

A.&G. 

G. 

A.  &G. 

G 

I 

192 

48      3 

50      c 

376 

2 

>» 

a 

617 

R 

11   R 

3 

284,  326 

b 

618,  622 

d 

381,  382 

4 

c 

622 

e 

389  R2 

5 

474 

d 

618 

405  R3 

6 

475,  612 

e 

616  R  2 

R 

418  end 

7 

201,  202  R  I 

4 

612  R  I 

51 

343 

S 

.„       5 

613  R  I 

N 

„     R  I 

202,  319 

49 

202 

I 

344 

I 

318 

R 

319  R  1 

a 

„ 

2 

i97i  324 

I 

28  r  &  R  2 

b 

.,    R  1 

a 

319 

a 

233 

c 

348 

b 

412  R  2 

b 

11   R  2 

2 

345 

c 

319  R  2 

c 

202  R  I 

a 

11 

N 

359 

d 

281  Exc.  1 

R 

„    Ri 

202,  285 

2 

194 

R  2 

347 

R 

324 

a 

198 

R  3 

>i 

I 

281 

b 

199  R  3 

J 

345 

2 

286 

c 

688,  200 

c 

346,  344 

a 

281  Exc.  2 

50 

357 

d 

b 

282 

1 

360 

R  I 

330 

c 

„ 

a 

•  1    R  1 

R  2 

d 

202  R  X 

b 

„    R3 

e 

346 

e 

202  R  s 

c 

365 

344  R  2 

616  R  3 

d 

»i    R  1 

R 

11 

f 

202  R  2 

R 

M    R2,3 

/ 

208 

3 

195  R  * 

e 

367  R 

345  R  3 

N 

M 

f 

359 

g 

344  R  3 

a 

i 

364 

388  R  I 

b 

293  R  2 

n    R 

3 

349 

c 

284  R 

i 

379 

R 

i>    R2 

440 

R 

37* 

<z 

346 

4 

2 

366 

3 

322 

a 

195  R2 

a 

369 

4 

206 

b 

»' 

b 

368 

a 

353 

c 

202  R  4 

c 

37i 

3 

352 

d 

423 

R 

„     R2 

f 

11    * 

535 

d 

371 

R 

M 

195  R4 

e 

i>    R7 

5 

350 

5 

360  R  1 

R  1 

.1    R5 

R 

11 

a 

„ 

R  2 

370  R  2 

6 

356  &R 

b 

363 

R3 

368  R  2 

a 

,1    R3 

c 

11     R  1 

R4 

361  R  2 

b 

•1    R2 

6 

324  R6 

3 

36l 

c 

11    R  1 

7 

314 

a 

357  R  1 

R 

11     11 

a 

11 

b 

373,  374 

d 

„    R4 

b 

c 

374  R  2 

e 

355 

8 

287  R 

R 

,.    R3 

7 

343 

9 

306 

4 

356  R  I 

N 

11 

616 

R 

361  R  I 

a 

,.    R  2 

N 

4 

1 

354 

I 

616 

a 

375 

c 

„    R 

2 

1.     R3 

« 

II    K  1,2 

d 

35i 

rt 

619 

* 

377  &  R  1 

R 

344  »  * 

b 

618  R3 

R 

•  1     R2 

52 

327 

Parallel  References. 


A.  &G. 
52 


53 


54 


G. 

A.  &  G. 

G. 

A.  &G. 

R 

207 

54   3 

40I  &  R 

57  n 

I 

329 

8 

404 

c 

R 

207 

a 

379 

5 

a 

329  R  1 

R 

380 

R 

b 

331 

b 

379 

6 

c 

329  R  I 

9 

397 

7 

d 

330 

10 

387 

a 

e 

696 

a 

4»7»  373  R  l 

b 

/ 

403  83 

R 

2 

333 

b 

408-9 

tf 

a 

334 

N 

408  R 

R 

b 

33o  R  1 

f 

438  R2 

d 

c 

333 

d 

384.  392 

8 

R 

„  R  2 

55   1 

392,  337 

M 

d 

„  &  R  2 

a 

>»   >» 

a 

3 

33i  R  2 

£ 

392  R  2 

b 

a 

5»    »> 

2 

335 

c 

b 

»>    l» 

N 

328 

d 

c 

332 

a 

364  R 

N 

R 

„  R2 

b 

335 

e 

4 

3 

342,  384,  388 

N 

a 

34° 

N 

413 

R  I 

b 

527 

a 

411 

R  2 

c 

335-8 

b 

410 

194  R  3 

R 

436 

f 

a 

H 

C 

412 

b 

324  R  1 

R 

39  R 

R 

338 

</ 

412  R  I 

jT 

N 

N 

e 

„  R3 

N 

I 

388-9 

f 

385-6,  384  R  2 

A 

a 

388 

R 

410  R  3,  4 

58 

b 

M 

411  R  I 

1 

c 

»i 

^«    4 

387 

2 

d 

39° 

56 

4'3 

a 

R 

H 

1 

)> 

b 

e 

389  R  2 

a 

417 

c 

R 

373  R  6 

b 

418 

d 

2 

394 

c 

419 

e 

a 

395 

R 

384  R  I 

/ 

R 

>» 

d 

419 

3 

b 

e 

11 

a 

c 

396  &  R  2 

f 

Appendix 

£ 

d 

„  R  I 

g 

418 

f 

3 

406-7 

R 

,,  end 

d 

N 

383 

2 

416  R 

e 

a 

398  R  2 

a 

App'x;  356  r  4 

4 

b 

407  R  I 

* 

418  R 

5 

c 

372  &  R 

f 

417  R 

a 

4 

403 

d 

416  R 

b 

a 

205  R  I 

3 

566, 576 

c 

b 

403 

4 

403 

d 

5 

399 

R 

>» 

R 

N 

397 

-„   5 

414  R 

6 

a 

3"  R  1 

57 

245  R 

7 

K 

„  R  2 

1 

246 

R 

I 

399  R  l 

2 

247 

8 

C 

311  R4 

a 

250-258 

9 

N 

399  R  1 

597-599  ' 

10 

6 

401,  403 

3 

509,  469,  562 

a 

a 

391,  401*403 

N 

b 

R 

346  R  2,  348 

3 

256 

c 

b 

N 

266  R  2 

R 

c 

389  &  R  1 

a 

266-7 

</ 

R 

373  R  6 

b 

266  R  2 

e 

</ 

405 

c 

575 

/ 

* 

400 

d 

266  R  3 

i 

R 

4 

253,  255 

7 

402 

0 

253 

11 

a 

,  R  I 

b 

254 

a 

Parallel  References. 


a.  &  g. 

58 


59 


60 


61 


62 


b 

277  &  R 

530 

c 

274 

d 

27S 

R 

„ 

e 

?> 

f 

240 

S90 

i 

m 

a 

S9i  &R3 

N 

628 

b 

59° 

2 

596* 

a 

»» 

b 

568-9 

*K 

596* 

c 

596 

3 

597 

a 

,, 

b 

599 

N 

„ 

<r 

„  R  I 

d 

„  R  2 

e 

246  R  3 

f 

599  R  3,  5 

4 

597-8 

a 

597 

b 

598 

c 

236  R  3 

d 

597-8 

e 

195  R  6 

f 

598  R  1 

5 

596* 

a 

597  R  3 

b 

569  R  2 

c 

246  R  4 

594 

i 

>> 

a 

,, 

b 

600 

c 

>> 

2 

602 

R 

613  R  2 

a 

602 

b 

252  R  I 

c 

246  R  1-3 

R 

>» 

^ 

604  foil. 

I 

604 

R 

51 

2 

606  foil. 

3 

575 

4 

592 

a 

592  R  2,  s 

b 

»  R4 

c 

597  R4 

499 

d 

606-10 

6l2  R  2 

56l 

i 

563 

568-9 

2 

522,  2 

N 

582  R  I,  633 

a 

563 

R  I 

564-5 

R  2 

563  R 

4 

582 

A.  &G. 


62 


63 


64 


65 


67 


N 

b  1 

K  2 

R3 
c 

R 
d 
e 

N 
/ 


66 


582 


581  R 

582 

579>  574  R 

577-9 

574-5 

587  &R 

589 

538 

539.  587  R 

54i 

636 

587 

544 

545 

545.2 

688  R 

484  R  2 

546 

544  R  1  &  2 

553,  554 

543,  558  R  4 

547.  549 

550,  55i 

633 

634 

633 

3i3 

629  R 

637 

556  R  2 

509»  3,  4 

5°9,  2 

509,3 

54i 

539  R 

S4i  ri 

» 

666 

665 

651 

1,  R  1 

653 

424  R  ^ 

527  R2 

644 

630  R  I,  2 

638,  644 

659 

„  R2 

654  R  I 

„  R  2 

469,  654 

454 

5i4,  5i5  R  3 

654  R  2 

470 

469  R  3 

„  R  I 

>) 

„  R2 

462,  603 

655 

664 

A.  &G. 
68 


69 


70 


71 


G. 


I 

253-4 

B 

254  R  3 

2 

256 

266 

264 

546  R  I 

3 

655 

1 

626 

2 

[l) 

628 

A 

a 

632 

b 

633 

c 

634 

d 

636,  637 

e 

582 

a 

509 

b 

,, 

507 

R 

526 

I 

507 

2 

527. 533 

a 

528 

b 

n  R 

c 

652  R  2 

d 

527  R  3 

3 

546 

a 

„  &R  I 

i 

532 

c 

,, 

1 

608 

d 

424 

546  &  R  2 

200 

e 

547,  549 

f 

552 

K 

546  R  3 

547  R  2 

s 

532  R4 

4 

557 

a 

558 

b 

647  R4 

c 

560 

R 

M  R 

d 

558  R  I 

e 

557 

f 

559 

g 

55'.  1 

R 

M   2 

h 

546  R  2 

N 

M 

5 

525 

a 

„  R  2 

b 

542,  533 

R 

451  foil. 

I 

456-8 

R 

455 

a 

462 

I 

469 

R 

454 

C 

460 

d 

459  R 

2 

460 

R 

461 

a 

460 

b 

459 

c 

461  R 

Parallel  References. 


A.  &G. 
71 


72 


G. 


d 

460,  463 

3 

473 

a 

n 

b 

I 

278 

a 

•1  373  R 

b 

278  R 

c 

572  R,  586 

2 

438 

a 

439 

t 

»»  R 

c 

24a 

d 

,»  R 

3 

667 

R 

h  m 

a 

„  R  2 

A.  &G. 
72 


73 


39° 

b 

23O 

c 

537 

comp.  275,  2 

d 

536,  524  R  1 

4 

279 

a 

239.  073 

b 

599  R  3 

5 

243 

« 

439 

f 

243 

K 

n  R 

428  R  3 

C 

43 1 

I 

427 

R 

.,  R  1,  426 

A.  &G. 
73 


74 


428 
p   R3 

427  R  1 
429  tell. 

429  .&  R 

430  &  R 
433 

43  ?.  434 


435 

436 


LATIN. 

ALLEN  &   GEEENOUGH'S  LATIN   GRAMMAR: 

a  Latin  Grammar  for  schools  and  colleges,  founded  on  Comparative  Grammar. 
12mo.     Half  morocco.  290  pages  (including  supplementary  Outliues  of  Syntax, 

with  new  and  greatly  enlarged  Index) 

The  features  of  this  grammar  to  which  we  invite  attention,  are  :  1.  The  scientific 
form  of  statement  in  the  Etymology,  corresponding  to  the  most  advanced  views  of 
comparative  philologists  ;  2.  The  comparison  with  kindred  languages  suggested 
throughout,  especially  in  numerous  brief  philological  notes,  and  in  references  to  the 
syntax  of  Goodwin's  Greek  Grammar  ;  the  grouping  and  subordination  of  topics  in 
the  Syntax, —  which  contains  nearly  200  cross-references,  with  upwards  of  1,000 
citations  Irom  classic  authors,  — so  that  unusual  brevity  is  attained  without  sacri- 
fice of  completeness. 

ALLEN  &  GEEENOUGH'S  LATIN  METHOD:  a 

Method  of  Instruction  in  Latin  ;  being  a  companion  and  guide  in  the  study  of 
Latin  Grammar.  With  elementary  instruction  in  Heading  at  Sight,  Exercises 
in  Translation  and  Writing,  Notes,  and  Vocabularies  ;  also  "  Outlines  of  Syn- 
tax," taken  from  the  Latin  Grammar.    12mo.     Cloth.     134  pages     . 

ALLEN  &  GEEENOUGH'S  LATIN  COMPOSITION: 

an  Elementary  Guide  to  Writing  in  Latin.    Part  I.  Constructions  of  Syntax; 

Part  II.  Exercises  in  Translation.  12mo.  Cloth.  198  pages  .... 
Part  First  (which  is  published  separately)  consists  of  thirty  progressive  Lessons, 
with  full  instructions,  exercises,  and  vocabulary  ;  and  is  designed  "  to  furnish  a 
sufficient  amount  of  study  and  practice  in  Latin  composition  during  the  last  year 
of  preparation  for  college,  or  the  first  of  a  college  course."  Part  Second  consists  of 
about  forty  exercises  in  translation,  chiefly  narrative,  adapted  to  the  use  of  advanced 
or  college  classes  ;  with  annotated  references  to  the  Lessons  of  Part  I. ,  and  to  the 
sections  of  a  special  Introduction  on  the  Choice  of  Words,  the  Form  of  the  Sentence, 
and  Idiomatic  Usages. 

ALLEN  &   GEEENOUGH'S   02ESAE:    Csesar's  Gallic 

War:  Four  Books.  With  Historical  Introduction,  Notes,  and  a  Copperplate 
Map  of  Gaul.     [With  a  full  Vocabulary  by  R.  F.  Pennell,  of  Phillips  Exeter 

Academy.]    12mo.     Half  morocco.    282  pages 

'    Without  Vocabulary  ...  

The  text  of  this  edition  is  that  of  Nipperdey,  important  variations  being  noticed. 
The  notes  are  unusually  full  in  historical  illustration,  derived  largely  from  Momm- 
sen,  Long,  Merivale,  the  "History  of  Julius  Caesar"  by  Napoleon  III.,  and  the 
excellent  school  edition  of  Moberly.  In  the  earlier  portions  they  are  especially  de- 
signed to  guide  in  a  systematic  and  careful  study  of  Latin  syntax. 

ALLEN  &  GEEENOUGH'S  SALLUST:  The  Conspiracy 

of  Catiline  as  related  by  Sallust.  With  Introduction  and  Notes  explanatory 
and  historical.     12mo.     Cloth.     84  pages 

ALLEN  &  GEEENOUGH'S  CICEEO:  Select  Orations  of 

Cicero,  chronologically  arranged,  cover'ng  the  entire  period  of  his  public  life. 
From  the  text  of  Baiter  and  Kayser.  With  Life,  general  and  special  Introduc- 
tions, and  Index  of  topics  discussed.    12mo.    Half  morocco.    394  pages    . 

The  text  without  notes 

It  is  the  design  of  this  edition  to  give  a  full  view  of  Cicero's  public  career,  as  ora- 
tor and  statesman,  extending  through  about  forty  of  the  most  eventful  years  of  the 
later  Republic.  With  this  view,  the  selection  includes  the  earliest  and  the  latest 
of  his  public  orations,  while  the  special  Introductions  cover  very  fully  the  inter- 
vening political  history.  Besides  the  orations  more  commonly  read  in  schools,  are 
given  the  Roscius  and  Sestius  (ahrHged),  with  the  first  against  Verres  and  the  last 
Philippic, —  thirteen  in  all, —  with  one  or  two  short  passages  of  special  celebrity, for 
practice  in  reading  at  sight  Especial  care  has  been  taken  in  the  department  of 
Antiquities,  which  has  been  treated  in  numerous  notes  (in  smaller  type),  some  of 
them  —  as  that  on  the  Roman  Aristocracy  —  being  brief  essays  on  the  several  topicR. 
The  Introduction  contains  a  classified  list  of  all  the  works  of  Cicero,  with  the 
occasions  and  topics  of  all  of  his  orations. 


ALLEN  &  GREENOUGH'S  CATO  MAJOR:    Cicero 

De  Senectute,  a  Dialogue  on  Old  Age.  With  Introduction  (on  the  adoption  in 
Rome  of  the  Greek  philosophy)  and  Notes.    12mo.    Cloth.    57  pages 

ALLEN  &  GREENOUGH'S  OVID :   Selections  from  the 

Poems  of  Ovid,  chiefly  toe  Metamorphoses.  With  special  Introductions,  Notes, 
and  Index  of  Proper  Names.     12mo.     Half  morocco.    283  pages 

The  introductions  to  the  passages  from  the  Metamorphoses  (23  in  number)  give 
the  entire  argument  of  the  poem,  that  of  omitted  portions  bracketed.  Tne  other 
selections  include  those  of  special  interest  as  illustrating  the  poet's  life  ;  and  a  list 
U  given  of  all  his  writings,  with  their  topics  and  occasions.  The  Notes  contain 
brief  instructions  on  scanning  at  sight. 

ALLEN  &  GREENOUGH'S  VIRGIL :    The  Poems  of 

Virgil  ;  Vol.  I.  containing  the  Pastoral  Poems  {Bucolics)  and  Six  Books  of  the 
.aSneid.  Chiefly  from  the  text  of  Ribbeck,  with  select  various  Readings,  Intro- 
ductions, Notes,  and  Index  of  Plants  (compiled  chiefly  from  Fee's  Flore  de 
Virgile,  contained  in  Lemaire's  "  Bibliotheca  Classica  Latina").     12mo      Half 

morocco.     372  pages 

The  text  without  notes 

The  Notes  of  this  edition  (which  are  brief  and  very  numerous:  are  particularly 
Indebted  to  Conington,  and  are  designed  "to  give  not  only  what  may  serve  the 
learner  in  the  bare  understanding  of  the  text ;  but,  along  with  it,  some  hint  of  that 
wealth  of  traditional  interpretation  which  is  more  important,  perhaps,  in  the  study 
of  Virgil  than  in  that  of  any  other  ancient  poet." 

ALLEN  &  GREENOUGH'S  VIRGIL.    With  Vocabu- 

lary.    12mo.    Half  morocco.    588  pages 

ALLEN  &  GREENOUGH'S  Course  No.  I.    A  Full  Pre- 

paratory  Course  of  Latin  Prose  ;  consisting  of  Four  Books  of  Caesar's  Gallic 
War,  Sallust's  Conspiracy  of  Catiline,  Eight  Orations  of  Cicero,  and  De  Senec- 
tute ( Cato  Major).    12mo.     Half  morocco.     582  pages 

ALLEN  &    GREENOUGH'S  Course   No.  II.     Second 

Preparatory  Course  of  Latin  Prose  ;  containing  Four  Books  of  Caesar's  Gallic  War, 
and  Eight  Orations  of  Cicero.  With  Vocabulary  by  R.  F.  Pennell.  12mo. 
Half  morocco.    518  pages 

N.  B.  Course  No.  I.  is  identical  with  the  First  Course  prescribed  for  admission  to 
Harvard  College.  Course  No.  II.  includes  the  usual  amount  required  at  other  col- 
leges. 

ALLEN  &   GREENOUGH'S  CICERO.    Eight  Orations 

of  Cicero.     With  Vocabulary  by  R.  F.  Pennell.     12mo.     Half  morocco.     358 


ALLEN'S  LATIN  GRAMMAR.  12mo.  Cloth.  182  pages 
ALLEN'S  LATIN  LESSONS.  12mo.  Cloth.  146  pages  . 
ALLEN'S  LATIN  READER:  Consisting  of  Selections  from 

Caesar  (the  invasion  of  Britain  and  account  of  the  Gallic  and  German  popula- 
tions), Curtius  (Anecdotes  of  Alexander),  Nepos  (Life  of  Hannibal),  Sallust 
(Jusurtha,  abridged),  Ovid,  Virgil,  Plautns,  and 'Terence  (single  scenes),  Cicero 
and  Pliny  ( Letters),  and  Tacitus  (the  Conflagration  of  Rome).  With  Notes  and 
a  General  Vocabulary.  The  Notes  have  been  adapted  to  Allen  &  Greenough's 
Grammar.     12mo.    Half  morocco.    532  pages 

ALLEN'S  LATIN  SELECTIONS.    Containing  the  first  134 

pages  of  Allen's  Latin  Reader.     With  Notes  adapted  to  A.  k  G.'s  Latin  Gram- 
mar.   12mo.    Half  morocco.    190  pages 


ALLEN'S  LATIN  COMPOSITION.    An  Introduction  to 

Latin  Composition.  (By  W.  F.  Allen.)   New  edition,  adapted  to  Allen  &  Green- 

ouglrs  Grammar.     12mo.     Cloth.     118  pages 

Tbis  book  includes  a  careful  review  of  the  principles  of  Syntax  (beginning  with 

Indirect  Discourse),  with  exercises  in  various  styles  of  composition  selected  from 

classical  authors.    Also  short  exercises  for  oral  practice. 

ALLEN'S  SHORTER  COURSE  OF  LATIN  PROSE. 

Consisting  chiefly  of  the  Prose  Selections  of  Allen's  Latin  Reader  (to  p.  134), 
the  Notes  beiug  wholly  rewritten,  enlarged,  and  adapted  to  Allen  &  Green- 
ough's  Grammar ;  accompanied  by  Six  Orations  of  Cicero,  —  the  Manilian,  the 
four  Catilines,  and  Archias.  With  Vocabulary.  12mo.  Half  morocco.  543 
pages       

ALLEN'S  LATIN  PRIMER.    A  First  Book  of  Latin  for 

Boys  and  Girls.  (By  J.  H.  Allen.)  12mo.  Cloth.  182  pages 
This  is  designed  for  the  use  of  scholars  of  a  younger  class,  and  consists  of  thirty 
Lessons  arranged  so  as  to  give  a  full  outline  of  the  grammar,  with  briet  Rules  of  Syn- 
tax, Tables  of  Inflection,  and  interlined  exercises  tor  practice  in  reading,  compiled 
from  Histories  Sacrce.  The  reading  selections  which  follow  include  Dialogues  from 
Corderius  and  Erasmus  (with  translation),  narratives,  nursery  songs,  mediaeval 
hynins,  etc.,  being  made  up  in  great  part  lrom  modern  Latin  writers. 

ALLEN'S  LATIN  LEXICON :    a  General  Vocabulary  of 

Latin,  with  Supplementary  Tables  of  Dates,  Antiquities,  etc.    By  J.  H.  Allen. 

12mo.     Cloth.    214  pages 

This  little  dictionary  contains  "  about  15,000  words  of  common  use,  besides  more 
than  1,3U0  proper  names  or  adjectives,  and  about  200  dates  (exclusive  of  the  Tables), 
covering  the  more  important  points  of  classical  history  and  mythology."  It  is  be- 
lieved to  be  complete  for  the  entire  introductory  course  of  Latin  authors,  including 
Ovid  and  Virgil. 

LEIGHTON'S  LATIN  LESSONS.     Prepared  to  accompany 

Allen  &  Greenough's  Latin  Grammar.  By  R.  F.Leighton,  former  Master  of 
Melrose  High  School.  Revised  Edition.  12mo.  Half  morocco.  352  pages 
This  work  presents  a  progressive  series  of  exercises  (both  Latin  and  English)  in 
about  eighty  Lessons,  illustrating  the  grammatical  forms  and  the  simpler  principles 
of  syntax.  Synonymes  and  Rules  of  Quantity  are  introduced  from  the  first.  The 
amount  of  illustrative  matter  in  exercises  for  reading  and  writing  or  oral  practice 
is  very  large,  including  portions  of  Viri  RomjE,  and  Woodford's  Epitome  of  the  First 
Book  of  Caesar.  Full  Vocabularies  (prepared  by  R.  F.  Pennell)  accompany  the 
book,  with  questions  for  examination  and  review  of  the  grammar. 

The  Lessons  have  been  entirely  rewritten,  considerably  simplified,  and  more  care- 
fully graded.  With  each  lesson,  definite  directions  have  been  given  in  regard  to  the 
amount  of  the  grammar  to  be  learned.  By  decreasing  the  exercises  to  be  translated 
into  English,  space  has  been  given  to  increase  correspondingly  the  amount  to  be  put 
into  Latin.  Some  instruction  on  the  formation  of  words  has  been  given,  and  the 
references  to  the  grammar  on  that  subject  largely  increased.  The  vocabularies 
have  also  been  carefully  revised. 

MADVIG'S  LATIN  GRAMMAR.     Carefully  revised  by 

Thomas  A.  Thacher,  Yale  College.    12mo.     Half  morocco.    517  pages 
A  book  of  the  very  highest  authority  in  Latin  Syntax,  and  admirably  adapted  to 
the  wants  of  Teachers  and  College  Classes. 

NEW  LATIN   METHOD  :   a  Manual  of  Instruction  in  Latin 
on  the  Basis  of  a  Latin  Method  prepared  by  J.  II.  Allen  and  J.  B.  Greenough. 

12mo.    Cloth.    244  pages 

The  "  New  Method "  contains :  1.  About  thirty  Elementary  Lessons  on  the 
forms  of  the  language,  and  the  constructions  suggested  by  the  definitions  of  cases, 
moods,  etc.,  accompanied  by  full  Paradigms,  and  Exercises  in  Latin  and  English, 
with  partial  vocabularies.  N.  B.  This  portion  of  the  book  can  be  used  independently 
of  the  Grammar,  and  is  sufficient  for  a  course  of  about  a  year's  study  — 2  Con* 
structions  of  Syntax  symmetrically  grouped,  with  full  references  to  the  Grammar, 


each  topic  being  illustrated  by  numerous  examples,  with  exercises  to  be  rendered 
into  Latin,  so  as  to  make  a  full  elementary  manual  of  Latin  Composition.  —  3.  On 
Reading  Latin  :  brief  sections  on  the  Latin  Sentence  with  examples  of  analysis  and 
translation ;  the  Derivation  of  Words ;  and  Reading  at  Sight.  —  4.  Reading  Les- 
sons, with  Vocabularies,  and  Tabular  List  of  Synonymes. 

PARALLEL  RULES  OF  GREEK  and  LATIN  SYN- 
TAX  FOR  USE  IN  SCHOOLS.     Prepared   by  Instructors   in    the  Classical 
Department  of  Williston  Seminary,  at  Easthampton,  Mass      Cloth.    33  pages 
The  object  oi  this  little  pamphlet,  prepared  by  two  instructors  in  Williston  Sem- 
inary, is  to  put  clearly  before  their  pupils  the  correspondences  and  the  differences  in 
Greek  and  Latin  Syntax. 

THE  LATIN  VERB.    Illustrated  by  the  Sanskrit.    By  C.  H. 
Parkhurst.    12mo.    Cloth.    55  pages 

WHITE'S  JUNIOR  STUDENT'S  LATIN-ENGLISH 

LEXICON.     Square  12mo.    662  pages.     Morocco  back 

Sheep  .... 

WHITE'S  JUNIOR  STUDENT'S  LATIN-ENGLISH 

AND  ENGLISH-LATIN  LEXICON.    By  the  Rev.  J.  T.  White,  D  D.,  of 
C.  C.  C.  Oxford,  Rector  of  St.  Martin,  Ludgate,  London.      Revised  Edition. 

Square  12mo.     1058  pages.    Sheep 

"The  present  work  aims  at  furnishing  in  both  its  parts  a  sufficiently  extensive 
vocabulary  for  all  practical  purposes.  The  Latin  words  and  phrases  are  in  all  ca* es 
followed  by  the  name  of  some  standard  Latin  writer,  as  a  guaranty  of  their  author- 
ity ;  and  as  the  work  is  of  a  strictly  elementary  character,  the  conjugation  of  the 
verbs  and  the  genders  and  genitive  cases  of  the  substantives  are  uniformly  added. 
In  the  preparation  of  this  portion  of  the  book,  Dr.  Wh^te  has  had  the  assistance  of 
some  of  the  best  scholars  both  of  Oxford  and  Cambridge."  —  Guardian. 

WHITE'S  JUNIOR  STUDENT'S  ENGLISH-LATIN 

LEXICON.     Square  12mo.     Sheep.     392  pages 

We  have  contracted  with  Messrs.  Longmans,  Green,  &  Co.,  of  London,  for  the 
sole  agency  in  this  country  for  the  above  Latin  Lexicons,  and  shall  endeavor  to  meet 
the  demands  of  the  trade. 


WHITON'S    SIX   WEEKS'    PREPARATION    FOR 

READING  CjESAR.     With  References  to  Allen  &  Greenough's,  Gildersleeve's, 
and  Harkness's  Grammars.    18mo.    Paper  cover  ....... 


GREEK. 


GOODWIN'S    GEEEK  GRAMMAR.    By  William  W. 

Goodwin,  Ph.  D.,  Eliot  Professor  of  Greek  Literature  in  Harvard  University. 

12mo.    Halt  morocco.     262  pages 

The  object  of  this  Grammar  is  to  state  general  principles  clearly  and  distinctly, 
with  special  regard  to  those  who  are  preparing  for  college.  In  the  sections  on  the 
Moods  are  stated,  for  the  first  time  in  an  elementary  form,  the  principles  which  are 
elaborated  in  detail  in  the  author's  "  Syntax  of  the  Greek  Moods  and  Tenses." 


GREEK    MOODS    AND    TENSES.     The  Sixth  Edition. 

By  William  W.  Goodwin,  Eliot  Professor  of  Greek  Literature  in  Harvard  Uni- 
versity.    1  vol.    12mo.    Cloth.    264  pages 

This  work  was  first  published  in  1860,  and  it  appeared  in  a  new  form  —  much  en- 
larged and  in  great  part  rewritten  —  in  1865.  In  the  present  edition  the  whole  has 
been  again  revised  \  some  sections  and  notes  have  been  rewritten,  and  a  few  notes 
have  been  added.  The  object  of  the  work  is  to  give  a  plaiu  statement  of  the  princi- 
ples which  govern  the  construction  of  the  Greek  Moods  and  Tenses,  —  the  most  im- 
portant and  the  most  difficult  part  of  Greek  Syntax. 

GOODWIN'S   GREEK   READER.     Consisting  of  Extracts 

from  Xenophon,  Plato,  Herodotus,  aud  Thuc.ydides  ;  being  the  full  amount  of 
Greek  Prose  required  for  admission  at  Harvard.     With  Maps,  Notes,  Keferences 
to  GOODWIN'S  GREEK  GRAMMAR,  and  parallel  References  to  CROSBY'S  and 
HADLEY'S  GKAMMAKS.     Second  edition,  edited  by  Professor  \Y.  \v\  Good- 
win, of  Harvard  College.     12mo.     Half  morocco.     384  pages       . 
The  revised  edition  contains  the  first  and  second  books  of  the  Anabasis  (in  place 
of  the  third  and  fourth  books  of  the  former  editions)  with  copious  notes,  the  greater 
part'bf  the  second  book  and  an  extract  from  the  seventh  of  the  Hellenica,  with  the 
first  cnapter  of  the  Memorabilia,  of  Xenophon  ;  the  last  part  of  the  Apology,  and  the 
beginning  and  end  of  the  Phaedo,  of  Plato  ;  selections  from  the  sixth,  seventh,  and 
eighth  books  of  Herodotus,  and  from  the  fourth  book  of  Thucydides. 


GOODWIN'S    SELECTIONS    FROM    XENOPHON 

AND  HERODOTUS.  With  Notes  adapted  to  Goodwin's  Greek  Grammar, 
Parallel  References  to  Crosby's  and  Hadley's  Grammars,  and  copper-plate 
Maps.    Edited  by  Professor  VV.  W.  Goodwin  and  John  Williams  White,  of 

Harvard  College.     12mo.     Half  morocco     408  pages 

This  book  contains  the  first  four  books  of  the  Anabasis,  and  the  greater  part  of 
the  second  book  of  the  Hellenica,  of  Xenophon  ;  and  extracts  from  the  sixth,  seventh, 
and  eighth  books  of  Herodotus.  It  has  been  prepared  for  the  use  of  those  who  from 
want  of  time  or  for  other  reasons  are  unable  to  read  the  greater  variety  of  selections 
in  Greek  Prose  which  are  contained  in  Goodwin's  Greek  Reader. 


THE  FIRST  FOUR  BOOKS  OF  THE  ANABASIS 

OF  XENOPHON.  Edited,  with  copious  Notes  and  References  to  Goodwin's 
Greek  Grammar,  Parallel  References  to  Crosby's  and  Hadley's  Grammars,  and 
a  copper-plate  Map,  by  Professor  W.  W.  Goodwin  and  John  Williams  White, 
of  Harvard  College.    12mo.     Half  morocco.     240  pages        .  . 

LEIGHTON'S  GREEK  LESSONS.  Prepared  to  accompany 

Goodwin's  Greek  Grammar.     By  R.  F.  Leighton,  Master  of  Melrose  High  School. 

12mo.     Half  morocco.     264  pages 

This  work  contains  about  one  hundred  lessons,  with  a  progressive  series  of  exer- 
cises (both  Greek  and  English),  mainly  selected  from  the  first  book  of  Xenophon's 
Anabasis.  The  exercises  on  the  Moods  are  sufficient,  it  is  believed,  to  develop  the 
general  principles  as  stated  in  the  Grammar.  The  text  of  four  chapters  of  the 
Anabasis  is  given  entire,  with  notes  and  references.  Full  vocabularies  acconipaav 
the  book. 


LIDDELL    &    SCOTT'S   GREEK-ENGLISH    LEXI- 

CON.  Abridged  from  the  new  Oxford  Edition.  New  Edition.  With  Appendix 
of  Proper  and  Geographical  Names,  by  J.  M.  Whiton.   Square  12mo.   835  pages. 

Morocco  b;iek 

Sheep  binding 

LIDDELL    &    SCOTT'S    GREEK-ENGLISH  LEXI- 

CON.     Tiie  sixth  Oxford  Edition  unabridged.    4to.     1,881  pages. 

Morocco  back 

Sheep  binding •        .        . 

The  English  editions  of  Liddell  &  Scott  are  not  stereotyped ;  but  each  has  been 
thoroughly  revised,  enlarged,  and  printed  anew.  The  sixth  edition,  published  in  1869, 
is  larger  by  one  eighth  than  the  fifth,  and  contains  1,865  pages.  It  is  an  entirely  dif- 
ferent work  from  the  first  edition,  the  whole  department  of  etymology  having  been 
rewritten  in  the  light  of  modern  investigations,  and  the  forms  of  the  irregular  verbs 
being  given  in  greater  detail  by  the  aid  of  Veitch:s  Catalogue.  No  student  of  Greek 
can  artord  to  dispense  with  this  invaluable  Lexicon,  the  price  of  which  is  now  for  the 
first  time  brought  within  the  means  of  the  great  body  of  American  scholars. 

PLATO'S  APOLOGY  OP  SOCRATES  AND  CRITO. 

Edited  by  .John  Williams  White,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Greek  in 

Harvard  Duiversity. 
The  basis  of  this  work  will  be  the  German  edition  of  Dr  Christian  Cron.  (Platons 
Vertlieidigungsrede  des  Sokrates  und  Kriton.  Sechste  Auflage.  Leipzig,  Teubner, 
1875.)  To  the  matter  contained  in  Dr.  Cron's  edition  there  will  be  added  notes  by 
the  Editor  and  from  other  sources,  analyses,  and  extended  references  to  Goodwin 
and  lladley.  The  book  will  be  tor  the  class-room,  and  ali  matter  not  of  direct  value 
to  the  student  will  be  rigidly  excluded. 

THE  CEDIPUS  TYRANNUS  OF  SOPHOCLES.    Ed- 

ited,  with  an  Introduction,  Notes,  and  full  explanation  of  the  metres,  by  John 
Williams  Whit*,  Ph.  D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Greek  in  Harvard  University. 
12mo.     Cloth.    219  pages 


THE  MEDEA  OP  EURIPIDES.  Edited,  with  Notts  and 
an  Introduction,  by  Frederic  D.  Allen,  Ph.  D.,  Professorirfrthe  University  of 
Cincinnati.     12mo.     Cloth.    141  pages         .        .        .     4*        .... 

SIDGWICK'S       INTRODUCTION      TO       GREEK 

PftOoE  COMPOSITION.     12mo.     Cloth.    280  pages 

WHITE'S    FIRST   LESSONS    IN    GREEK./ Prepared 

to  accompany  G-odwin's  Greek  Grammar,  and  designed  as  an  Introduction  to 
his  Greek  Reader.     By  John  Williams  White,  t*h  D.,  Assistant  Professor  of 
Greek  in  Harvard  University.     12mo.     Half  morocco.    305  pages 
A  series  of  seventy-five  lessons  with  progressive  Greek-English  and  English-Greek 

exercises.     Followed  by  a  series  of  additional  exercises  on  Forms,  and  complete 

vocabularies. 

WHITON'S  SELECT  ORATIONS  OP  LYSIAS.    Com- 

pri.-ing  the  Defence  of  Mantitheus,  the  Oration  against  Eratosthenes,  the 
Keply  to  u  The  Overthrow  of  the  Democracy^"  and  the  Areopagitic  Oration 
concerning  the  Sacred  Olive-Trunk.    Edited  by  James  Morris  Whiton,  Ph.  D. 

12mo.     151  pages 

The  grammatical  notes  deal  almost  wholly  with  the  syntax,  —  as  befits  a  work  of 
this  grade,  —  and  have  been  prepared  with  a  special  aim  to  elucidate  the  usage  of 
the  verb.  References  are  made,  for  the  most  part,  to  Goodwin's  Greek  Moods  and 
Tenses,  and  Goodwin's  and  Hadley's  Grammars. 

YONGE'S     ENGLISH-GREEK    LEXICON.      Square 

12mo.    Cloth.    483  pages 


X 


481 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


J 


> 


/If'' 


l\ 


/ 


7)/7f? 


